Manual Book Scanner Zebra Ds9308-Prg-En

DS9308
Imaging Scanner
Product Reference
Guide
MN-003532-01
Copyright
© 2019 ZIH Corp. and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. ZEBRA and the stylized Zebra head are trademarks of
ZIH Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
COPYRIGHTS & TRADEMARKS: For complete copyright and trademark information, go to www.zebra.com/
copyright.
WARRANTY: For complete warranty information, go to www.zebra.com/warranty.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT: For complete EULA information, go to www.zebra.com/eula.
For Australia Only

For Australia Only. This warranty is given by Zebra Technologies Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd., 71 Robinson Road, #05-
02/03, Singapore 068895, Singapore. Our goods come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the
Australia Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any
other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the goods repaired or replaced if the
goods fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure.
Zebra Technologies Corporation Australia’s limited warranty above is in addition to any rights and remedies you
may have under the Australian Consumer Law. If you have any queries, please call Zebra Technologies
Corporation at +65 6858 0722. You may also visit our website: www.zebra.com for the most updated warranty
terms.
Terms of Use
• Proprietary Statement
This manual contains proprietary information of Zebra Technologies Corporation and its subsidiaries
(“Zebra Technologies”). It is intended solely for the information and use of parties operating and
maintaining the equipment described herein. Such proprietary information may not be used, reproduced,
or disclosed to any other parties for any other purpose without the express, written permission of Zebra
Technologies.
• Product Improvements
Continuous improvement of products is a policy of Zebra Technologies. All specifications and designs are
subject to change without notice.
• Liability Disclaimer
Zebra Technologies takes steps to ensure that its published Engineering specifications and manuals are
correct; however, errors do occur. Zebra Technologies reserves the right to correct any such errors and
disclaims liability resulting therefrom.
• Limitation of Liability
In no event shall Zebra Technologies or anyone else involved in the creation, production, or delivery of the
accompanying product (including hardware and software) be liable for any damages whatsoever
(including, without limitation, consequential damages including loss of business profits, business
interruption, or loss of business information) arising out of the use of, the results of use of, or inability to
use such product, even if Zebra Technologies has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Some
jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above
limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
2
Revision History
Changes to the original guide are listed below:
Change Date Description
-01 Rev A 09/2019 Initial release.
3
Table of Contents
Copyright ........................................................................................................................................... 2
For Australia Only ....................................................................................................................... 2
Terms of Use .................................................................................................................................... 2
Revision History ................................................................................................................................ 3
List of Figures ...................................................................................................................................... 20
List of Tables........................................................................................................................................ 21
About This Guide

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 23
Configurations ................................................................................................................................. 23
Accessories ..................................................................................................................................... 24
Chapter Descriptions ...................................................................................................................... 25
Notational Conventions ................................................................................................................... 26
Related Documents and Software .................................................................................................. 27
Service Information ......................................................................................................................... 27
Provide Documentation Feedback .................................................................................................. 27
Getting Started
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 28
Interfaces ........................................................................................................................................ 29
Unpacking ....................................................................................................................................... 29
Features .......................................................................................................................................... 30
Setting Up the Scanner ................................................................................................................... 31
Inserting the Interface Cable ..................................................................................................... 31
Removing the Interface Cable ................................................................................................... 32
Connecting Power (if required) ................................................................................................. 33
Configuring the Scanner ........................................................................................................... 33
Mounting the Scanner ..................................................................................................................... 33
Multi-Mount Bracket .................................................................................................................. 33
Installing Multi-Mount With Adhesive Pad ........................................................................... 33
Installing Multi-Mount With Screws on Table ...................................................................... 34
Installing Multi-Mount with Screws on Wall ......................................................................... 35
4
Table of Contents
Locking Table Mount ................................................................................................................. 36

Installing Locking Table Mount ............................................................................................ 36
Removing DS9308 from Locking Table Mount ................................................................... 38
123Scan and Software Tools

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 39
123Scan .......................................................................................................................................... 39
Communication with 123Scan ................................................................................................... 40
123Scan Requirements ............................................................................................................. 40
123Scan Information ................................................................................................................. 40
Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos .................................................................... 41
Data Capture
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 42
Beeper and LED Indicators ............................................................................................................. 42
Scanning ......................................................................................................................................... 45
Hands-free Scanning ................................................................................................................ 45
Hand-held Scanning .................................................................................................................. 45
Aiming ....................................................................................................................................... 46
Decode Ranges .............................................................................................................................. 47
Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) .............................................................................................. 47
Installing .................................................................................................................................... 47
Checkpoint EAS Model Compatibility .................................................................................. 47
Considerations .................................................................................................................... 47
Checkpoint Contact Information .......................................................................................... 48
Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 49
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................... 49
Known Harmful Ingredients ....................................................................................................... 49
Approved Cleaners for the Scanner .......................................................................................... 49
Cleaning the Scanner ................................................................................................................ 50
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................. 51
Report Product Information ....................................................................................................... 54
Report Software Version ..................................................................................................... 54
Report Serial Number ......................................................................................................... 54
Report Manufacturing Information ....................................................................................... 54
Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................. 55
Scanner Signal Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 58
User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 59
Setting Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 59
Scanning Sequence Examples ................................................................................................. 59
Errors While Scanning .............................................................................................................. 60
User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults ....................................................... 60
Standard User Preferences ............................................................................................................ 62
5
Table of Contents
Default Parameters ................................................................................................................... 62

Write to Custom Defaults .................................................................................................... 62
Parameter Barcode Scanning ................................................................................................... 63
Beep After Good Decode .......................................................................................................... 63
Beep Volume ............................................................................................................................. 64
Beep Tone ................................................................................................................................. 65
Standard Beep Tones ......................................................................................................... 65
Beep Duration ........................................................................................................................... 66
Volume Adjustment Trigger Timeout ......................................................................................... 67
Suppress Power Up Beeps ....................................................................................................... 68
Direct Decode Indicator ............................................................................................................. 69
Low Power Mode ...................................................................................................................... 70
Time Delay to Low Power Mode ......................................................................................... 71
Trigger Mode ............................................................................................................................. 73
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern ............................................................................................ 74
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern ................................................................... 75
Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout ............................................................................................ 76
Picklist Mode ............................................................................................................................. 77
Continuous Barcode Read ........................................................................................................ 78
Unique Barcode Reporting ........................................................................................................ 78
Decode Session Timeout .......................................................................................................... 79
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol ............................................................................... 79
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols ......................................................................... 80
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol ............................................................................................ 80
Mobile Phone/Display Mode ..................................................................................................... 81
PDF Prioritization ...................................................................................................................... 82
PDF Prioritization Timeout ........................................................................................................ 82
Decoding Illumination ................................................................................................................ 83
Illumination Brightness .............................................................................................................. 83
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger Modes Only) .................................................................. 85
Product ID (PID) Type ............................................................................................................... 85
Product ID (PID) Value .............................................................................................................. 86
ECLevel ..................................................................................................................................... 86
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters ............................................................................................... 87
Enter Key .................................................................................................................................. 87
Tab Key ..................................................................................................................................... 87
Transmit Code ID Character ..................................................................................................... 88
Prefix/Suffix Values ................................................................................................................... 89
Scan Data Transmission Format ............................................................................................... 90
FN1 Substitution Values ............................................................................................................ 92
Transmit “No Read” Message ................................................................................................... 93
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval ................................................................................................... 94
securPharm Decoding ............................................................................................................... 95
securPharm Output Formatting ................................................................................................. 96
Sample GS1 Format ........................................................................................................... 96
Sample IFA Format ............................................................................................................. 97
securPharm Output Formatting Barcodes ........................................................................... 98
Imager Preferences
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 99
6
Table of Contents
Setting Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 99

Scanning Sequence Examples ............................................................................................... 100
Errors While Scanning ............................................................................................................ 100
Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults .......................................................................... 100
Image Capture Preferences .......................................................................................................... 102
Operational Modes .................................................................................................................. 102
Decode Mode .................................................................................................................... 102
Snapshot Mode ................................................................................................................. 102
Image Capture Illumination ..................................................................................................... 103
Image Capture Autoexposure ................................................................................................. 103
Fixed Exposure ....................................................................................................................... 104
Analog and Digital Gain .......................................................................................................... 105
Analog Gain ...................................................................................................................... 105
Digital Gain ........................................................................................................................ 105
Gain/Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode ............................................................................. 106
Snapshot Mode Timeout ......................................................................................................... 107
Snapshot Aiming Pattern ........................................................................................................ 108
Silence Operational Mode Changes ....................................................................................... 108
Image Cropping ....................................................................................................................... 109
Crop to Pixel Addresses .......................................................................................................... 109
Image Size (Number of Pixels) ............................................................................................... 111
Image Brightness (Target White) ............................................................................................ 112
JPEG Image Options .............................................................................................................. 112
JPEG Quality Value ................................................................................................................ 113
JPEG Size Value ..................................................................................................................... 113
Image Enhancement ............................................................................................................... 114
Image File Format Selector ..................................................................................................... 115
Image Rotation ........................................................................................................................ 116
Bits Per Pixel ........................................................................................................................... 117
Signature Capture ................................................................................................................... 118
Output File Format ............................................................................................................ 118
Signature Capture File Format Selector .................................................................................. 119
Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel ............................................................................................. 120
Signature Capture Width ......................................................................................................... 121
Signature Capture Height ........................................................................................................ 121
Signature Capture JPEG Quality ............................................................................................ 121
Symbologies
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 123
Setting Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 123
Symbology Parameter Defaults .................................................................................................... 124
Enable/Disable All Code Types .................................................................................................... 131
UPC/EAN/JAN .............................................................................................................................. 131
UPC-A ..................................................................................................................................... 131
UPC-E ..................................................................................................................................... 132
UPC-E1 ................................................................................................................................... 132
EAN-8/JAN-8 ........................................................................................................................... 133
EAN-13/JAN-13 ....................................................................................................................... 133
7
Table of Contents
Bookland EAN ......................................................................................................................... 134

Bookland ISBN Format ........................................................................................................... 135
ISSN EAN ............................................................................................................................... 136
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals .................................................................................. 137
User-Programmable Supplementals ....................................................................................... 140
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy ............................................................................ 140
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format ......................................................................... 141
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit ................................................................................................... 142
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit ................................................................................................... 142
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit ................................................................................................. 143
UPC-A Preamble ..................................................................................................................... 144
UPC-E Preamble ..................................................................................................................... 145
UPC-E1 Preamble ................................................................................................................... 146
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A ....................................................................................................... 147
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A ..................................................................................................... 147
EAN/JAN Zero Extend ............................................................................................................ 148
UCC Coupon Extended Code ................................................................................................. 148
Coupon Report ........................................................................................................................ 149
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone ...................................................................................................... 150
Code 128 ...................................................................................................................................... 150
Set Lengths for Code 128 ....................................................................................................... 151
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) ......................................................................................... 152
ISBT 128 ................................................................................................................................. 153
ISBT Concatenation ................................................................................................................ 153
Check ISBT Table ................................................................................................................... 154
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy ........................................................................................... 155
Code 128 <FNC4> .................................................................................................................. 155
Code 128 Security Level ......................................................................................................... 156
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone .............................................................................................. 157
Code 39 ........................................................................................................................................ 157
Trioptic Code 39 ...................................................................................................................... 158
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 .................................................................................................. 158
Code 32 Prefix ........................................................................................................................ 159
Set Lengths for Code 39 ......................................................................................................... 159
Code 39 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................ 161
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit ................................................................................................ 161
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion .............................................................................................. 162
Code 39 Security Level ........................................................................................................... 163
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone ................................................................................................ 164
Code 93 ........................................................................................................................................ 164
Code 11 ........................................................................................................................................ 167
Code 11 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................ 169
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits .............................................................................................. 170
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) ................................................................................................................. 170
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 ........................................................................................... 171
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................................... 172
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit ................................................................................................... 173
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 ...................................................................................................... 173
Febraban ................................................................................................................................. 174
8
Table of Contents
I 2 of 5 Security Level .............................................................................................................. 175

I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone ................................................................................................... 176
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF) .................................................................................................................... 176
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 ................................................................................................ 177
Codabar (NW - 7) .......................................................................................................................... 179
Set Lengths for Codabar ......................................................................................................... 179
CLSI Editing ............................................................................................................................ 181
NOTIS Editing ......................................................................................................................... 181
Codabar Security Level ........................................................................................................... 182
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters ............................................................ 183
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification ............................................................................... 183
Transmit Codabar Check Digit ................................................................................................ 184
MSI ................................................................................................................................................ 184
Set Lengths for MSI ................................................................................................................ 185
MSI Check Digits ..................................................................................................................... 187
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) ................................................................................................... 187
MSI Check Digit Algorithm ...................................................................................................... 189
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone ........................................................................................................ 189
Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................................... 190
Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................................................. 190
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 ................................................................................................... 191
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit ......................................................................................................... 193
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit .......................................................................................... 193
Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................................ 194
Inverse 1D ............................................................................................................................... 194
GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................................. 196
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated,
GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional ............................................. 196
GS1 DataBar Limited .............................................................................................................. 197
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked ................................................... 197
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN ................................................................................ 198
GS1 DataBar Security Level ................................................................................................... 199
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check ....................................................................................... 200
Symbology-Specific Security Features ......................................................................................... 201
Redundancy Level .................................................................................................................. 201
Security Level .......................................................................................................................... 203
1D Quiet Zone Level ............................................................................................................... 204
Intercharacter Gap Size .......................................................................................................... 205
Composite ..................................................................................................................................... 205
Composite CC-C ..................................................................................................................... 205
Composite CC-A/B .................................................................................................................. 206
Composite TLC-39 .................................................................................................................. 206
Composite Inverse .................................................................................................................. 206
UPC Composite Mode ............................................................................................................ 208
Composite Beep Mode ............................................................................................................ 209
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes ................................................... 209
2D Symbologies ............................................................................................................................ 210
PDF417 ................................................................................................................................... 210
MicroPDF417 .......................................................................................................................... 210
Code 128 Emulation ................................................................................................................ 211
Data Matrix .............................................................................................................................. 212
9
Table of Contents
GS1 Data Matrix ...................................................................................................................... 212

Data Matrix Inverse ................................................................................................................. 213
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images ......................................................................................... 214
Maxicode ................................................................................................................................. 215
QR Code ................................................................................................................................. 215
GS1 QR ................................................................................................................................... 216
MicroQR .................................................................................................................................. 216
Linked QR Mode ..................................................................................................................... 217
Aztec ....................................................................................................................................... 218
Aztec Inverse .......................................................................................................................... 218
Han Xin ................................................................................................................................... 219
Han Xin Inverse ....................................................................................................................... 219
Grid Matrix ............................................................................................................................... 220
Grid Matrix Inverse .................................................................................................................. 220
Grid Matrix Mirror .................................................................................................................... 221
DotCode .................................................................................................................................. 222
DotCode Inverse ..................................................................................................................... 223
DotCode Mirrored .................................................................................................................... 224
DotCode Prioritize ................................................................................................................... 225
Macro PDF Features ..................................................................................................................... 225
Flush Macro Buffer .................................................................................................................. 226
Abort Macro PDF Entry ........................................................................................................... 226
Postal Codes ................................................................................................................................. 226
US Postnet .............................................................................................................................. 226
US Planet ................................................................................................................................ 227
Transmit US Postal Check Digit .............................................................................................. 227
UK Postal ................................................................................................................................ 228
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit .............................................................................................. 228
Japan Postal ........................................................................................................................... 229
Australia Post .......................................................................................................................... 229
Australia Post Format .............................................................................................................. 230
Netherlands KIX Code ........................................................................................................... 231
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail ..................................................................................... 231
UPU FICS Postal .................................................................................................................... 232
Mailmark .................................................................................................................................. 232
USB Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 233
Connecting a USB Interface ......................................................................................................... 234
USB Parameter Defaults ............................................................................................................... 235
USB Host Parameters ................................................................................................................... 237
USB Device Type .................................................................................................................... 237
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking ................................................................... 239
USB Keystroke Delay .............................................................................................................. 239
USB Caps Lock Override ........................................................................................................ 240
Barcodes with Unknown Characters ....................................................................................... 240
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 ......................................................................................... 241
10
Table of Contents
USB Fast HID .......................................................................................................................... 241

USB Polling Interval ................................................................................................................ 242
Keypad Emulation ................................................................................................................... 244
Quick Keypad Emulation ......................................................................................................... 244
Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero ..................................................................................... 245
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution ............................................................................................. 245
Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 246
Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................................. 246
Convert Case .......................................................................................................................... 247
USB Static CDC ...................................................................................................................... 248
CDC Beep on <BEL> .............................................................................................................. 248
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive ............................................................................................ 249
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive ................................................................ 249
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version ................................................................................. 249
ASCII Character Sets .................................................................................................................... 250
SSI Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 251
Communication ............................................................................................................................. 251
SSI Commands ....................................................................................................................... 252
SSI Transactions ........................................................................................................................... 253
General Data Transactions ..................................................................................................... 253
ACK/NAK Handshaking .................................................................................................... 253
Decoded Data Transmission ................................................................................................... 254
ACK/NAK Enabled and Packeted Data ............................................................................. 254
ACK/NAK Enabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data .............................................................. 254
ACK/NAK Disabled and Packeted DECODE_DATA ......................................................... 255
ACK/NAK Disabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data ............................................................. 255
Communication Summary ............................................................................................................. 255
RTS/CTS Lines ....................................................................................................................... 255
ACK/NAK Option ..................................................................................................................... 255
Number of Data Bits ................................................................................................................ 255
Serial Response Timeout ........................................................................................................ 256
Retries ..................................................................................................................................... 256
Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking ............................ 256
Errors ...................................................................................................................................... 256
SSI Communication Notes ...................................................................................................... 256
Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI ........................................................................... 257
Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI ............................................................. 258
Command Structure ................................................................................................................ 258
Response Structure ................................................................................................................ 258
Example Transaction .............................................................................................................. 259
Command from Host to Query Packet Size Supported by Device .................................... 259
Response from Device with Packet Size Information ....................................................... 259
Command from Host to Retrieve Diagnostic Information .................................................. 259
Response from Device with Diagnostic Information .......................................................... 259
Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults .................................................................................. 261
11
Table of Contents
SSI Host Parameters .................................................................................................................... 262

Select SSI Host ....................................................................................................................... 262
Baud Rate ............................................................................................................................... 262
Parity ....................................................................................................................................... 264
Check Parity ............................................................................................................................ 265
Stop Bits .................................................................................................................................. 265
Software Handshaking ............................................................................................................ 266
Host RTS Line State ............................................................................................................... 267
Decode Data Packet Format ................................................................................................... 268
Host Serial Response Timeout ............................................................................................... 269
Host Character Timeout .......................................................................................................... 270
Multipacket Option .................................................................................................................. 271
Interpacket Delay .................................................................................................................... 272
Event Reporting ............................................................................................................................ 273
Decode Event .......................................................................................................................... 273
Boot Up Event ......................................................................................................................... 274
Parameter Event ..................................................................................................................... 275
RS-232 Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 276
Connecting an RS-232 Interface ................................................................................................... 277
RS-232 Parameter Defaults .......................................................................................................... 278
RS-232 Host Parameters .............................................................................................................. 279
RS-232 Host Types ................................................................................................................. 281
Baud Rate ............................................................................................................................... 283
Parity ....................................................................................................................................... 284
Stop Bits .................................................................................................................................. 284
Data Bits .................................................................................................................................. 285
Check Receive Errors ............................................................................................................. 285
Hardware Handshaking ........................................................................................................... 286
Software Handshaking ............................................................................................................ 288
Host Serial Response Timeout ............................................................................................... 290
RTS Line State ........................................................................................................................ 291
Beep on <BEL> ....................................................................................................................... 291
Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................................................ 292
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options ...................................................................................................... 293
IBM Interface
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 295
Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host ............................................................................................ 296
IBM Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................................ 297
12
Table of Contents
IBM Host Parameters .................................................................................................................... 298

Port Address ........................................................................................................................... 298
Convert Unknown to Code 39 ................................................................................................. 299
RS-485 Beep Directive ............................................................................................................ 299
RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive ................................................................................ 300
IBM-485 Specification Version ................................................................................................ 300
Keyboard Wedge Interface

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 301
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface ..................................................................................... 302
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults .......................................................................................... 303
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters .............................................................................................. 304
Keyboard Wedge Host Types ................................................................................................. 304
Keystroke Delay ...................................................................................................................... 305
Intra-keystroke Delay .............................................................................................................. 305
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation ..................................................................................... 306
Quick Keypad Emulation ......................................................................................................... 306
Simulated Caps Lock .............................................................................................................. 307
Caps Lock Override ................................................................................................................ 308
Convert Case .......................................................................................................................... 308
Function Key Mapping ............................................................................................................ 309
FN1 Substitution ...................................................................................................................... 309
Send Make and Break ............................................................................................................. 310
Keyboard Map ............................................................................................................................... 310
OCR Programming
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 312
OCR Parameter Defaults .............................................................................................................. 313
OCR Programming Parameters .................................................................................................... 314
OCR-A ..................................................................................................................................... 314
OCR-A Variant ........................................................................................................................ 315
OCR-B ..................................................................................................................................... 316
OCR-B Variant ........................................................................................................................ 317
MICR E13B ............................................................................................................................. 321
US Currency Serial Number .................................................................................................... 322
OCR Orientation ...................................................................................................................... 322
OCR Lines ............................................................................................................................... 324
OCR Minimum Characters ...................................................................................................... 324
OCR Maximum Characters ..................................................................................................... 325
OCR Subset ............................................................................................................................ 325
OCR Quiet Zone ..................................................................................................................... 326
13
Table of Contents
OCR Template ........................................................................................................................ 326

Required Digit (9) .............................................................................................................. 327
Required Alpha (A) ............................................................................................................ 327
Require and Suppress (0) ................................................................................................. 327
Optional Alphanumeric (1) ................................................................................................ 327
Optional Alpha (2) ............................................................................................................. 328
Alpha or Digit (3) ............................................................................................................... 328
Any Including Space & Reject (4) ..................................................................................... 328
Any except Space & Reject (5) ......................................................................................... 329
Optional Digit (7) ............................................................................................................... 329
Digit or Fill (8) .................................................................................................................... 329
Alpha or Fill (F) .................................................................................................................. 330
Optional Space ( ) ............................................................................................................. 330
Optional Small Special (.) .................................................................................................. 330
Other Template Operators ................................................................................................ 330
Repeat Previous (R) .......................................................................................................... 334
Multiple Templates ............................................................................................................ 335
Template Examples .......................................................................................................... 335
OCR Check Digit Modulus ...................................................................................................... 336
OCR Check Digit Multiplier ..................................................................................................... 336
OCR Check Digit Validation .................................................................................................... 337
None .................................................................................................................................. 337
Product Add Left to Right .................................................................................................. 338
Digit Add Left to Right ....................................................................................................... 339
Digit Add Right to Left ....................................................................................................... 340
Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder ................................................................... 340
Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder ....................................................................... 341
Health Industry - HIBCC43 ................................................................................................ 342
Inverse OCR ........................................................................................................................... 343
OCR Redundancy ................................................................................................................... 344
Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 345
The IDC Process ........................................................................................................................... 345
Barcode Acceptance Test ....................................................................................................... 346
Capture Region Determination ................................................................................................ 346
IDC Operating Mode = Anchored ...................................................................................... 346
IDC Operating Mode = Free-Form or Linked .................................................................... 347
Image Post Processing ........................................................................................................... 347
Data Transmission .................................................................................................................. 347
PC Application and Programming Support ................................................................................... 347
Image Document Capture Parameter Defaults ....................................................................... 349
IDC Operating Mode ............................................................................................................... 350
IDC Symbology ....................................................................................................................... 351
IDC X Coordinate .................................................................................................................... 352
IDC Y Coordinate .................................................................................................................... 352
IDC Width ................................................................................................................................ 353
14
Table of Contents
IDC Height ............................................................................................................................... 353

IDC Aspect .............................................................................................................................. 354
IDC File Format Selector ......................................................................................................... 354
IDC Bits Per Pixel .................................................................................................................... 355
IDC JPEG Quality ................................................................................................................... 355
IDC Find Box Outline .............................................................................................................. 356
IDC Minimum Text Length ...................................................................................................... 356
IDC Maximum Text Length ..................................................................................................... 357
IDC Captured Image Brighten ................................................................................................. 357
IDC Captured Image Sharpen ................................................................................................. 358
IDC Border Type ..................................................................................................................... 359
IDC Delay Time ....................................................................................................................... 360
IDC Zoom Limit ....................................................................................................................... 360
IDC Maximum Rotation ........................................................................................................... 361
Quick Start .................................................................................................................................... 362
Sample IDC Setup .................................................................................................................. 362
IDC Demonstrations ................................................................................................................ 363
Anchored Mode Demo ...................................................................................................... 363
Free-Form Mode Demo ..................................................................................................... 363
Linked Mode Demo ........................................................................................................... 363
Other Suggestions .................................................................................................................. 364
Quick Start Form ..................................................................................................................... 364
Digimarc (DS9308-SRD and DS9308-DLD)

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 365
Digimarc Symbology Selection ..................................................................................................... 365
Picklist ..................................................................................................................................... 365
Digimarc Digital Watermarks ........................................................................................................ 366
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 367
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) ................................................................................................. 367
Multicode Data Formatting (Hand-held Mode Only) ..................................................................... 367
Programming a Scanner ......................................................................................................... 368
Preferred Symbol .......................................................................................................................... 368
Driver’s License Set Up (DS9308-DL)

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 369
Driver’s License Parsing ............................................................................................................... 370
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) ................................ 371
Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type ...................................................... 371
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes ................................................................................... 372
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes ................................................................................................ 374
Parser Version ID Barcode ..................................................................................................... 383
................................................................................................................................................ 383
User Preferences .......................................................................................................................... 384
Set Default Parameter ............................................................................................................. 384
Output Gender as M or F ........................................................................................................ 384
15
Table of Contents
Date Format ............................................................................................................................ 385

No Separator ..................................................................................................................... 386
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters) ........................................... 387
Control Characters ............................................................................................................ 387
Keyboard Characters ........................................................................................................ 391
Parsing Rule Example .................................................................................................................. 405
Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example ................................................................ 409
Parameter Defaults
Numeric Barcodes
Cancel ........................................................................................................................................... 426
Numeric Barcodes ........................................................................................................................ 426
Alphanumeric Barcodes
Cancel ........................................................................................................................................... 428
Alphanumeric Barcodes ................................................................................................................ 428
ASCII Character Sets

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 445
Programming Reference
Symbol Code Identifiers ................................................................................................................ 456
AIM Code Identifiers ..................................................................................................................... 457
Communication Protocol Functionality

Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface ..................................................... 463
Country Codes
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 465
USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes) ....................................... 466
Country Code Pages

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 481
Country Code Page Defaults ........................................................................................................ 481
Country Code Page Barcodes ...................................................................................................... 485
CJK Decode Control

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 495
CJK Control Parameters ............................................................................................................... 495
Unicode Output Control ........................................................................................................... 495
CJK Output Method to Windows Host ..................................................................................... 496
16
Table of Contents
Non-CJK UTF Barcode Output ............................................................................................... 498

Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters .................................................................... 498
Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host .......................................................................... 499
Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output .................................. 499
Adding CJK IME on Windows ................................................................................................. 499
Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host ................................................... 501
Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host .................................................. 502
Signature Capture
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 503
Code Structure .............................................................................................................................. 503
Signature Capture Area .......................................................................................................... 503
CapCode Pattern Structure ..................................................................................................... 504
Start / Stop Patterns ...................................................................................................................... 504
Dimensions ................................................................................................................................... 505
Data Format .................................................................................................................................. 505
Additional Capabilities ................................................................................................................... 506
Signature Boxes ........................................................................................................................... 506
Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)

Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 507
Attributes ....................................................................................................................................... 507
Model Number ......................................................................................................................... 507
Serial Number ......................................................................................................................... 507
Date of Manufacture ................................................................................................................ 508
Date of First Programming ...................................................................................................... 508
Configuration Filename ........................................................................................................... 508
Beeper/LED ............................................................................................................................. 509
Parameter Defaults ................................................................................................................. 510
Parameter Buffer ..................................................................................................................... 510
Beep on Next Bootup .............................................................................................................. 510
Reboot ..................................................................................................................................... 510
Host Trigger Session ............................................................................................................... 511
Firmware Version .................................................................................................................... 511
Device Class ........................................................................................................................... 511
Scankit Version ....................................................................................................................... 511
Combined Firmware Version ................................................................................................... 512
RSM Version ........................................................................................................................... 512
Top Level Release Name ........................................................................................................ 512
Imagekit Version ..................................................................................................................... 512
DL Parser Version ................................................................................................................... 513
DL Parser Activated ................................................................................................................ 513
ScanSpeed Analytics .............................................................................................................. 513
Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 514
Histogram Decode Information ..................................................................................................... 514
ScanSpeed Analytics
Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode ............................................................................................. 518
17
Table of Contents
Sample Barcodes
UPC/EAN ..................................................................................................................................... 520
UPC-A, 100% .......................................................................................................................... 520
UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 520
UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 521
UPC-E ..................................................................................................................................... 521
UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 521
UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on ...................................................................................................... 522
EAN-8 ...................................................................................................................................... 522
EAN-13, 100% ........................................................................................................................ 522
EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on ..................................................................................................... 523
EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on ..................................................................................................... 523
Code 128 ...................................................................................................................................... 523
GS1-128 .................................................................................................................................. 524
Code 39 ........................................................................................................................................ 524
Code 93 ........................................................................................................................................ 524
Code 11 with 2 Check Digits ......................................................................................................... 525
Interleaved 2 of 5 .......................................................................................................................... 525
MSI with 2 Check Digits ................................................................................................................ 525
Chinese 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................................... 526
Matrix 2 of 5 .................................................................................................................................. 526
Korean 3 of 5 ................................................................................................................................ 526
GS1 DataBar ................................................................................................................................. 527
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14) ..................................................... 527
GS1 DataBar Truncated .......................................................................................................... 527
GS1 DataBar Stacked ............................................................................................................. 527
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional ................................................................................... 528
GS1 DataBar Limited .............................................................................................................. 528
GS1 DataBar Expanded .......................................................................................................... 528
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked ............................................................................................ 529
2D Symbologies ............................................................................................................................ 529
PDF417 ................................................................................................................................... 529
Data Matrix .............................................................................................................................. 529
GS1 Data Matrix ...................................................................................................................... 530
Maxicode ................................................................................................................................. 530
QR Code ................................................................................................................................. 530
GS1 QR ................................................................................................................................... 530
MicroQR .................................................................................................................................. 531
Aztec ....................................................................................................................................... 531
Grid Matrix ............................................................................................................................... 531
Han Xin ................................................................................................................................... 532
Postal Codes ................................................................................................................................. 532
US Postnet .............................................................................................................................. 532
UK Postal ................................................................................................................................ 532
Japan Postal ........................................................................................................................... 532
Australian Post ........................................................................................................................ 533
OCR .............................................................................................................................................. 533
OCR-A ..................................................................................................................................... 533
OCR-B ..................................................................................................................................... 533
18
Table of Contents
MICR E13B ............................................................................................................................. 533

US Currency ............................................................................................................................ 534
Index
19
List of Figures
Figure 1. DS9308 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Figure 2. Parts of the Scanner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Figure 3. Inserting the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Figure 4. Removing the Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Figure 5. Mounting with Adhesive Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Figure 6. Securing Multi-Mount Bracket to Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Figure 7. Inserting Scanner into Multi-Mount on Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Figure 8. Securing Multi-Mount Bracket to Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Figure 9. Inserting Scanner into Multi-Mount on Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Figure 10. Installing Locking Table Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Figure 11. Inserting Scanner onto Locking Table Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Figure 12. Securing Scanner to Locking Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Figure 13. Removing Scanner from Locking Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Figure 14. Scanning in Hands-free Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Figure 15. Scanning in Hand-held (Momentary Trigger) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Figure 16. Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Dot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Figure 17. Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Figure 18. Scanner Cable Pinouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Figure 19. USB Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Figure 20. RS-232 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Figure 21. IBM Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Figure 22. Keyboard Wedge Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Figure 23. IBM PS2 Type Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Figure 24. Quick Start Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Figure 25. CapCode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Figure 26. CapCode Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Figure 27. Acceptable Signature Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Figure 28. 123Scan Statistics Tab - Histogram Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
20
List of Tables
Table 1. DS9308 Scanner Only Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Table 2. Scanner Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Table 3. Scanner Beeper and LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Table 4. DS9308 Decode Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Table 5. Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Table 6. Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Table 7. DS9308 Scanner Signal Pin-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Table 8. User Preferences Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Table 9. Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Table 10. Image Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Table 11. Output File Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Table 12. Symbology Parameter Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Table 13. USB Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Table 14. SSI Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
Table 15. Values for Selecting Time Delay to Low Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Table 16. SSI Interface Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Table 17. Event Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Table 18. RS-232 Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Table 19. Terminal Specific RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Table 20. Terminal Specific Code ID Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Table 21. IBM 468X/469X Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Table 22. Keyboard Wedge Interface Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Table 23. OCR Programming Default Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Table 24. Table of Numeric Value Assignments for Computing HIBC LIC Data Format Check Digit . . . . . . . . . .342
Table 25. Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Table 26. IDC Symbologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Table 27. DL Parsing Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Table 28. Parameter Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Table 29. ASCII Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Table 30. ALT Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Table 31. GUI Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Table 32. PF Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Table 33. F Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Table 34. Numeric Key Character Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Table 35. Extended Key Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Table 36. Symbol Code Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Table 37. Aim Code Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Table 38. Modifier Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Table 39. Communication Interface Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Table 40. Country Code Page Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Table 41. Missing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Table 42. Missing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
21
List of Tables
Table 43. Start / Stop Pattern Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504

Table 44. User Defined CapCode Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Table 45. Data Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Table 46. Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Table 47. RSM Attributes to Store/Retrieve Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
22
About This Guide
Introduction
The DS9308 scanner Product Reference Guide provides general instructions for setting up, operating,
maintaining, and troubleshooting the DS9308 scanner.
Configurations
This guide includes the DS9308 scanner configurations listed in Table 1.
Table 1 DS9308 Scanner Only Configurations

Configuration Description
DS9308-SR00004ZZWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black
DS9308-SR00004ZCWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black, Checkpoint
EAS
DS9308-SRD0004ZZWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black, Digimarc
DS9308-DL00004ZZNA Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, DL Parsing, Corded, Midnight Black
DS9308-DL00004ZCNA Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, DL Parsing, Corded, Midnight Black,
Checkpoint EAS
DS9308-DLD0004ZZNA Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, DL Parsing, Corded, Midnight Black,
Digimarc
DS9308-TT00004ZZJP Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Toshiba TEC, Corded, Midnight
Black
DS9308-TT00004ZCJP Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Toshiba TEC, Corded, Midnight
Black, Checkpoint EAS
DS9308-SR00004ZZY Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black - India Only
DS9308-SR0000WZZWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Alpine White
DS9308-SR00004ZTWW Presentation Area Imager, Standard Range, Corded, Midnight Black, TAA
23
About This Guide
Accessories
NOTE: Check Solution Builder for additional information regarding all available accessories, and the latest available
configurations.
The scanner ships with the DS9308 Quick Start Guide. The following required accessories must be ordered:
• Interface cable for the appropriate interface. For example, a shielded connector cable when connecting via
USB.
• Universal power supply, if the interface requires this.
The product configurations related to the DS9308 scanner are listed in Table 2.
Table 2 Scanner Accessories

Product Type Part Number Description
Cables For information about cables, cable compatibility, and the full list of supported cables go to the
Zebra Partner Portal at:
https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scann
ers/Universal-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx.
Stands and BRKT-MM0093C-04 DS9308 Multi-mount bracket, Black. Can be used as wall mount
Holders or table mount. See Mounting the Scanner on page 33 for
(optional) installation instructions.
BRKT-LM0093C-04 DS9308 Locking-mount bracket, Black. Can be used to lock the

scanner into position on a horizontal or vertical surface. See
Mounting the Scanner on page 33 for installation instructions.
BRKT-MM0093C-0W DS9308 Multi-mount bracket, White. Can be used as wall mount

or table mount. See Mounting the Scanner on page 33 for
installation instructions.
BRKT-LM0093C-0W DS9308 Locking-mount bracket, White. Can be used to lock the

scanner into position on a horizontal or vertical surface. See
Mounting the Scanner on page 33 for installation instructions.
Power Supplies PWR-WUA5V4W0US Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, US/CA/MX/JP/TW

(if required)
PWR-WUA5V4W0BR Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, KR (Korea)
PWR-WUA5V4W0EU Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, EU/UK
PWR-WUA5V4W0CN Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, CN
PWR-WUA5V4W0AU Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, HK/AU
24
About This Guide
Chapter Descriptions
Topics covered in this guide are as follows:
• Getting Started provides a product overview, unpacking instructions, and cable connection information.
• 123Scan and Software Tools describes the Zebra software tools available for customizing scanner
operation.
• Data Capture describes parts of the scanner, beeper and LED definitions, and how to use the scanner in
hand-held and hands-free (presentation) modes.
• Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications provides information on how to care for the
scanner, troubleshooting, and technical specifications.
• User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options describes features frequently used to customize how data
transmits to the host device and programming barcodes for selecting user preference features for the
scanner.
• Imager Preferences provides imaging preference features and programming barcodes for selecting these
features.
• Symbologies describes all symbology features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these
features for the scanner.
• USB Interface describes how to set up the scanner with a USB host.
• SSI Interface describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which provides a
communications link between Zebra decoders and a serial host.
• RS-232 Interface describes how to set up the scanner with an RS-232 host, such as point-of-sale devices,
host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port.
• IBM Interface describes how to set up the scanner with IBM 468X/469X POS systems.
• Keyboard Wedge Interface describes how to set up a Keyboard Wedge interface with the scanner.
• OCR Programming describes how to set up the scanner for OCR programming.
• Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only) describes IDC, an advanced image processing
firmware, including IDC functionality, parameter barcodes to control its features, and a quick start
procedure.
• Digimarc (DS9308-SRD and DS9308-DLD) provides barcodes to either enable or disable Digimarc
Barcode, a machine-readable code that is invisible to people.
• Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol briefly describes the Zebra features available for
customizing scanner operation.
• Driver’s License Set Up (DS9308-DL) describes how the DS9308-DL scanner can parse out information
from standard US driver's licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators
(AAMVA) compliant ID cards.
• Parameter Defaults provides a table of all host devices and miscellaneous scanner defaults.
• Numeric Barcodes includes the numeric barcodes to scan for parameters requiring specific numeric
values.
• Alphanumeric Barcodes includes the barcodes representing the alphanumeric keyboard, used when
setting ADF rules.
• ASCII Character Sets provides ASCII character value tables.
25
About This Guide
• Programming Reference provides a table of AIM code identifiers, ASCII character conversions, and
keyboard maps.
• Communication Protocol Functionality lists supported scanner functionality by communication protocol.
• Country Codes provides barcodes for programming the country keyboard type for the USB keyboard (HID)
device and the keyboard wedge host.
• Country Code Pages provides barcodes for selecting code pages for the country keyboard type.
• CJK Decode Control describes control parameters for Unicode/CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) barcode
decode through USB HID Keyboard Emulation mode.
• Signature Capture provides information on CapCode, a signature capture code that encloses a signature
area on a document and allows a scanner to capture a signature.
• Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary) defines non-parameter attributes.
• ScanSpeed Analytics describes the Zebra ScanSpeed Analytics software that allows the identification of
barcodes that slow down processes.
• Sample Barcodes includes sample barcodes of various code types.
Notational Conventions
The following conventions are used in this document:
• Bold text is used to highlight the following:

• Dialog box, window and screen names
• Drop-down list and list box names
• Check box and radio button names
• Icons on a screen
• Key names on a keypad
• Button names on a screen.
• Bullets (•) indicate:
• Action items
• Lists of alternatives
• Lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential.
• Sequential lists (e.g., those that describe step-by-step procedures) appear as numbered lists.
26
About This Guide
Related Documents and Software

• DS9308 Quick Start Guide, p/n MN-003533-xx, provides general information for getting started with the
DS9308 scanner, and includes basic set up and operation instructions.
• Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide, p/n 72E-69680-xx - provides information on ADF, a means
of customizing data before transmission to a host.
• Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol (MDF) User Guide, p/n MN-002895-xx, provides
programming instructions for using MDF and Preferred Symbol on the DS9308 scanner.
• Plural Stage Programmer’s Guide, p/n 72E-67113-xx, provides the barcodes necessary to program the
DS9308 scanner to decode Plural Stage barcodes and enable Supplemental Recognition Characters.
• Toshiba TEC Programmer’s Guide, p/n MN-002707-xx, provides the barcodes necessary to program the
DS9308 scanner for the Toshiba TEC host.
For the latest version of this guide and all guides, go to: zebra.com/support.
Service Information
If you have a problem with your equipment, contact Zebra Global Customer Support for your region. Contact
information is available at: zebra.com/support.
When contacting support, please have the following information available:
• Serial number of the unit

• Model number or product name
• Software type and version number.
Zebra responds to calls by email, telephone or fax within the time limits set forth in support agreements.
If your problem cannot be solved by Zebra Customer Support, you may need to return your equipment for servicing
and will be given specific directions. Zebra is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the
approved shipping container is not used. Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty.
If you purchased your Zebra business product from a Zebra business partner, contact that business partner for
support.
Provide Documentation Feedback

If you have comments, questions, or suggestions about this guide, send an email to EVM-Techdocs@zebra.com.
27
Getting Started
Introduction
The DS9308 combines superior 1D and 2D omnidirectional barcode scanning with advanced imaging applications
in a compact, easy to use form factor. The DS9308 is designed primarily for hands-free presentation scanning but
can easily be picked up and triggered like a hand-held.
Figure 1 DS9308 Scanner
28
Getting Started
Interfaces
NOTE: Only the Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging interface supports image capture. See USB Device Type
on page 237 to enable this host.
The DS9308 scanner supports:
• USB connection to a host. The scanner autodetects a USB host and defaults to the HID keyboard interface
type. Select other USB interface types by scanning programming barcode menus.This interface supports
the international keyboards (for Windows® environment) included in the chapter Country Codes.
• Standard RS-232 connection to a host. Scan barcode menus to set up communication of the scanner with
the host.
• Connection to IBM 468X/469X hosts. Scan barcode menus to set up communication of the scanner with
the IBM terminal.
• Keyboard Wedge connection to a host. The host interprets scanned data as keystrokes. Scan barcode
menus to set up communication of the scanner with the host. This interface supports the international
keyboards (for Windows® environment) included in the chapter Country Codes.
Unpacking
Remove the scanner from its packing and inspect it for damage. If the scanner was damaged in transit, contact
support. See page 27 for contact information. KEEP THE PACKING. It is the approved shipping container; use this
to return the equipment for servicing.
29
Getting Started
Features
Figure 2 Parts of the Scanner
LED Indicator
Scan Window
Scan Trigger
Beeper
Interface
Cable Port
30
Getting Started
Setting Up the Scanner

Inserting the Interface Cable
NOTE: Different hosts require different cables. The connectors illustrated in each host chapter are examples only.
Connectors vary from those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1. Place the scanner on a flat surface and tilt the scanner all the way forward.
2. Plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the rear of the scanner until you
hear a click (see Figure 3). Gently tug the cable to ensure the connector is secure. The green LED lights and
low/medium/high beeps sound, indicating that the scanner is operational.
IMPORTANT: For information about cables and cable compatibility, go to the Zebra Partner Portal at:
https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scan
ners/Universal-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx.
Figure 3 Inserting the Cable
1 2 3
Interface
Cable Port
Interface Cable
Modular Connetor
Clip To Host
3. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (see the specific host chapter for information on host
connections).
31
Getting Started
Removing the Interface Cable

Figure 4 Removing the Cable
1 2
Cable Release
Opening
1. Place the scanner on a flat surface and tilt the scanner all the way forward.
2. Insert a small screw driver into the under side of the cable release opening to lift up the cable clip.
3. Pull the cable/connector UP and OUT of the connection and carefully slide out the cable.
4. Follow the steps for Inserting the Interface Cable to connect a new cable.
32
Getting Started
Connecting Power (if required)

If the host does not provide power to the scanner, connect an external power supply:
1. Connect the interface cable to the base of the scanner, as described in Inserting the Interface Cable on page
31.
2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host (refer to the host manual to locate the correct port).
3. Plug the power supply into the power jack on the interface cable. Plug the other end of the power supply into
an AC outlet.
Configuring the Scanner

To configure the scanner use the barcodes included in this manual. See User Preferences & Miscellaneous
Options and Imager Preferences for information about programming the scanner using barcode menus. Also see
each host-specific chapter to set up connection to a specific host type.
Mounting the Scanner

The DS9308 offers the following mounting options:
• Multi-Mount Bracket - Mounts the scanner to a wall (or other vertical surface) or to a table. The device can
easily be removed from the multi-mount for hand-held use.
• Locking Table Mount - Mounts to a flat surface and the scanner is locked into place.
Multi-Mount Bracket
The optional multi-mount bracket mounts the scanner to a table top or wall (or other vertical surface). When
mounting to a table top, use either screws or the adhesive pad. When mounting to a wall (or other vertical surface)
screws are required.
NOTE: When mounting to a table top, screws are more secure than the adhesive pad.
Installing Multi-Mount With Adhesive Pad
Figure 5 Mounting with Adhesive Pad
Peel Off
Table Top
33
Getting Started
To mount the optional multi-mount bracket using the adhesive pad:
1. Clean the table top surface with Isopropyl alcohol to remove any dirt or debris.
2. Peel the corner of the paper liner off the tape on the bottom of the multi-mount bracket (Figure 5).
3. Press the bottom of the multi-mount bracket on the flat table top and apply uniform pressure for minimally 10
seconds to secure it to the surface (Figure 5).
4. Slide the base of the scanner into the bracket.
Installing Multi-Mount With Screws on Table

To mount the scanner to a table using the optional multi-mount bracket with screws:
1. Place the bracket in the desired location on the table top.

2. Insert two #8 screws through each screw hole in the bracket.
Figure 6 Securing Multi-Mount Bracket to Table
3. Screw into place until secure.
Figure 7 Inserting Scanner into Multi-Mount on Table
4. Slide the base of the scanner into the bracket.
34
Getting Started
Installing Multi-Mount with Screws on Wall

To mount the scanner on a wall using the optional multi-mount bracket with screws:
1. Place the bracket in its desired location on the wall and insert two #8 screws through each screw hole in the
bracket.
Figure 8 Securing Multi-Mount Bracket to Wall
2. Tighten the screws to secure the bracket to the wall.

3. Slide the base of the scanner into the bracket, oriented so the scan window faces down (Figure 9).
Figure 9 Inserting Scanner into Multi-Mount on Wall
35
Getting Started
Locking Table Mount

The optional locking table mount is secured to a flat surface and the scanner is locked into place.
Installing Locking Table Mount

To mount the scanner using the optional locking table mount:
1. Place the bracket in the desired location on the table top and insert two #8 screws through each screw hole in
the bracket.
NOTE: When selecting the desired location to install the locking table mount bracket, be sure to consider that when
the scanner is placed on the mount bracket, it is turned a 1/4 revolution clockwise which will be the final
location the scanner faces.
Figure 10 Installing Locking Table Mount Bracket
2. Place the scanner onto the bracket.
36
Getting Started
Figure 11 Inserting Scanner onto Locking Table Mount Bracket
37
Getting Started
3. Turn the scanner 1/4 revolution clockwise until you hear a click and the scanner faces its final position.
Figure 12 Securing Scanner to Locking Mount Bracket
Removing DS9308 from Locking Table Mount

To remove the scanner from the locking table mount, turn counter-clockwise until the scanner is released.
Figure 13 Removing Scanner from Locking Mount Bracket
38
123Scan and Software
Tools
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the Zebra software tools available for customizing scanner operation.
123Scan
123Scan is a software tool that simplifies scanner setup and more.
Intuitive enough for first time users, the 123Scan wizard guides users through a streamlined setup process.
Settings are saved in a configuration file that can be printed as a single programming barcode for scanning,
emailed to a smart phone for scanning from its screen, or downloaded to the scanner using a USB cable.
Through 123Scan a user can:
• Configure a scanner using a wizard.

• Program the following scanner settings.
• Beeper tone / volume settings.
• Enable / disable symbologies.
• Communication settings.
• Modify data before transmission to a host using:
• Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) - Scan one barcode per trigger pull.
• Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) - Scan many barcodes in one trigger pull (select scanners).
• Preferred Symbol - Single out one barcode on label of many (select scanners).
• Load parameter settings to a scanner via the following.
• Barcode scanning.
• Scan a paper barcode.
• Scan a barcode from a PC screen.
• Scan a barcode from a smart phone screen.
• Download over a USB cable.
• Load settings to one scanner.
• Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously (Powered USB Hub recommended with 0.5 amp / port).
39
• Validate scanner setup.

• View scanned data within the utility's Data view screen.
• Capture an image and save to a PC within the utility's Data view screen.
• Review settings using the Parameter Report.
• Clone settings from an already deployed scanner from the Start screen.
• Upgrade scanner firmware.
• Load settings to one scanner.
• Stage up to 10 scanners simultaneously (Powered USB Hub recommended with 0.5 amp / port).
• View statistics such as:
• Asset tracking information.
• Time and usage information.
• Barcodes scanned by symbology.
• Battery diagnostics (select scanners).
• Generate the following reports.
• Barcode Report - Programming barcode, included parameter settings, and supported scanner models.
• Parameter Report - Parameters programmed within a configuration file.
• Inventory Report - Scanner asset tracking information.
• Validation Report - Scanned data from the Data view.
• Statistics Report - All statistics retrieved from the scanner.
For more information go to: www.zebra.com/123Scan.
Communication with 123Scan

Use a USB cable to connect the scanner to a Windows host computer running 123Scan.
123Scan Requirements
• Host computer running Windows XP, 7, 8, and 10
• Scanner
• USB cable.
123Scan Information
For more information on123Scan, go to: www.zebra.com/123Scan.
For a 1 minute tour of 123Scan, go to: www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos.
To see a list of all of our software tools, go to: www.zebra.com/scannersoftware.
40
Scanner SDK, Other Software Tools, and Videos

Tackle all your scanner programming needs with our diversified set of software tools. Whether you need to simply
stage a device, or develop a fully featured application with image and data capture as well as asset management,
these tools help you every step of the way.
To download any of the following free tools, go to: www.zebra.com/scannersoftware.
• 123Scan configuration utility

• SDKs
• Scanner SDK for Windows
• Scanner SDK for Linux
• Scanner SDK for Android
• Drivers
• OPOS driver
• JPOS driver
• USB CDC driver
• TWAIN driver
• Scanner Management Service (SMS) for Remote Management
• Windows
• Linux
• How-To-Videos
NOTE: For a list of SDK supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Communication
Protocol Functionality.
41
Data Capture
Introduction
This chapter provides beeper and LED definitions, general instructions and tips about scanning, and decode zone
diagrams.
Beeper and LED Indicators

In addition to beep sequences, the scanner uses a two-color LED to indicate status.
• The DS9308 scanner includes one LED indicator for system/decode indications.
Table 3 defines beep sequences that occur during both normal scanning and while programming the scanner; LED
colors that display during scanning.
Table 3 Scanner Beeper and LED Indications

Beeper Sequence LED Indication
Standard Use
Low/medium/high beeps Green Power up.
Medium beep Hands-free - solid A barcode was successfully decoded.
(or as configured) green LED; turns off
after decode. (See User Preferences Parameter Defaults on page 60
Hand-held - LED is off; for programming beeper sounds.)
green upon decode.
None Green (solid) Presentation (Hands-free) Mode on.
None No LED (green LED is Presentation (Hands-free) Mode off.
turned off)
Four long low beeps Red A transmission error occurred. The data is ignored. This
occurs if a unit is not properly configured. Check option
setting.
Five long low beeps Red Conversion or format error.
None Red (blinking) on Scanner is disabled by a host command to the scanner.
trigger pull
Image Capture
Low beep Green (blinking) Snapshot mode started.
42
Data Capture
Table 3 Scanner Beeper and LED Indications (Continued)

Low beep Default Green LED Snapshot mode completed.
based upon hand-held
or hands-free mode
High/low beeps Default Green LED Snapshot mode timed-out.
based upon hand-held
or hands-free mode
Parameter Programming
Long low/long high beeps Red Input error; incorrect barcode or Cancel scanned, wrong
entry, incorrect barcode programming sequence; remain
in program mode.
High/low beeps Green Number expected. Enter value using numeric barcodes.
High/low/high/low beeps Green Successful program exit with change in the parameter
setting.
ADF Programming
Low/high/low beeps None ADF transmit error.
High/low beeps Green Number expected. Enter another digit. Add leading zeros
to the front if necessary.
Low/low beeps Green Alphanumeric expected. Enter another alphanumeric
character or scan the End of Message barcode.
High/high beeps Green blinking ADF criteria or action is expected. Enter another criteria
or action or scan the Save Rule barcode.
High/low/low beeps Green All criteria or actions cleared for current rule, continue
entering rule.
High/low/high/low beeps Green Rule saved. Rule entry mode exited.
(turns off after blinking)
Long low/long high beeps Red Rule error. Entry error, wrong barcode scanned, or
criteria/action list is too long for a rule. Re-enter criteria or
action.
Low beep Green Deleted last saved rule. The current rule is left intact.
Low/high/high beeps Green All rules deleted.
Long low/long high/long Red Out of rule memory. Erase some existing rules, then try
low/long high beeps to save rule again.
Long low/long high/long Green Cancel rule entry. Rule entry mode exited because of an
low beeps (turns off after blinking) error or the user asked to exit rule entry.
Host Specific
USB only
Four high beeps None Scanner has not completed initialization. Wait several
seconds and scan again.
RS-232 only
Low/low/low/extra low Red RS-232 receive error (parity error).
beeps
High beep None A <BEL> character is received when Beep on <BEL> is
enabled (Point-to-Point mode only).
43
Data Capture
Table 3 Scanner Beeper and LED Indications (Continued)

123Scan only (When in use, the utility controls the scanner LED)
None Green (slow blinking) Scanner connected to 123Scan.
None Red (fast blinking) File being transferred to the scanner (parameters and
firmware).
None Red (slow blinking) Firmware being activated on the scanner, loaded into
memory.
None Green (solid) Programming completed successfully (parameters and
firmware).
None Red (solid) Error state.
SMS only
None Red (blinking) Loading the SMS package to scanner.
Maintenance Indications
High/high beeps Red (stays on) Enter Bootloader.
None Red (blinking) Firmware installation.
Macro PDF
Low/low beeps None Buffered File ID error. A barcode not in the current MPDF
sequence was scanned.
Long low/long low beeps None File ID error. A barcode not in the current MPDF
(2 long low beeps) sequence was scanned.
Long low/long low/long None Out of memory. There is not enough buffer space to store
low beeps (3 long low the current MPDF symbol.
beeps)
Long low/long low/long None Bad symbology. Scanned a 1D or 2D barcode in an
low/long low beeps (4 long MPDF sequence, a duplicate MPDF label, a label in an
low beeps) incorrect order, or trying to transmit an empty or illegal
MPDF field.
Long low/long low/long None Flushing MPDF buffer.
low/long low/long low
beeps (5 long low beeps)
Fast Warble None Aborting MPDF sequence.
Low/high beeps None Flushing an already empty MPDF buffer.
44
Data Capture
Scanning
The DS9308 has a built-in, adjustable base to easily accommodate both hands-free (presentation) and hand-held
scanning.
Hands-free Scanning
The scanner is in hands-free (presentation) mode when it sits on a counter top, or when it is mounted on a wall
using the multi-mount bracket. In this mode, the scanner operates in continuous (constant-on) mode, where it
automatically decodes a barcode presented in its field of view.
In hands-free mode the LED indicator turns solid green. An aiming dot does not appear.
Figure 14 Scanning in Hands-free Mode
Hand-held Scanning
To operate the digital scanner in hand-held mode (momentary trigger mode):
1. Pick up the digital scanner and press the trigger. The aiming dot displays.
Figure 15 Scanning in Hand-held (Momentary Trigger) Mode
2. Ensure the aiming dot is centered on the barcode (see Figure 17).
45
Data Capture
3. Press and hold the trigger until either:

a. The digital scanner reads the barcode. The digital scanner beeps and the successful decode LED flashes.
b. The digital scanner does not read the barcode and the illumination turns off.
4. Release the trigger. The aiming dot reappears. To read another barcode, repeat steps 2 and 3.
After a programmable time period (see Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout on page 76), the aiming dot turns off and
the digital scanner returns to presentation mode, ready to read barcodes without the use of the trigger. For beeper
definitions, see Table 3 on page 42.
Aiming
The scanner may project an LED dot which allows positioning the barcode within its field of view. See Decode
Ranges on page 47 for the proper distance to achieve between the scanner and a barcode.
Figure 16 Scanning Orientation with Imager Aiming Dot
The scanner can also read a barcode presented within the aiming dot not centered. The top examples in Figure 17
show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom examples can not be decoded.
Figure 17 Acceptable and Incorrect Aiming
012345 012345
012345 012345
The aiming dot is smaller when the scanner is closer to the symbol and larger when it is farther from the symbol.
Scan symbols with smaller bars or elements (mil size) closer to the scanner, and those with larger bars or elements
(mil size) farther from the scanner.
The scanner beeps to indicate that it successfully decoded the barcode. For more information on beeper and LED
definitions, see Table 3 on page 42.
46
Data Capture
Decode Ranges
Table 4 DS9308 Decode Ranges
Working Ranges
Symbol Density Barcode Type Near Far

3.0 mil Code 39 0 in. / 0 cm 2.5 in. / 6.35 cm
20 mil Code 39 0 in. / 0 cm 11.0 in. / 27.9 cm
13 mil (100%) UPC 0 in. / 0 cm 8.8 in. / 22.4 cm
10 mil Data Matrix 0 in. / 0 cm 4.5 in. / 11.4 cm
20 mil QR 0 in. / 0 cm 7.5 in. / 19.1 cm
Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS)
NOTE: EAS is available only on scanner models that support Checkpoint EAS.
Some scanner configurations include an integrated Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) antenna.
The scanner's integrated EAS deactivation antenna requires an EAS host cable. This Y-cable connects to the
scanner's host port at one end, and splits to the host and the EAS system at the other end.
Installing
Checkpoint EAS Model Compatibility
The scanner is intended for use with Checkpoint CP-VII, CP-IX, and CP-XI systems. It does not support CP-IV and
other low-power receiver-based EAS deactivation systems.
Considerations
The Checkpoint CP-VII system generates a periodic burst of electromagnetic energy that deactivates EAS tags
brought near the scanner. To avoid interference with the scanner’s operation, take the following precautions when
installing the EAS system:
• Position the EAS antenna box as far as possible from the scanner (at least 6 in. / 15.24 cm.)
• Position the EAS antenna, EAS antenna box, EAS control cable, and EAS controller box as far as possible
from the scanner’s host and power cables.
47
Data Capture
Checkpoint Contact Information

Contact your local Checkpoint representative to install the EAS cable to the Checkpoint Deactivation System.
48
Maintenance,
Troubleshooting, and
Technical Specifications
Introduction
This chapter provides suggested scanner maintenance, troubleshooting, technical specifications, and signal
descriptions (pinouts).
Maintenance
Known Harmful Ingredients
The following chemicals are known to damage the plastics on Zebra scanners and should not come in contact with
the device:
• Acetone
• Ammonia solutions
• Aqueous or alcoholic alkaline solutions
• Aromatic and chlorinated hydrocarbons
• Benzene
• Carbolic acid
• Compounds of amines or ammonia
• Ethanolamine
• Ethers
• Ketones
• TB-lysoform
• Toluene
• Trichloroethylene.
Approved Cleaners for the Scanner

• Isopropyl alcohol 70% (including pre-moistened wipes).
49
Cleaning the Scanner

Routinely cleaning the exit window is required. A dirty window may affect scanning accuracy. Do not allow any
abrasive material to touch the window.
To clean the scanner:
1. Dampen a soft cloth with one of the approved cleaning agents listed above or use pre-moistened wipes.
2. Gently wipe all surfaces, including the front, back, sides, top and bottom. Never apply liquid directly to the
scanner. Be careful not to let liquid pool around the scanner window, trigger, cable connector or any other area
on the device.
3. Be sure to clean the trigger and in between the trigger and the housing (use a cotton-tipped applicator to reach
tight or inaccessible areas).
4. Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the exit window.
5. Wipe the scanner exit window with a lens tissue or other material suitable for cleaning optical material such as
eyeglasses.
6. Immediately dry the scanner window after cleaning with a soft non-abrasive cloth to prevent streaking.
7. Allow the unit to air dry before use.
8. Scanner connectors:
a. Dip the cotton portion of a cotton-tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol.
b. Rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth across the connector on the Zebra
scanner at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connector.
c. Use the cotton-tipped applicator dipped in alcohol to remove any grease and dirt near the connector area.
d. Use a dry cotton tipped applicator and rub the cotton portion of the cotton-tipped applicator back-and-forth
across the connectors at least 3 times. Do not leave any cotton residue on the connectors.
50
Troubleshooting
NOTE: If after performing the possible solutions in Table 5 the scanner still experiences problems, contact the
distributor or call support.
Table 5 Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Causes Possible Solutions
The illumination does not No power to the scanner. If the configuration requires a power supply,
appear when pressing the re-connect the power supply.
trigger.
Incorrect host interface cable is Connect the correct host interface cable.
used.
Interface/power cables are loose. Re-connect cables.
Scanner is disabled. For IBM 468x and USB IBM hand-held, IBM
table-top, and OPOS modes, enable the
scanner via the host interface. Otherwise,
see the technical person in charge of
scanning.
If using RS-232 Nixdorf B mode, Assert CTS line.

CTS is not asserted.
Illumination is disabled. Enable the illumination. See Decoding

Illumination on page 83.
Scanner emits illumination, Scanner is not programmed for Program the scanner to read that type of
but does not decode the the correct barcode type. barcode. See Symbologies.
barcode.
Barcode symbol is unreadable. Scan test symbols of the same barcode type
to determine if the barcode is defaced.
The symbol is not completely Move the symbol completely within the
inside illumination. illumination.
Move the symbol completely within the field
of view (AIM pattern does NOT define FOV)
Distance between scanner and Move the scanner closer to or further from
barcode is incorrect. the barcode. See Decode Ranges on page
47.
51
Table 5 Troubleshooting (Continued)

Scanner decodes barcode, Scanner is not programmed for Scan the appropriate host type programming
but does not transmit the the correct host type. barcode. See the chapter corresponding to
data to the host. the host type.
Interface cable is loose. Re-connect the cable.
If the scanner emits four long low Set the scanner's communication parameters
beeps, a transmission error to match the host's setting.
occurred.
This occurs if a unit is not properly
configured or connected to the
wrong host type.
If the scanner emits 5 low beeps, Configure the scanner's conversion

a conversion or format error parameters properly.
occurred.
If the scanner emits low/high/low Program the correct ADF rules. Refer to the
beeps, it detected an invalid ADF Advanced Data Formatting Programmer
rule. Guide.
Host displays scanned Scanner is not programmed to Scan the appropriate host type programming
data incorrectly. work with the host. barcode.
For RS-232, set the scanner's

communication parameters to match the
host's settings.
For a Keyboard Wedge configuration,

program the system for the correct keyboard
type, and turn off the CAPS LOCK key.
Program the proper editing options (e.g.,

UPC-E to UPC-A Conversion).
Scanner emits short The USB bus may put the Normal during host reset.
low/short medium/short scanner in a state where power to
high beep sequence the scanner is cycled on and off
(power-up beep sequence) more than once.
more than once.
Scanner emits 4 short high Scanner has not completed USB Wait several seconds and scan again.
beeps during decode initialization.
attempt.
Scanner emits RS-232 receive error. Normal during host reset. Otherwise, set the
Low/low/low/extra low scanner's RS-232 parity to match the host
beeps when not in use. setting.
Scanner emits low/high Input error, incorrect barcode or Scan the correct numeric barcodes within
beeps during Cancel barcode was scanned. range for the parameter programmed.
programming.
52
Table 5 Troubleshooting (Continued)

Scanner emits Out of host parameter storage Scan Default Parameters on page 62.
low/high/low/high beeps space.
during programming.
Out of memory for ADF rules. Reduce the number of ADF rules or the
number of steps in the ADF rules.
During programming, indicates Erase all rules and re-program with shorter
out of ADF parameter storage rules.
space.
Scanner emits low/high/low ADF transmit error. Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting
beeps. Guide for information.
Invalid ADF rule is detected. Refer to the Advanced Data Formatting

Guide for information.
Scanner emits a power-up The USB bus re-established Normal when changing USB host type.
beep after changing USB power to the scanner.
host type.
Scanner emits one high In RS-232 mode, a <BEL> Normal when Beep on <BEL> is enabled
beep when not in use. character was received and Beep and the scanner is in RS-232 mode.
on <BEL> option is enabled.
Scanner emits frequent Inadequate power supplied to the Check the system power. If the configuration
beeps. scanner. requires a power supply, re-connect the
power supply.
Incorrect host interface cable is Verify that the correct host interface cable is
used. used. If not, connect the correct host
interface cable.
Interface/power cables are loose. Check for loose cable connections and
re-connect cables.
Scanner emits five long low Conversion or format error was Ensure the scanner conversion parameters
beeps after a barcode is detected. are properly configured.
decoded. The scanner conversion
parameters are not properly
configured.
Conversion or format error was Change the ADF rule, or change to a host
detected. that can support the ADF rule.
An ADF rule was set up with
characters that can't be sent for
the host selected.
Conversion or format error was Change the barcode, or change to a host that
detected. can support the barcode.
A barcode was scanned with
characters that can't be sent for
that host.
53
Report Product Information

Report Software Version
Scan the following barcode to send the version of software installed in the scanner.
Report Software Version
Report Serial Number

Scan the following barcode to send the scanner serial number to the host.
Serial Number
Report Manufacturing Information

Scan the following barcode to send the scanner manufacturing information to the host.
Manufacturing Information
54
Technical Specifications
Table 6 Technical Specifications

Item Description
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions 5.7 in H x 3.4 in W x 3.3 in D

14.5 cm H x 8.6 cm W x 8.3 cm D
Weight 11.2 oz (318 g)
Available Colors Midnight Black, Alpine White
Supported Host Interfaces USB, RS232, Keyboard Wedge, TGCS (IBM) 46XX over RS485
Keyboard Support Supports over 90 international keyboards
Electronic Article Surveillance Compatible with Checkpoint deactivation system
Electrical Characteristics
SR and DL Models
Minimum Maximum Unit
Supply Voltage 4.5 5.0 5.5 V
Idle current (Hand-held) 75 mA
Idle current (Hands-free) 135 mA
Scanning current (Hand-held) 350 mA
Scanning current (Hands-free) 335 mA
Performance Characteristics
Swipe Speed Up to 120 in./305 cm per second for 13 mil UPC in optimized
mode
Aiming Dot Amber 617nm LED
Illumination Red 660nm LED
Field of View 52° H x 33° V
(Horizontal x Vertical) Nominal
Image Sensor 1280 x 800 pixels
Minimum Print Contrast 15% minimum reflective difference
55
Table 6 Technical Specifications (Continued)

Item Description
Skew Tolerance +/- 60°
Pitch Tolerance +/- 60°
Roll Tolerance 360°
Image Capture
Graphics Format Support Images can be exported as Bitmap, JPEG, or TIFF
Resolution (4 x 5.8 in. document @ 6 in.) 109 PPI
User Environment
Operating Temperature 32º F to 122º F (0º C to 50º C)
Storage Temperature -40° to 158°F / -40° to 70°C
Humidity 5% to 95% RH, non-condensing
Drop Specifications Designed to withstand multiple drops at 5.0 ft/1.5 m to concrete
Tumble Specification (Scanner) Designed to withstand 1,000 tumbles in 1.5 ft./0.5 m tumbler
Ambient Light Immunity 0 to 10,000 Foot Candles/0 to 107,700 Lux
Environmental Sealing IP52
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) ESD per EN61000-4-2, +/-15 KV Air, +/-8 KV Indirect
Accessories (see page 24)
Symbol Decode Capability
1D Code 39, Code 128, Code 93, Codabar/NW7, Code 11, MSI
Plessey, UPC/EAN, I 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, GS1 DataBar, Base
32 (Italian Pharma)
2D PDF417, Micro PDF417, Composite Codes, TLC-39, Aztec,

Data Matrix, MaxiCode, QR Code, Micro QR, Han Xin, Postal
Codes, SecurPharm, Dotcode, Dotted Datamatrix
Digimarc Digital watermark technology; available on specific models only
OCR OCR-A, OCR-B, MICR, US Currency
Minimum Element Resolution Code 39 3 mil

Code 128 3 mil
QR Code 5 mil
Data Matrix 5 mil
See Decode Ranges on page 47 for working ranges.
Regulatory
Environmental: Restriction of Hazardous EN 50581

Substances (RoHS) EN IEC 63000
56
Table 6 Technical Specifications (Continued)

Item Description
EMC EN 55032, EN55024, EN55035

EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3
47 CFR Part 15, Subpart B, Class B, ICES-003, Class B
Health and Safety IEC 62368-1, UL 62368-1, CAN/CSA-22.2 N0. 62368-1-14

IEC 62471
Utilities and Management
123Scan Programs scanner parameters, upgrades firmware, provides

scanned barcode data and prints reports. See 123Scan and
Software Tools.
www.zebra.com/123Scan
Symbol Scanner SDK Generates a fully-featured scanner application, including

documentation, drivers, test utilities and sample source code.
www.zebra.com/ScannerSDKforWindows
Scanner Management Service (SMS) Remotely manages your Zebra scanner and queries its asset
information.
www.zebra.com/sms
57
Scanner Signal Descriptions

Figure 18 Scanner Cable Pinouts
Cable Interface Port
PIN 1 PIN 10
Interface Cable
Modular Connector
The signal descriptions in Table 7 apply to the connectors on the DS9308 scanner and are for reference only.
Table 7 DS9308 Scanner Signal Pin-outs

Pin IBM RS-232 Keyboard Wedge USB
1 Cable ID Cable ID Cable ID Cable ID
2 Power (+5V) Power (+5V) Power (+5V) Power (+5V)
3 Ground Ground Ground Ground
4 IBM_OUT TxD KeyClock Reserved
5 IBM_IN RxD TermData D+
6 IBM_T/R RTS KeyData Reserved
7 Reserved CTS TermClock D-
8 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
9 See note
10 See note
Note: EAS configurations use pins 9 and 10 for an EAS antenna. For other configurations pins 9 and 10 are
open.
58
User Preferences &
Miscellaneous Options
Introduction
You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes
user preference features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 8 on page 60 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If
the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
To set feature values, scan a single barcode or a short barcode sequence. The settings are stored in non-volatile
memory and are preserved even when the scanner powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the screen,
be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and bars and/or
spaces do not merge.
If not using the default host, select the host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the
power-up beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, see Default Parameters on page 62. Throughout the programming barcode
menus, asterisks indicate (*) default values.
* Indicates default * Enable Parameter

(1) Feature/option
Option value
Scanning Sequence Examples

In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the beeper tone to high, scan
the High Frequency (beep tone) barcode listed under Beep Tone on page 65. The scanner issues a fast warble
beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.
Other parameters require scanning several barcodes. See the parameter descriptions for this procedure.
59
Errors While Scanning

Unless otherwise specified, to correct an error during a scanning sequence, just re-scan the correct parameter.
User Preferences/Miscellaneous Options Parameter Defaults

Table 8 lists defaults for user preferences parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter. The new value replaces the standard default value in
memory. To recall default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
• Configure the scanner using the 123Scan configuration program. See 123Scan and Software Tools.
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default parameters.
Table 8 User Preferences Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Number 1 Number 2 Number
Standard User Preferences
Set Default Parameter N/A N/A N/A 62
Parameter Barcode Scanning 236 ECh Enable 63
Beep After Good Decode 56 38h Enable 63
Beep Volume 140 8Ch High 64
Beep Tone 145 91h Medium 65
Beep Duration 628 F1h 74h Short 66
Volume Adjustment Trigger Timeout 403 F0h 93h 5 Seconds 67
Suppress Power Up Beeps 721 F1h D1h Do Not Suppress 68
Direct Decode Indicator 859 F2h 5Bh Disable 69
Low Power Mode 128 80h Disable 70
Time Delay to Low Power Mode 146 92h 1 Hour 71
Trigger Mode 138 8Ah Presentation Mode 73
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern 306 F0h 32h Enable 74
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming 590 F1h 4Eh Disable Presentation 75

Pattern (Hands-free) Decode
Aiming Pattern
Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout 2030 EDh 5 Seconds 76
1. Parameter number decimal values are used for programming via RSM commands.
2. SSI number hex values are used for programming via SSI commands.
60
Table 8 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Picklist Mode 402 F0h 92h Enable Picklist Mode in 77

Hand-held Mode
Continuous Barcode Read 649 F1h 89h Disable 78
Unique Barcode Reporting 723 F1h D3h Enable 78
Decode Session Timeout 136 88h 9.9 Seconds 79
Timeout Between Decodes, Same 137 89h 0.5 Seconds 79

Symbol
Timeout Between Decodes, Different 144 90h 0.1 Seconds 80

Symbols
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol 724 F1h D4h Disable 80
Mobile Phone/Display Mode 716 F1h CCh Normal 81
PDF Prioritization 719 F1h CFh Disable 82
PDF Prioritization Timeout 720 F1h D0h 200 ms 82
Decoding Illumination 298 F0h 2Ah Enable 83
Illumination Brightness 669 F1h 9Dh High 83
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger 858 F2h 5Ah Less Motion Tolerance 85
Mode Only)
Product ID (PID) Type 1281 F8h 05h 01h Host Type Unique 85
Product ID (PID) Value 1725 F8h 06h BDh 0 86

ECLevel 1710 F8h 06h AEh 0 86
Enter Key N/A N/A N/A 87
Tab Key N/A N/A N/A 87
Transmit Code ID Character 45 2Dh None 88
Prefix Value 99, 105 63h, 69h 7013 <CR><LF> 89
Suffix 1 Value 98, 104 62h, 68h 7013 <CR><LF> 89

Suffix 2 Value 100, 106 64h, 6Ah
Scan Data Transmission Format 235 EBh Data As Is 90
FN1 Substitution Values 103, 109 67h, 6Dh 7013 <CR><LF> 92
Transmit “No Read” Message 94 5E Disable 93
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval 1118 F8h 04h 5Eh Disable 94
61
Table 8 User Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
securPharm Decoding 1752 F8h 06h D8h Disable 95
securPharm Output Formatting 1753 F8h 06h D9h No Formatting 96

Default Parameters
Scan one of the following barcodes to reset the scanner to its default settings as follows:
• Restore Defaults resets all default parameters as follows:

• If you configured custom default parameter values via the Write to Custom Defaults barcode,
scanning the Restore Defaults barcode restores these custom values.
• If you did not configure custom default parameter values, scanning the Restore Defaults barcode
restores the factory default values. See Parameter Defaults for these values.
• Set Factory Defaults clears all custom default values and sets the factory default values. See Parameter
Defaults for these values.
Write to Custom Defaults

To create a set of custom defaults, select the desired parameter values in this guide, and then scan Write to
Custom Defaults.
Restore Defaults
Set Factory Defaults
Write to Custom Defaults
62
Parameter Barcode Scanning

Parameter # 236
SSI # ECh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to enable or disable the decoding of parameter barcodes,
including the Set Defaults barcodes.
* Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning

(1)
Disable Parameter Barcode Scanning

(0)
Beep After Good Decode

Parameter # 56
SSI # 38h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not the scanner beeps after a good decode.
If you select Do Not Beep After Good Decode, the beeper still operates during parameter menu scanning and to
indicate error conditions.
* Enable Beep After Good Decode

(1)
Disable Beep After Good Decode

(0)
63
Beep Volume
Parameter # 140
SSI # 8Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a beep volume.
Low Volume
(2)
Medium Volume
(1)
* High Volume
(0)
64
Beep Tone
Parameter # 145
SSI # 91h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a beep tone for audible feedback indicating a good decode. Select
from the Standard Beep Tones below or from the Beep Duration on page 66.
Scan Disable Beep Tone to disable all tones.
Disable Beep Tone

(3)
Standard Beep Tones
Low Beep Tone

(2)
* Medium Beep Tone

(1)
High Beep Tone

(0)
Medium to High Beep Tone (2-tone)

(4)
65
Beep Duration
Parameter # 628
SSI # F1h 74h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the duration for the good decode beep.
* Short Duration
(0)
Medium Duration
(1)
Long Duration
(2)
66
Volume Adjustment Trigger Timeout

Parameter # 403
SSI # F0h 93h
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the length of time needed to hold the trigger to adjust the volume.
The scanner changes volume and beeps with the new volume.
3 Seconds
(30)
* 5 Seconds
(50)
7 Seconds
(70)
10 Seconds
(100)
67
Suppress Power Up Beeps

Parameter # 721
SSI # F1h D1h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to suppress the scanner’s power-up beeps.
* Do Not Suppress Power Up Beeps

(0)
Suppress Power Up Beeps

(1)
68
Direct Decode Indicator

Parameter # 859
SSI # F2h 5Bh
This parameter is only supported in Standard (Level) Trigger Mode. Scan one of the following barcodes to select
optional blinking of the illumination on a successful decode if you continue to hold the trigger. If you release the
trigger upon decode, the blinking does not occur. This allows you to choose additional feedback for a successful
decode by holding the trigger, or to continue to scan as normal.
• * Disable Direct Decode Indicator - Illumination does not blink on a successful decode.
• 1 Blink - Illumination blinks once upon a successful decode.
• 2 Blinks - Illumination blinks twice upon a successful decode.
* Disable Direct Decode Indicator

(0)
1 Blink
(1)
2 Blinks
(2)
69
Low Power Mode

Parameter # 128
SSI # 80h
NOTE: The Low Power Mode parameter only applies for non-USB and non-RS485 host interfaces, and when
Trigger Mode is set to Level (Standard).
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not the scanner enters low power mode after a decode
attempt or host communication. This applies to serial and keyboard wedge connections. If disabled, power
remains on after each decode attempt.
If you enable this, see Time Delay to Low Power Mode to set the inactivity time period.
Enable Low Power Mode

(1)
* Disable Low Power Mode

(0)
70
Time Delay to Low Power Mode

Parameter # 146
SSI # 92h
NOTE: This parameter only applies when Low Power Mode is enabled.
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the time the scanner remains active before entering low power mode.
The scanner wakes upon trigger press or when the host attempts to communicate with the scanner.
1 Second
(17)
10 Seconds
(26)
1 Minute
(33)
5 Minutes
(37)
15 Minutes
(43)
71
Time Delay to Low Power Mode (continued)
30 Minutes
(45)
45 Minutes
(46)
* 1 Hour
(49)
3 Hours
(51)
6 Hours
(54)
9 Hours
(57)
72
Trigger Mode
Parameter # 138
SSI # 8Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a trigger mode for the scanner:
• Standard (Level) - A trigger press activates decode processing. Decode processing continues until the
barcode decodes, you release the trigger, or the Decode Session Timeout on page 79 occurs.
• * Presentation (Blink) - The scanner activates decode processing when it detects a barcode in its field of
view. After a period of non-use, the LEDs turn off until the scanner senses motion..
Standard (Level)
(0)
* Presentation (Blink)
(7)
73
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern

Parameter # 306
SSI # F0h 32h
NOTE: The decode aiming pattern flashes even if you disable the Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern if the trigger
button is pressed.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hand-held mode:
• Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during barcode capture.
• Disable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off.
• Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern when the scanner
detects a PDF barcode.
* Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern

(2)
Disable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern

(0)
Enable Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF

(3)
74
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern

Parameter # 590
SSI # F1h 4Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select when to project the aiming pattern in hands-free mode:
• Enable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern - This projects the aiming pattern during
barcode capture.
• Disable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern - This turns the aiming pattern off.
• Enable Presentation (Hands-free) Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF - This projects the aiming pattern
when the scanner detects a PDF barcode.
NOTE: With Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout on page 76 enabled, the decode aiming pattern flashes
even when you disable the Hands-free Decode Aiming Pattern.
Enable Presentation (Hands-free)

Decode Aiming Pattern
(1)
* Disable Presentation (Hands-free)

Decode Aiming Pattern
(0)
Enable Presentation (Hands-free)

Decode Aiming Pattern on PDF
(2)
75
Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout

Parameter # 2030
SSI # EDh
In momentary trigger mode, the aiming pattern appears upon pressing the trigger. Once in this mode, upon each
trigger press the scanner attempts to decode the barcode in front of it. After a period of inactivity while the trigger is
not pressed, the scanner reverts to presentation mode where there is no illumination until an item is presented.
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the length of the period of inactivity in momentary trigger mode before
the scanner reverts to presentation mode.
2 Seconds
(20)
3 Seconds
(30)
4 Seconds
(40)
* 5 Seconds
(50)
76
Picklist Mode
Parameter # 402
SSI # F0h 92h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Picklist Mode. In this mode, you can pick out and decode a barcode
from a group of barcodes that are printed close together by placing the aiming pattern on the barcode you want to
decode.
NOTES: Enabling Picklist Mode overrides the Disable Decode Aiming Pattern options. You can not disable the
decode aiming pattern when Picklist Mode is enabled.
Enabling Picklist Mode can slow decode speed and hinder the ability to decode longer barcodes.
• Enable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always enabled.

• Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-held Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is out of
hands-free mode and disabled when the scanner is in presentation mode.
• Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode - Picklist Mode is enabled when the scanner is in hands-free
mode only.
NOTE: When using Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode, increase the time of the Timeout Between Decodes,
Same Symbol on page 79.
• Disable Picklist Mode Always - Picklist Mode is always disabled.
Enable Picklist Mode Always

(2)
* Enable Picklist Mode in Hand-held Mode

(1)
Enable Picklist Mode in Hands-free Mode

(3)
Disable Picklist Mode Always

(0)
77
Continuous Barcode Read

Parameter # 649
SSI # F1h 89h
Scan Enable Continuous Barcode Read to report every barcode while the trigger is pressed.
NOTE: We strongly recommend enabling Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout on page 76 with this parameter.
Disabling Picklist Mode can cause accidental decodes when more than one barcode is in the scanner's
field of view.
Enable Continuous Barcode Read

(1)
* Disable Continuous Barcode Read

(0)
Unique Barcode Reporting

Parameter # 723
SSI # F1h D3h
Scan Enable Continuous Barcode Read Uniqueness to report only unique barcodes while the trigger is
pressed. This option only applies when Continuous Barcode Read is enabled.
* Enable Unique Barcode Reporting

(1)
Disable Unique Barcode Reporting

(0)
78
Decode Session Timeout

Parameter # 136
SSI # 88h
This parameter sets the maximum time decode processing continues during a scan attempt. It is programmable in
0.1 second increments from 0.5 to 9.9 seconds. The default timeout is 9.9 seconds.
To set a Decode Session Timeout, scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric
Barcodes that correspond to the desired on time. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. For example, to set
a Decode Session Timeout of 0.5 seconds, scan this barcode, and then scan the 0 and 5 barcodes. To correct an
error or change the selection, scan Cancel .
Decode Session Timeout
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol

Parameter # 137
SSI # 89h
Use this option in presentation mode or Continuous Barcode Read mode to prevent the scanner from continuously
decoding the same barcode when it is left in the scanner’s field of view. The barcode must be out of the field of
view for the timeout period before the scanner reads the same consecutive symbol. It is programmable in 0.1
second increments from 0.0 to 9.9 seconds. The default interval is 0.5 seconds.
To select the timeout between decodes for the same symbol, scan the following barcode, and then scan two
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
79
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols

Parameter # 144
SSI # 90h
Use this option in presentation mode or Continuous Barcode Read to control the time the scanner waits before
decoding a different symbol. It is programmable in 0.1 second increments from 0.1 to 9.9 seconds. The default is
0.1 seconds.
To select the timeout between decodes for different symbols, scan the following barcode, and then scan two
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired interval, in 0.1 second increments.
NOTE: Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols cannot be greater than or equal to the Decode Session
Timeout.
Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol

Parameter # 724 (SSI # F1h D4h)
NOTE: This feature does not apply to Timeout Between Decodes, Different Symbols.
NOTE: Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol cannot be greater than or equal to the Time Delay to Low
Power Mode (parameter #146 on page 71).
Scan Enable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol below to apply Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol
(parameter #137 on page 79) in hand-held trigger mode. Subsequent scans of Enable Triggered Timeout, Same
Symbol are ignored until Timeout Between Decodes, Same Symbol expires.
Enable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol

(1)
* Disable Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol

(0)
80
Mobile Phone/Display Mode

Parameter # 716
SSI # F1h CCh
This mode improves barcode reading performance off mobile phones and electronic displays. Scan one of the
following barcodes to select the desired mode.
* Normal Mobile Phone/Display Mode

(0)
Enhanced in Hand-held Mode

(1)
Enhanced in Hands-free Mode

(2)
Enhanced in Both Modes

(3)
81
PDF Prioritization
Parameter # 719
SSI # F1h CFh
Scan Enable PDF Prioritization to delay decoding certain 1D barcodes (see Note below) by the value specified in
PDF Prioritization Timeout. During that time the scanner attempts to decode a PDF417 symbol (e.g., on a US
driver's license), and if successful, reports this only. If it does not decode (can not find) a PDF417 symbol, it reports
the 1D symbol after the timeout. The 1D symbol must be in the device’s field of view for the scanner to report it.
This parameter does not affect decoding other symbologies.
NOTE: To use PDF Prioritization in hand-held mode, you must disable Picklist Mode.
NOTE: The 1D Code 128 barcode lengths include the following:

• 7 to 10 characters
In addition, a Code 39 barcode with the following lengths are considered to potentially be part of a US
driver’s license:
• 8 characters
• 12 characters
Enable PDF Prioritization

(1)
* Disable PDF Prioritization

(0)
PDF Prioritization Timeout

Parameter # 720
SSI # F1h D0h
If you enabled PDF Prioritization, set this timeout to indicate how long the scanner attempts to decode a PDF417
symbol before reporting the 1D barcode in the field of view.
82
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that specify the timeout in
milliseconds. For example, to enter 400 ms, scan the following barcode, and then scan 0400. The range is 0 to
5000 ms, and the default is 200 ms.
PDF Prioritization Timeout
Decoding Illumination
Parameter # 298
SSI # F0h 2Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to determine whether the scanner turns on illumination to aid decoding.
Enabling illumination usually results in superior images and better decode performance. The effectiveness of the
illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.
* Enable Decoding Illumination

(1)
Disable Decoding Illumination

(0)
Illumination Brightness
Parameter # 669
SSI # F1h 9Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the illumination brightness used during an active decode session. This
only applies in hand-held mode (not in presentation mode).
NOTE: Selecting a lower brightness level can affect decode performance.
83
Low Illumination Brightness

(0)
Medium Illumination Brightness

(3)
* High Illumination Brightness

(10)
84
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held Trigger Modes Only)

Parameter # 858
SSI # F2h 5Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a motion tolerance option:
• Less Motion Tolerance - This provides optimal decoding performance on 1D barcodes.

• More Motion Tolerance - This increases motion tolerance and speeds decoding when scanning a series
of 1D barcodes in rapid progression.
* Less Motion Tolerance

(0)
More Motion Tolerance

(1)
Product ID (PID) Type

Parameter # 1281
SSI # F8h 05h 01h
Scan one of the following barcodes to define the PID value reported in USB enumeration.
* Host Type Unique

(0)
Product Unique
(1)
IBM Unique
(2)
85
Product ID (PID) Value

Parameter # 1725
SSI # F8h 06h BDh
To set a Product ID value, scan Set PID Value, and then scan four numeric barcodes in Numeric Barcodes that
correspond to the value. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a selection,
scan Cancel on page 426. The range is (0,1600-1649).
NOTE: This parameter is applicable to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global
Commerce Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface.
Set PID Value
ECLevel
Parameter # 1710
SSI # F8h 06h AEh
To set an ECLevel value, scan Set ECLevel, and then scan five numeric barcodes in Numeric Barcodes that
correspond to the desired level. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error, or change a
selection, scan Cancel on page 426.
NOTE: This parameter is applicable to customers using a Firmware Flash Update per the Toshiba Global
Commerce Solutions (TGCS) Universal Serial Bus OEM Point-of-Sale Device Interface. It allows a
customer to define an ECLevel value in order to manage and control Flash Update operations on the
4690 operating system.
Contact the Zebra Customer Support Center online at: www.zebra.com/support for more information.
Set ECLevel
86
Miscellaneous Scanner Parameters

Enter Key
Scan the following barcode to add an Enter key (carriage return/line feed) after scanned data.
To program other prefixes and/or suffixes, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 89.
Add Enter Key (Carriage Return/Line Feed)
Tab Key
Scan the following barcode to add a Tab key after scanned data.
Tab Key
87
Transmit Code ID Character

Parameter # 45
SSI # 2Dh
A Code ID character identifies the code type of a scanned barcode. This is useful when decoding more than one
code type. In addition to any single character prefix selected, the Code ID character is inserted between the prefix
and the decoded symbol.
Select no Code ID character, a Symbol Code ID character, or an AIM Code ID character. For Code ID characters,
see Symbol Code Identifiers on page 456 and AIM Code Identifiers on page 457.
NOTE: If you enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID Character, and enable Transmit “No Read”
Message on page 93, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to the NR message.
Symbol Code ID Character

(2)
AIM Code ID Character

(1)
* None
(0)
88
Prefix/Suffix Values
Key Category Parameter # P = 99, S1 = 98, S2 = 100
SSI # P = 63h, S1 = 62h, S2 = 64h
Decimal Value Parameter # P = 105, S1 = 104, S2 = 106
SSI # P = 69h, S1 = 68h, S2 = 6Ah
NOTE: To use Prefix/Suffix values, first set the Scan Data Transmission Format on page 90.
You can append a prefix and/or one or two suffixes to scan data for use in data editing. To set a value for a prefix
or suffix, scan one of the following barcodes, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond
to that value. See ASCII Character Sets for the four-digit codes.
When using host commands to set the prefix or suffix, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set the 3-digit
decimal value. See ASCII Character Sets for the four-digit codes.
The default prefix and suffix value is 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key). To correct an error or change a selection,
scan Cancel on page 426.
Scan Prefix
(7)
Scan Suffix 1
(6)
Scan Suffix 2
(8)
Data Format Cancel
89
Scan Data Transmission Format

Parameter # 235
SSI # EBh
NOTE: If using this parameter do not use ADF rules to set the prefix/suffix.
To change the scan data format, scan one of the following barcodes corresponding to the desired format.
To set values for the prefix and/or suffix, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 89.
* Data As Is
(0)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1>

(1)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 2>

(2)
<DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>

(3)
90
Scan Data Transmission Format (continued)
<PREFIX> <DATA >

(4)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1>

(5)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 2>

(6)
<PREFIX> <DATA> <SUFFIX 1> <SUFFIX 2>

(7)
91
FN1 Substitution Values

Key Category Parameter # 103
Key Category SSI # 67h
Decimal Value Parameter # 109
Decimal Value SSI # 6Dh
Keyboard wedge and USB HID keyboard hosts support a FN1 substitution feature. Enabling this substitutes any
FN1 character (0x1b) in an EAN128 barcode with a value. This value defaults to 7013 <CR><LF> (Enter key).
When using host commands to set the FN1 substitution value, set the key category parameter to 1, and then set
the 3-digit keystroke value. See the ASCII Character Set table for the current host interface for the desired value.
To select a FN1 substitution value via barcode menus:
1. Scan the following barcode.
Set FN1 Substitution Value
2. Locate the keystroke desired for FN1 Substitution in the ASCII Character Set table for the current host
interface, and enter the 4-digit ASCII value by scanning four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel.
To enable FN1 substitution for USB HID keyboard, scan Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution on page 245.
To enable FN1 substitution for keyboard wedge, scan Enable FN1 Substitution on page 309.
92
Transmit “No Read” Message

Parameter # 94
SSI # 5Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to set an option for transmitting the No Read (NR) characters.
NOTE: If you enable Transmit No Read, and also enable Symbol Code ID Character or AIM Code ID
Character for Transmit Code ID Character on page 88, the scanner appends the code ID for Code 39 to
the NR message.
NOTE: This does not apply in presentation mode.
• Enable No Read - This transmits the characters NR when a successful decode does not occur before
trigger release or the Decode Session Timeout expires. See Decode Session Timeout on page 79.
• Disable No Read - This sends nothing to the host if a symbol does not decode.
Enable No Read
(1)
* Disable No Read
(0)
93
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval

Parameter # 1118
SSI # F8h 04h 5Eh
The scanner can send unsolicited heartbeat messages to assist in diagnostics. To enable this parameter and set
the desired unsolicited heartbeat interval, scan one of the following time interval barcodes, or scan Set Another
Interval followed by four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes that correspond to the desired number of seconds.
Scan Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval to turn off the feature.
The heartbeat event is sent as decode data (with no decode beep) in the form of:
MOTEVTHB:nnn
where nnn is a three-digit sequence number starting at 001 and wrapping after 100.
10 Seconds
(10)
1 Minute
(60)
Set Another Interval
* Disable Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval

(0)
94
securPharm Decoding
Parameter # 1752
SSI # F8h 06h D8h
securPharm implements the IFA and GS1 Coding System for the European pharmaceutical industry. securPharm
code is used to prevent pharmaceutical counterfeiting.
When this feature is enabled, if a GS1 symbol is decoded and includes any aspects of the Application Identifier
associated with the securPharm GS1 specifications, the entire GS1 symbol is processed as a securPharm symbol.
For this reason, it is expected that under certain circumstances, a GS1 barcodes that is a securPharm symbol may
not be processed properly; if the GS1 symbol is not created as per the specification. The output cannot be
guaranteed as valid.
Although the GS1-128 type and the GS1 DataBar family are not specifically indicated in the IFA specification, they
are supported.
The securPharm output is in XML format and can include the product number, serial number, lot number,
expiration and Date of Manufacturing. The XML tags can be arranged in any order. Tags that are not in the
barcode are omitted. For example:
<content dfi=”value_dfi”>
<Daten_1>value_Daten_1</Daten_1>
<Daten_2>value_Daten_2</Daten_2>
<Daten_n>value_Daten_n</Daten_n>
</content>
Where:
value_dfi = IFA or GS1
Daten_1 to Daten_n is the production number, serial number, etc.
Scan a barcode below to enable or disable the ability to process pharmaceutical type barcodes.
* Disable securPharm Decoding

(0)
Enable securPharm Decoding

(1)
95
securPharm Output Formatting

Parameter # 1753
SSI # F8h 06h D9h
NOTE: securPharm output formatting is effective only when securPharm Decoding on page 95 is enabled.
securPharm Output Formatting parameter options represent bit positions. Therefore, any combination of
formatting can be used.
When you scan a securPharm Output Formatting barcode, the securPharm output is formatted in a number of
ways.
Sample GS1 Format

Product Number: GTIN Data Identifier DI Data Format Identifier: GS1
<content dfi="GS1">
Data Carrier
<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>
FNC104150123456782 > Scanned Barcode > <lot>1A234B5</lot>
101A234B5FNC1 <exp>151231</exp>
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
1717231 </content>
Sample GS1 Output - Feature Disabled

The output has no format:
0104150123456782101A234B517151231211234567890123456
Sample GS1 Output - No Formatting (0)

The output is a single line of characters:
<content
dfi="GS1"><gtin>04150123456782</gtin><lot>1A234B5</lot><exp>151231</exp><sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab (1)

The output is a single line of characters with a tab inserted in the XML body:
<content
dfi="GS1">[tab]<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>[tab]<lot>1A234B5</lot>[tab]<exp>151231</exp>[tab]<sn>12345
67890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert New Line (2)

The output consists of multiple lines of characters with a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="GS1">
<gtin>04150123456782</gtin>
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
<exp>151231</exp>
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
96
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab and New Line (3)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with tabs and a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="GS1">
[tab] <gtin>04150123456782</gtin>
[tab] <lot>1A234B5</lot>
[tab] <exp>151231</exp>
[tab] <sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
Sample IFA Format

Product Number: PPNData Identifier DI Data Format Identifier: IFA
<content dfi="IFA">
Data Carrier <ppn>111234567842</ppn>
Mac069N11123456782Gs > Scanned Barcode > <lot>1A234B5</lot>
1T1A234B5Gs <sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
D151231Gs
Sample GS1 Output - Feature Disabled
The output has no format:

[)>069N1112345678421T1A234B5S1234567890123456
Sample GS1 Output - No Formatting (0)
The output is a single line of characters:

<content
dfi="IFA"><ppn>111234567842</ppn><lot>1A234B5</lot><sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab (1)
The output is a single line of characters with a tab inserted in the XML body:
<content
dfi="IFA">[tab]<ppn>111234567842</ppn>[tab]<lot>1A234B5</lot>[tab]<sn>1234567890123456</sn></content>
Sample GS1 Output - Insert New Line (2)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="IFA">
<ppn>111234567842</ppn>
<lot>1A234B5</lot>
<sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
97
Sample GS1 Output - Insert Tab and New Line (3)
The output consists of multiple lines of characters with tabs and a new line character at the end of each line.
<content dfi="IFA">
[tab] <ppn>111234567842</ppn>
[tab] <lot>1A234B5</lot>
[tab] <sn>1234567890123456</sn>
</content>
securPharm Output Formatting Barcodes

Scan a barcode below to format the securPharm output.
* No Formatting
(0)
Insert Tab
(1)
Insert New Line

(2)
Insert Tab and New Line

(3)
98
Imager Preferences
Introduction
You can program the imager to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes
image capture preference features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features.
NOTE: Only the Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging interface supports image capture. See USB Device
Type on page 237 to enable this host.
The imager ships with the settings shown in Table 9 on page 100 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults). If
the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
memory and are preserved even when the imager powers down.
NOTE: Most computer monitors allow scanning barcodes directly on the screen. When scanning from the
screen, be sure to set the document magnification to a level where you can see the barcode clearly, and
bars and/or spaces do not merge.
To return all features to default values, scan the Set Factory Defaults on page 62. Throughout the programming
barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.

(1) Feature/option
Option value
99
Imager Preferences

In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to disable image capture illumination,
scan the Disable Image Capture Illumination barcode under Image Capture Illumination on page 103. The
imager issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults

Table 9 lists defaults for image capture preference parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
NOTE: See Parameter Defaults for all user preference, host, symbology, and miscellaneous default
parameters.
Table 9 Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Image Capture Preferences
Operational Modes N/A N/A N/A 102
Image Capture Illumination 361 F0h 69h Enable 103
Image Capture Autoexposure 360 F0h 68h Enable 103
Fixed Exposure 567 F4h F1h 37h 100 104
Analog Gain 1232 F4h D0h Analog Gain x 2 105
Digital Gain 1233 F4h D1h 32 105
Gain / Exposure Priority for Snapshot 562 F1h 32h Autodetect 106
Mode
Snapshot Mode Timeout 323 F0h 43h 0 (30 seconds) 107
Snapshot Aiming Pattern 300 F0h 2Ch Enable 108
Silence Operational Mode Changes 1293 F8h 05h 0Dh Disable (do not silence) 108
Image Cropping 301 F0h 2Dh Disable 109
100
Imager Preferences
Table 9 Image Capture Preferences Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Crop to Pixel Addresses 315 F4h F0h 3Bh 0 top 109

316 F4h F0h 3Ch 0 left
317 F4h F0h 3Dh 799 bottom
318 F4h F0h 3Eh 1279 right
Image Size (Number of Pixels) 302 F0h 2Eh Full 111
Image Brightness (Target White) 390 F0h 86h 180 112
JPEG Image Options 299 F0h 2Bh Quality 112
JPEG Quality Value 305 F0h 31h 65 113
JPEG Size Value 561 F1h 31h 160 kB 113
Image Enhancement 564 F1h 34h Low (1) 114
Image File Format Selection 304 F0h 30h JPEG 115
Image Rotation 665 F1h 99h 0 116
Bits per Pixel (BPP) 303 F0h 2Fh 8 BPP 117
Signature Capture 93 5Dh Disable 118
Signature Capture Image File Format 313 F0h 39h JPEG 119
Selection
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel (BPP) 314 F0h 3Ah 8 BPP 120
Signature Capture Width 366 F4h F0h 6Eh 400 121
Signature Capture Height 367 F4h F0h 6Fh 100 121
Signature Capture JPEG Quality 421 F0h A5h 65 121
101
Imager Preferences

The parameters in this chapter control image capture characteristics.
Operational Modes
The imager has two modes of operation:
• Decode Mode
• Snapshot Mode
Decode Mode
By default, when you press the trigger the imager attempts to locate and decode enabled barcodes within its field
of view. The imager remains in this mode until it decodes a barcode or you release the trigger.
Snapshot Mode
Use Snapshot Mode to capture a high-quality image and transmit it to the host. Scan the Snapshot Mode barcode
to temporarily enter this mode. While in this mode the imager blinks the green LED at one-second intervals to
indicate it is not in standard operating (decode) mode.
In Snapshot Mode, the imager turns on its aiming pattern to highlight the area to capture in the image. The next
trigger press instructs the imager to capture a high quality image and transmit it to the host. A short time may pass
(less than two seconds) between when the trigger is pressed and the image is captured as the imager adjusts to
lighting conditions. Hold the imager steady until a single beep indicates that it captured the image.
If you do not press the trigger within the Snapshot Mode Timeout period, the imager returns to Decode Mode. Use
Snapshot Mode Timeout on page 107 to adjust this timeout period. The default timeout period is 30 seconds.
To disable the aiming pattern during Snapshot Mode, see Snapshot Aiming Pattern on page 108.
Snapshot Mode
102
Imager Preferences
Image Capture Illumination

Parameter # 361
SSI # F0h 69h
Scan Enable Image Capture Illumination to turn on illumination during every image capture. This usually results
in superior images. The effectiveness of illumination decreases as the distance to the target increases.
Scan Disable Image Capture Illumination to prevent the imager from using illumination.
* Enable Image Capture Illumination

(1)
Disable Image Capture Illumination

(0)
Image Capture Autoexposure

Parameter # 360
SSI # F0h 68h
Scan Enable Image Capture Autoexposure to allow the imager to control gain settings and exposure
(integration) time to best capture an image for the selected operation mode.
Scan Disable Image Capture Autoexposure to manually adjust the gain and exposure time (see the following
pages). This option is only recommended for advanced users with difficult image capture situations.
* Enable Image Capture Autoexposure

(1)
Disable Image Capture Autoexposure

(0)
103
Imager Preferences
Fixed Exposure
Parameter # 567
SSI # F4h F1h 37h
Type: Word
Range: 5 to 30,000
This parameter configures the exposure used in manual mode for Snapshot mode.
Each integer value represents 100 μs of exposure. The default value is 100 which results in an exposure setting of
10 ms.
To set the exposure, scan the Fixed Exposure barcode, and then scan four numeric barcodes from Numeric
Barcodes representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set a Fixed Exposure value of 99,
scan 0, 0, 9, 9.
Fixed Exposure
(4 digits)
104
Imager Preferences
Analog and Digital Gain

If you disable Image Capture Autoexposure you can modify the engine’s analog and digital gain using these
parameters. Total gain = analog gain x digital gain.
Analog Gain
Parameter # 1232
SSI # F4h D0h
Select an option to set an analog gain value.
Analog Gain x 1
(00h)
* Analog Gain x 2
(01h)
Analog Gain x 4
(02h)
Analog Gain x 8
(03h)
Digital Gain
Parameter # 1233
SSI # F4h D1h
To set the digital gain, scan the following barcode, then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes to enter a
2-digit value for the digital gain. The default is 32.
A value of 32 = x 1 digital gain; i.e., digital gain = 1/32 x digital gain parameter value.
Digital Gain
105
Imager Preferences
Gain/Exposure Priority for Snapshot Mode

Parameter # 562
SSI # F1h 32h
This parameter alters the imager’s gain exposure priority when it acquires an image in Snapshot Mode while in
autoexposure mode. Scan one of the following barcodes:
• Low Exposure Priority - The imager favors higher gain over exposure to capture an image, resulting in an
image that is less susceptible to motion blur at the expense of noise artifacts. However, for most
applications, the amount of noise is acceptable.
• Low Gain Priority - The imager favors longer exposure time rather than higher gain to capture an image,
ensuring the image is less noisy and produces fewer artifacts during post processing activities like image
enhancement (sharpening). This mode is recommended for fixed mount / fixed object image capture since
the image acquired is susceptible to motion blur.
• Autodetect (default) - The imager automatically selects Gain Priority or Low Exposure Priority mode for
Snapshot Mode. If the imager is in a magnetic reed switch-enabled stand (or it is configured in Blink
Mode), it uses Low Gain Priority. Otherwise, it uses the Low Exposure Priority.
Low Gain Priority

(0)
Low Exposure Priority

(1)
* Autodetect
(2)
106
Imager Preferences
Snapshot Mode Timeout

Parameter # 323
SSI # F0h 43h
This parameter sets the amount of time the imager remains in Snapshot Mode. The imager exits Snapshot Mode
when you press the trigger, or when the Snapshot Mode Timeout elapses. To set this timeout value, scan the Set
Snapshot Mode Timeout barcode, and then scan a barcode from Numeric Barcodes. The default value is 0 which
represents 30 seconds; values increment by 30. For example, 0 = 30 seconds, 1 = 60 seconds,
2 = 90 seconds, etc. The maximum timeout value that can be set on the scanner is 9 = 300 seconds.
To quickly re-set the default timeout to 30 seconds, scan the 30 Seconds barcode.
If you scan No Timeout, the imager remains in Snapshot Mode until you press the trigger.
Set Snapshot Mode Timeout
* 30 Seconds
No Timeout
107
Imager Preferences
Snapshot Aiming Pattern

Parameter # 300
SSI # F0h 2Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to project the aiming pattern when in Snapshot Mode.
NOTE: If enabled, the aiming pattern frames the image for aiming purposes and does not appear in the
captured image.
* Enable Snapshot Aiming Pattern

(1)
Disable Snapshot Aiming Pattern

(0)
Silence Operational Mode Changes

Parameter # 1293
SSI # F8h 05h 0Dh
Scan Silence Operational Mode Changes to silence the beeper when switching between operational modes
(e.g., from Decode Mode to Snapshot Mode).
Silence Operational Mode Changes (Enable)

(1)
* Do Not Silence Operational Mode Changes (Disable)

(0)
108
Imager Preferences
Image Cropping
Parameter # 301
SSI # F0h 2Dh
Scan the Enable Image Cropping barcode to crop a captured image to the pixel addresses set in Crop to Pixel
Addresses on page 109. Scan Disable Image Cropping to present the full 1280 x 800 pixels.
Enable Image Cropping

(1)
* Disable Image Cropping

(Use Full 1280 x 800 Pixels)
(0)
Crop to Pixel Addresses

Parameter # 315
SSI # F4h F0h 3Bh (Top)
Parameter # 316
SSI # F4h F0h 3Ch (Left)
Parameter # 317
SSI # F4h F0h 3Dh (Bottom)
Parameter # 318
SSI # F4h F0h 3Eh (Right)
NOTE: The imager has a cropping resolution of 4 pixels. Setting the cropping area to less than 4 pixels (after
resolution adjustment, see Image Size (Number of Pixels) on page 111) transfers the entire image.
If you enabled Image Cropping, set the pixel addresses from (0,0) to (1279 x 799) to crop to.
Columns are numbered from 0 to 1279, rows from 0 to 799. Specify values for Top, Left, Bottom, and Right, where
Top and Bottom correspond to row pixel addresses, and Left and Right correspond to column pixel addresses. For
example, for a 4 row x 8 column image in the extreme bottom-right section of the image, set the following values:
Top = 796, Bottom = 799, Left = 1272, Right = 1279
To set the pixel addresses, scan each of the following barcodes, and then scan four numeric barcodes from
Numeric Barcodes representing the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to crop the top pixel address
to 3, scan 0, 0, 0, 3. The defaults are:
Top = 0, Bottom = 799, Left = 0, Right = 1279
109
Imager Preferences
Crop to Pixel Address (continued)
Top Pixel Address

(0 - 799 Decimal)
Left Pixel Address

(0 - 1279 Decimal)
Bottom Pixel Address

(0 - 799 Decimal)
Right Pixel Address

(0 - 1279 Decimal)
110
Imager Preferences
Image Size (Number of Pixels)

Parameter # 302
SSI # F0h 2Eh
This option alters image resolution before compression. Multiple pixels are combined to one pixel, resulting in a
smaller image containing the original content with reduced resolution.
Scan a barcode below to select an image size.
Table 10 Image Size

Resolution Value Uncropped Image Size
Full 1280 x 800
1/2 640 x 400
1/4 320 x 200
* Full Resolution
(0)
1/2 Resolution
(1)
1/4 Resolution
(3)
111
Imager Preferences
Image Brightness (Target White)

Parameter # 390
SSI # F0h 86h
Type: Byte
Range: 1 - 240
This parameter sets the Target White value used in Snapshot mode when using autoexposure. White and black
are defined as 240 decimal and 1, respectively. Setting the value to the factory default of 180 sets the white level of
the image to ~180.
Scan the Image Brightness barcode, and then scan three numeric barcodes from Numeric Barcodes representing
the value. Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an Image Brightness value of 99, scan 0, 9, 9.
* 180
Image Brightness
(3 digits)
JPEG Image Options

Parameter # 299
SSI # F0h 2Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to optimize JPEG images for either size or quality:
• JPEG Quality Selector - Enter a quality value via the JPEG Quality Value parameter; the imager then
selects the corresponding image size.
• JPEG Size Selector - Enter a size value via the JPEG Size Value parameter; the imager then selects the
best image quality.
* JPEG Quality Selector

(1)
JPEG Size Selector

(0)
112
Imager Preferences
JPEG Quality Value

Parameter # 305
SSI # F0h 31h
If you selected JPEG Quality Selector, scan the JPEG Quality Value barcode, and then scan three barcodes
from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a value from 5 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.
Leading zeros are required. For example, to set an image quality value of 55, scan 0, 5, 5.
JPEG Quality Value

(Default: 065)
(5 - 100 Decimal)
JPEG Size Value

Parameter # 561
SSI # F1h 31h
Type: Word
Range: 5-350
If you selected JPEG Size Selector, scan the JPEG Size Value barcode, and then scan three numeric barcodes
from Numeric Barcodes representing the target JPEG file size in kilobytes (KB). Leading zeros are required. For
example, to set an image file size value of 99, scan 0, 9, 9.
CAUTION:JPEG compression may take 10 to 15 seconds based on the amount of information in the target
image. Scanning JPEG Quality Selector (default setting) on page 112 produces a compressed image
that is consistent in quality and compression time.
JPEG Size Value

(Default: 160)
(3 digits)
113
Imager Preferences
Image Enhancement
Parameter # 564
SSI # F1h 34h
This parameter uses a combination of edge sharpening and contrast enhancement to produce an image that is
visually pleasing.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the level of image enhancement:
• Off (0)
• Low (1) - Default
• Medium (2)
• High (3)
Off
(0)
* Low
(1)
Medium
(2)
High
(3)
114
Imager Preferences
Image File Format Selector

Parameter # 304
SSI # F0h 30h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select an image format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG).
The imager stores captured images in the selected format.
BMP File Format

(3)
* JPEG File Format

(1)
TIFF File Format

(04h)
115
Imager Preferences
Image Rotation
Parameter # 665
SSI # F1h 99h
Scan one of the following barcodes to rotate the image 0, 90,180, or 270 degrees.
* Rotate 0o
(0)
Rotate 90o
(1)
Rotate 180o
(2)
Rotate 270o
(3)
116
Imager Preferences
Bits Per Pixel

Parameter # 303
SSI # F0h 2Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing
an image:
• 1 BPP - For a black and white image.

• 4 BPP - Assigns 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel.
NOTE: The imager ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
TIFF file formats only support 4 BPP and 8 BPP. Selecting 1 BPP for TIFF applies the 4 BPP option.
1 BPP
(0)
4 BPP
(1)
* 8 BPP
(2)
117
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture
Parameter # 93
SSI # 5Dh
A signature capture barcode is a special-purpose symbology which delineates a signature capture area in a
document with a machine-readable format. The recognition pattern is variable so it can optionally provide an index
to various signatures. The region inside the barcode pattern is considered the signature capture area. See
Signature Capture for more information.
Output File Format

Decoding a signature capture barcode de-skews the signature image and converts the image to a BMP, JPEG, or
TIFF file format. The output data includes the file descriptor followed by the formatted signature image.
Table 11 Output File Format

File Descriptor
Signature Image Size Signature Image

Output Format
Signature Type (1 byte) (4 bytes)
(1 byte)
(BIG Endian)
JPEG - 1 1-8 0x00000400 0x00010203….

BMP - 3
TIFF - 4
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Signature Capture.
Enable Signature Capture

(1)
* Disable Signature Capture

(0)
118
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture File Format Selector

Parameter # 313
SSI # F0h 39h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a signature file format appropriate for the system (BMP, TIFF, or
JPEG). The imager stores captured signatures in the selected format.
BMP Signature Format

(3)
* JPEG Signature Format

(1)
TIFF Signature Format

(4)
119
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture Bits Per Pixel

Parameter # 314
SSI # F0h 3Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing a
signature:
• 1 BPP - For a black and white image.

NOTE: The imager ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
1 BPP
(0)
4 BPP
(1)
* 8 BPP
(2)
120
Imager Preferences
Signature Capture Width

Parameter # 366
SSI # F4h F0h 6Eh
The aspect ratio of the Signature Capture Width and Signature Capture Height parameters must match that of the
signature capture area. For example, a 4 x 1 inch signature capture area requires a 4 to 1 aspect ratio of width to
height.
To set the width of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Width barcode, and then scan four
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a value in the range of 16 to 1280 decimal.
Signature Capture Width (Default: 400)

(16 - 1280 Decimal)
Signature Capture Height

Parameter # 367
SSI # F4h F0h 6Fh
To set the height of the signature capture box, scan the Signature Capture Height barcode, and then scan three
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a value in the range of 16 to 960 decimal.
Signature Capture Height (Default: 100)

(16 - 960 Decimal)
Signature Capture JPEG Quality

Parameter # 421
SSI # F0h A5h
Scan the JPEG Quality Value barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes corresponding to a
value from 005 to 100, where 100 represents the highest quality image.
JPEG Quality Value (Default: 065)

(5 - 100 Decimal)
121
Imager Preferences
122
Symbologies
Introduction
You can program the scanner to perform various functions, or activate different features. This chapter describes
symbology features and provides programming barcodes for selecting these features.
The scanner ships with the settings shown in Table 12 on page 124 (also see Parameter Defaults for all defaults).
If the default values suit requirements, programming is not necessary.
Setting Parameters
If not using a USB cable, select a host type (see each host chapter for specific host information) after the power-up
beeps sound. This is only necessary upon the first power-up when connected to a new host.
To return all features to default values, see Default Parameters on page 62. Throughout the programming barcode
menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Enable Parameter
* Indicates default Feature/option
123
Symbologies

In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to transmit barcode data without the
UPC-A check digit, scan the Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit barcode under Transmit UPC-A Check Digit on
page 142. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter
entry.

Symbology Parameter Defaults

Table 12 lists defaults for all symbology parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
memory. To recall the default parameter values, see Default Parameters on page 62.
parameters.
Table 12 Symbology Parameter Defaults

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number 2 Default
Number 1 Number
Enable/Disable All Code Types 131
1D Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A 1 01h Enable 131
UPC-E 2 02h Enable 132
UPC-E1 12 0Ch Disable 132
EAN-8/JAN 8 4 04h Enable 133
Bookland EAN 83 53h Disable 134
Bookland ISBN Format 576 F1h 40h ISBN-10 135
ISSN EAN 617 F1h 69h Disable 136
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals 16 10h Ignore 137

(2 and 5 digits)
124
Symbologies
Table 12 Symbology Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter Page
Number 1 Number
User-Programmable Supplementals 000 140

Supplemental 1: 579 F1h 43h
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 80 50h 10 140
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental 672 F1h A0h Combined 141

AIM ID
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 40 28h Enable 142
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 41 29h Enable 142
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit 42 2Ah Enable 143
UPC-A Preamble 34 22h System Character 144
UPC-E Preamble 35 23h System Character 145
UPC-E1 Preamble 36 24h System Character 146
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A 37 25h Disable 147
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A 38 26h Disable 147
EAN/JAN Zero Extend 39 27h Disable 148
UCC Coupon Extended Code 85 55h Disable 148
Coupon Report 730 F1h DAh New Coupon 149

Format
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone 1289 F8h 05h 09h Disable 150
Code 128
Code 128 8 08h Enable 150
Set Length(s) for Code 128 209, 210 D1h, D2h Any Length 151
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) 14 0Eh Enable 152
ISBT 128 84 54h Enable 153
ISBT Concatenation 577 F1h 41h Disable 153
Check ISBT Table 578 F1h 42h Enable 154
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223 DFh 10 155
Code 128 <FNC4> 1254 F8h 04h E6h Honor 155
Code 128 Security Level 751 F1h EFh Security Level 1 156
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone 1208 F8h 04h B8h Disable 157
125
Symbologies

Parameter Page
Number 1 Number
Code 39
Trioptic Code 39 13 0Dh Disable 158
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 86 56h Disable 158

(Italian Pharmacy Code)
Code 32 Prefix 231 E7h Disable 159
Set Length(s) for Code 39 18, 19 12h, 13h 1 to 55 159
Code 39 Check Digit Verification 48 30h Disable 161
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 43 2Bh Disable 161
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 17 11h Disable 162
Code 39 Security Level 750 F1h EEh Security Level 1 163
Code 93
Set Length(s) for Code 93 26, 27 1Ah, 1Bh 1 to 55 165
Code 11
Code 11 10 0Ah Disable 167
Set Lengths for Code 11 28, 29 1Ch, 1Dh 4 to 55 167
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 47 2Fh Disable 170
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 6 06h Enable 170
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 22, 23 16h, 17h 6 to 55 171
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 49 31h Disable 172
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit 44 2Ch Disable 173
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 82 52h Disable 173

Febraban 1750 F8h 06h D6h Disable 174
I 2 of 5 Security Level 1121 F8h 04h 61h Security Level 1 175
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone 1210 F8h 04h BAh Disable 176
126
Symbologies

Parameter Page
Number 1 Number
Discrete 2 of 5 (DTF)
Discrete 2 of 5 5 05h Disable 176
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 20, 21 14h 15h 1 to 55 177
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar 7 07h Enable 179
Set Lengths for Codabar 24, 25 18h, 19h 4 to 55 179
CLSI Editing 54 36h Disable 181
NOTIS Editing 55 37h Disable 181
Codabar Security Level 1776 F8h 06h F0h Security Level 1 182
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/ 855 F2h 57h Upper Case 183
Stop Characters Detection
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification 1784 F8h 06h F8h Disable 183
Transmit Codabar Check Digit 704 F1h C0h Disable 184
MSI
MSI 11 0Bh Disable 184
Set Length(s) for MSI 30, 31 1Eh, 1Fh 4 to 55 185
MSI Check Digits 50 32h One MSI Check 187

Digit
Transmit MSI Check Digit 46 2Eh Disable 187
MSI Check Digit Algorithm 51 33h Mod 10/Mod 10 189
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone 1392 F8h 05h 70h Disable 189
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5 408 F0h 98h Disable 190
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5 618 F1h 6Ah Disable 190
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths 619 F1h 6Bh 4 to 55 191

620 F1h 6Ch
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 622 F1h 6Eh Disable 193
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623 F1h 6Fh Disable 193
127
Symbologies

Parameter Page
Number 1 Number
Korean 3 of 5
Korean 3 of 5 581 F1h 45h Disable 194
Inverse 1D
Inverse 1D 586 F1h 4Ah Regular 194
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly 338 F0h 52h Enable 196

GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar Truncated,
GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar
Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited 339 F0h 53h Enable 197
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar 340 F0h 54h Enable 197
Expanded Stacked
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN 397 F0h 8Dh Disable 198
GS1 DataBar Security Level 1706 F8h 06h AAh Level 1 199
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check 728 F1h D8h Level 3 200
Symbology-Specific Security Features
Redundancy Level 78 4Eh 1 201
Security Level 77 4Dh 1 203
1D Quiet Zone Level 1288 F8h 05h 08h 1 204
Intercharacter Gap Size 381 F0h 7Dh Normal 205
Composite Codes
Composite CC-C 341 F0h 55h Disable 205
Composite CC-A/B 342 F0h 56h Disable 206
Composite TLC-39 371 F0h 73h Disable 206
Composite Inverse 1113 F8h 04h 59h Regular Only 206
UPC Composite Mode 344 F0h 58h UPC Never Linked 208
Composite Beep Mode 398 F0h 8Eh Beep As Each 209

Code Type is
Decoded
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN 427 F0h ABh Disable 209
Composite Codes
128
Symbologies

Parameter Page
Number 1 Number
2D Symbologies
PDF417 15 0Fh Enable 210
MicroPDF417 227 E3h Disable 210
Code 128 Emulation 123 7Bh Disable 211
Data Matrix 292 F0h 24h Enable 212
GS1 Data Matrix 1336 F8h 05h 38h Disable 212
Data Matrix Inverse 588 F1h 4Ch Inverse Autodetect 213
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images 537 F1h 19h Auto 214
Maxicode 294 F0h 26h Disable 215
QR Code 293 F0h 25h Enable 215
GS1 QR 1343 F8h 05h 3Fh Enable 216
MicroQR 573 F1h 3Dh Enable 216

Linked QR Mode 1847 737h Linked QR Only 217
Aztec 574 F1h 3Eh Enable 218
Aztec Inverse 589 F1h 4Dh Inverse Autodetect 218
Han Xin 1167 F8h 04h 8Fh Disable 219
Han Xin Inverse 1168 F8h 04h 90h Regular 219
Grid Matrix 1718 F8h 06h B6h Disable 220
Grid Matrix Inverse 1719 F8h 06h B7h Regular Only 220
Grid Matrix Mirror 1736 F8h 06h C8h Regular Only 221
DotCode 1906 F8 07 72h Disable 222
DotCode Inverse 1907 F8 07 73h Inverse Autodetect 223
DotCode Mirrored 1908 F8 07 74h Autodetect 224
DotCode Prioritize 1937 F8 07 91h Enable 225
Macro PDF
Flush Macro PDF Buffer N/A N/A N/A 226
Abort Macro PDF Entry N/A N/A N/A 226
Postal Codes
US Postnet 89 59h Disable 226
129
Symbologies

Parameter Page
Number 1 Number
US Planet 90 5Ah Disable 227
Transmit US Postal Check Digit 95 5Fh Enable 227
UK Postal 91 5Bh Disable 228
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 96 60h Enable 228
Japan Postal 290 F0h 22h Disable 229
Australia Post 291 F0h 23h Disable 229
Australia Post Format 718 F1h CEh Autodiscriminate 230
Netherlands KIX Code 326 F0h 46h Disable 231
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail 592 F1h 50h Disable 231
UPU FICS Postal 611 F1h 63h Disable 232
Mailmark 1337 F8h 05h 39h Disable 232
130
Symbologies
Enable/Disable All Code Types

Scan the Disable All Code Types barcode to disable all symbologies. This is useful when enabling only a few
code types.
Scan Enable All Code Types to enable all symbologies. This is useful if you need to disable only a few code
types.
Disable All Code Types
Enable All Code Types
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A
Parameter # 1
SSI # 01h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-A.
* Enable UPC-A
(1)
Disable UPC-A
(0)
131
Symbologies
UPC-E
Parameter # 2
SSI # 02h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-E.
* Enable UPC-E
(1)
Disable UPC-E
(0)
UPC-E1
Parameter # 12
SSI # 0Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPC-E1.
NOTE: UPC-E1 is not a UCC (Uniform Code Council) approved symbology.
Enable UPC-E1
(1)
* Disable UPC-E1
(0)
132
Symbologies
EAN-8/JAN-8
Parameter # 4
SSI # 04h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable EAN-8/JAN-8.
* Enable EAN-8/JAN-8
(1)
Disable EAN-8/JAN-8
(0)
EAN-13/JAN-13
Parameter # 3
SSI # 03h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable EAN-13/JAN-13.
* Enable EAN-13/JAN-13
(1)
Disable EAN-13/JAN-13
(0)
133
Symbologies
Bookland EAN
Parameter # 83
SSI # 53h
NOTE: If you enable Bookland EAN, select a Bookland ISBN Format. Also set Decode UPC/EAN/JAN
Supplementals on page 137 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only,
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode.
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Bookland EAN.
Enable Bookland EAN

(1)
* Disable Bookland EAN

(0)
134
Symbologies
Bookland ISBN Format

Parameter # 576
SSI # F1h 40h
NOTE: For Bookland EAN to function properly, first enable Bookland EAN using Bookland EAN on page 134,
and then set Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page 137 to either Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with
Supplementals Only, Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals, or Enable 978/979
Supplemental Mode.
If you enabled Bookland EAN using Bookland EAN on page 134, select one of the following formats for Bookland
data:
• Bookland ISBN-10 - The scanner reports Bookland data starting with 978 in traditional 10-digit format with
the special Bookland check digit for backward-compatibility. Data starting with 979 is not considered
Bookland in this mode.
• Bookland ISBN-13 - The scanner reports Bookland data (starting with either 978 or 979) as EAN-13 in
13-digit format to meet the 2007 ISBN-13 protocol.
* Bookland ISBN-10
(0)
Bookland ISBN-13
(1)
135
Symbologies
ISSN EAN
Parameter # 617
SSI # F1h 69h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable ISSN EAN.
Enable ISSN EAN

(1)
* Disable ISSN EAN

(0)
136
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

Parameter # 16
SSI # 10h
Supplementals are barcodes appended according to specific format conventions (e.g., UPC A+2, UPC E+2, EAN
13+2). The following options are available:
• Decode UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals Only - The scanner only decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols
with supplemental characters, and ignores symbols without supplementals.
• Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals - When presented with a UPC/EAN/JAN plus supplemental
symbol, the scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN and ignores the supplemental characters.
• Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals - The scanner decodes UPC/EAN/JAN symbols
with supplemental characters immediately. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner must
decode the barcode the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 140
before transmitting its data to confirm that there is no supplemental.
Select one of the following Supplemental Mode options to immediately transmit EAN-13 barcodes starting
with that prefix that have supplemental characters. If the symbol does not have a supplemental, the scanner
must decode the barcode the number of times set via UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 140
before transmitting the data to confirm that there is no supplemental. The scanner transmits UPC/EAN/JAN
barcodes that do not have that prefix immediately.
• Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode

• Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode
NOTE: If you select 978/979 Supplemental Mode and are scanning Bookland EAN barcodes, see
Bookland EAN on page 134 to enable Bookland EAN, and select a format using Bookland ISBN
Format on page 135.
• Enable 977 Supplemental Mode

• Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode
• Enable 491 Supplemental Mode
• Enable Smart Supplemental Mode - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with any prefix listed
previously.
• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with a 3-digit
user-defined prefix. Set this using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 140.
• Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with either
of two 3-digit user-defined prefixes. Set the prefixes using User-Programmable Supplementals on page
140.
• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with any
prefix listed previously or the prefix set using User-Programmable Supplementals on page 140.
• Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2 - This applies to EAN-13 barcodes starting with
any prefix listed previously or one of the two user-defined prefixes set using User-Programmable
Supplementals on page 140.
137
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
NOTE: To minimize the risk of invalid data transmission, select either to decode or ignore supplemental
characters.
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN With Supplementals Only

(1)
* Ignore UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals

(0)
Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN with Supplementals

(2)
Enable 378/379 Supplemental Mode

(4)
Enable 978/979 Supplemental Mode

(5)
Enable 977 Supplemental Mode

(7)
138
Symbologies
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (continued)
Enable 414/419/434/439 Supplemental Mode

(6)
Enable 491 Supplemental Mode

(8)
Enable Smart Supplemental Mode

(3)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1

(9)
Supplemental User-Programmable Type 1 and 2

(10)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1

(11)
Smart Supplemental Plus User-Programmable 1 and 2

(12)
139
Symbologies
User-Programmable Supplementals
Supplemental 1: Parameter # 579
SSI # F1h 43h
Supplemental 2: Parameter # 580
SSI # F1h 44h
If you selected a Supplemental User-Programmable option from Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals on page
137, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 1, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes to set the
3-digit prefix. To set a second 3-digit prefix, scan User-Programmable Supplemental 2, and then scan three
barcodes from Numeric Barcodes. The default is 000 (zeroes).
User-Programmable Supplemental 1
User-Programmable Supplemental 2
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy

Parameter # 80
SSI # 50h
If you selected Autodiscriminate UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals, this option adjusts the number of times to decode
a symbol without supplementals before transmission. The range is from two to thirty times. Five or above is
recommended when decoding a mix of UPC/EAN/JAN symbols with and without supplementals. The default is 10.
Scan the barcode below to set a decode redundancy value. Next, scan two numeric barcodes in Numeric
Barcodes. Enter a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on
page 426.
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy
140
Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental AIM ID Format

Parameter # 672
SSI # F1h A0h
If Transmit Code ID Character on page 88 is set to AIM Code ID Character, scan one of the following barcodes to
select an output format when reporting UPC/EAN/JAN barcodes with supplementals:
• Separate - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs but one transmission, i.e.,
]E<0 or 4><data>]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
• Combined – Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with one AIM ID and one transmission, i.e.,
]E3<data+supplemental data>
• Separate Transmissions - Transmit UPC/EAN/JAN with supplementals with separate AIM IDs and separate
transmissions, i.e.,
]E<0 or 4><data>
]E<1 or 2>[supplemental data]
Separate
(0)
* Combined
(1)
Separate Transmissions
(2)
141
Symbologies
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

Parameter # 40
SSI # 28h
The check digit is the last character of the symbol used to verify the integrity of the data. Scan one of the following
barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-A check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the
integrity of the data.
* Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-A Check Digit

(0)
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

Parameter # 41
SSI # 29h
barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-E check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the
* Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E Check Digit

(0)
142
Symbologies
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

Parameter # 42
SSI # 2Ah
barcodes to transmit the barcode data with or without the UPC-E1 check digit. It is always verified to guarantee the
* Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

(1)
Do Not Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit

(0)
143
Symbologies
UPC-A Preamble
Parameter # 34
SSI # 22h
Preamble characters are part of the UPC symbol, and include Country Code and System Character. Select the
appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-A preamble to match the host system:
• Transmit System Character only

• Transmit System Character and Country Code (“0” for USA)
• Transmit no preamble.
No Preamble (<DATA>)
(0)
* System Character
(<SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(1)
System Character & Country Code

(< COUNTRY CODE> <SYSTEM CHARACTER> <DATA>)
(2)
144
Symbologies
UPC-E Preamble
Parameter # 35
SSI # 23h
appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E preamble to match the host system:

(0)
* System Character
(1)

(2)
145
Symbologies
UPC-E1 Preamble
Parameter # 36
SSI # 24h
appropriate option for transmitting a UPC-E1 preamble to match the host system:

(0)
* System Character
(1)

(2)
146
Symbologies
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A

Parameter # 37
SSI # 25h
Enable this to convert UPC-E (zero suppressed) decoded data to UPC-A format before transmission. After
conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections (e.g., Preamble,
Check Digit).
Disable this to transmit UPC-E decoded data as UPC-E data, without conversion.
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Enable)

(1)
* Do Not Convert UPC-E to UPC-A (Disable)

(0)
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A

Parameter # 38
SSI # 26h
Scan Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable) to convert UPC-E1 decoded data to UPC-A format before
transmission. After conversion, the data follows UPC-A format and is affected by UPC-A programming selections
(e.g., Preamble, Check Digit).
Scan Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable) to transmit UPC-E1 decoded data as UPC-E1 data, without
conversion.
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Enable)

(1)
* Do Not Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A (Disable)

(0)
147
Symbologies
EAN/JAN Zero Extend

Parameter # 39
SSI # 27h
Scan Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to add five leading zeros to decoded EAN-8 symbols to make them
compatible in length to EAN-13 symbols. Scan Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend to transmit EAN-8 symbols as is.
Enable EAN/JAN Zero Extend

(1)
* Disable EAN/JAN Zero Extend

(0)
UCC Coupon Extended Code

Parameter # 85
SSI # 55h
Scan Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code to decode UPC-A barcodes starting with digit ‘5’, EAN-13 barcodes
starting with digit ‘99’, and UPC-A/GS1-128 coupon codes. UPC-A, EAN-13, and GS1-128 must be enabled to
use this feature.
NOTE: See UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy on page 140 to control autodiscrimination of the
GS1-128 portion (right half) of a coupon code.
Enable UCC Coupon Extended Code

(1)
* Disable UCC Coupon Extended Code

(0)
148
Symbologies
Coupon Report
Parameter # 730
SSI # F1h DAh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the type of coupon format to support.
• Old Coupon Format - Support UPC-A/GS1-128 and EAN-13/GS1-128.

• New Coupon Format - An interim format to support UPC-A/GS1-DataBar and EAN-13/GS1-DataBar.
• Autodiscriminate Format - Support both Old Coupon Format and New Coupon Format.
Old Coupon Format

(0)
* New Coupon Format

(1)
Autodiscriminate Coupon Format

(2)
149
Symbologies
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone

Parameter # 1289
SSI # F8h 05h 09h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding UPC barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the
margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 204.
Enable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone

(1)
* Disable UPC Reduced Quiet Zone

(0)
Code 128
Parameter # 8
SSI # 08h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 128.
* Enable Code 128

(1)
Disable Code 128

(0)
150
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 128

L1 = Parameter # 209
SSI # D1h
SSI # D2h
The length of a code refers to the number of characters (i.e., human readable characters), including check digit(s)
the code contains. Set lengths for Code 128 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. The default Any Length.
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a length option:
• One Discrete Length - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols with 14
characters, scan Code 128 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change
the selection, scan Cancel on page 426.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Code 128 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Code 128 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4.
To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 426.
• Length Within Range - Decode Code 128 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Code 128 symbols containing between 4
and 12 characters, scan Code 128 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error
or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 426.
• Any Length - Decode Code 128 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
151
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Code 128 (continued)
Code 128 - One Discrete Length
Code 128 - Two Discrete Lengths
Code 128 - Length Within Range
* Code 128 - Any Length
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128)

Parameter # 14
SSI # 0Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1-128.
* Enable GS1-128
(1)
Disable GS1-128
(0)
152
Symbologies
ISBT 128
Parameter # 84
SSI # 54h
ISBT 128 is a variant of Code 128 used in the blood bank industry. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or
disable ISBT 128.
* Enable ISBT 128

(1)
Disable ISBT 128

(0)
ISBT Concatenation
Parameter # 577
SSI # F1h 41h
Select an option for concatenating pairs of ISBT code types:
• Enable ISBT Concatenation - There must be two ISBT codes in order for the scanner to decode and
perform concatenation. The scanner does not decode single ISBT symbols.
• Disable ISBT Concatenation - The scanner does not concatenate pairs of ISBT codes it
encounters. This is the default.
• Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation - The scanner decodes and concatenates pairs of ISBT codes
immediately. If only a single ISBT symbol is present, the scanner must decode the symbol the number of
times set via ISBT Concatenation Redundancy on page 155 before transmitting its data to confirm that
there is no additional ISBT symbol.
When enabling ISBT Concatenation or Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation set Code 128 security
level to Level 2.
153
Symbologies
ISBT Concatenation (continued)
Enable ISBT Concatenation

(1)
* Disable ISBT Concatenation

(0)
Autodiscriminate ISBT Concatenation

(2)
Check ISBT Table

Parameter # 578
SSI # F1h 42h
The ISBT specification includes a table that lists several types of ISBT barcodes that are commonly used in pairs.
If you set ISBT Concatenation to Enable, enable Check ISBT Table to concatenate only those pairs found in this
table. Other types of ISBT codes are not concatenated.
* Enable Check ISBT Table

(1)
Disable Check ISBT Table

(0)
154
Symbologies
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy

Parameter # 223
SSI # DFh
If you set ISBT Concatenation to Autodiscriminate, use this parameter to set the number of times the scanner
must decode an ISBT symbol before determining that there is no additional symbol.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan barcodes in Numeric Barcodes to set a value between 2 and 20. Enter
a leading zero for single digit numbers. To correct an error or change a selection, scan Cancel on page 426. The
default is 10.
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy
Code 128 <FNC4>

Parameter # 1254
SSI # F8h 04h E6h
This feature applies to Code 128 barcodes with an embedded <FNC4> character. Select Ignore Code 128
<FNC4> to strip the <FNC4> character from the decode data. The remaining characters are sent to the host
unchanged. When disabled, the <FNC4> character is processed normally as per Code 128 standard.
* Honor Code 128 <FNC4>

(0)
Ignore Code 128 <FNC4>

(1)
155
Symbologies
Code 128 Security Level

Parameter # 751
SSI # F1h EFh
Code 128 barcodes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when Code 128 Lengths is set to Any Length. The
scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 128 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between
security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so
select only the level of security necessary.
• Code 128 Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient
security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
• Code 128 Security Level 1 - This option eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable
aggressiveness. This is the default.
• Code 128 Security Level 2 - This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level
1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Code 128 Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this
security level to apply the highest safety requirements.
NOTE: Selecting this option is an extreme measure against mis-decoding severely out-of-spec barcodes,
and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to
improve the quality of the barcodes.
Code 128 Security Level 0

(0)
* Code 128 Security Level 1

(1)

(2)

(3)
156
Symbologies
Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone

Parameter # 1208
SSI # F8h 04h B8h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding Code 128 barcodes with reduced quiet zones
(the margins on either side of the barcode). If you select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 204.
Enable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone

(1)
* Disable Code 128 Reduced Quiet Zone

(0)
Code 39
Parameter # 0
SSI # 00h
* Enable Code 39
(1)
Disable Code 39
(0)
157
Symbologies
Trioptic Code 39
Parameter # 13
SSI # 0Dh
Trioptic Code 39 is a variant of Code 39 used in the marking of computer tape cartridges. Trioptic Code 39 symbols
always contain six characters. Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable
Trioptic Code 39.
NOTE: You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
Enable Trioptic Code 39

(1)
* Disable Trioptic Code 39

(0)
Convert Code 39 to Code 32

Parameter # 86
SSI # 56h
Code 32 is a variant of Code 39 used by the Italian pharmaceutical industry. Scan one of the following barcodes to
enable or disable converting Code 39 to Code 32.
NOTE: Code 39 (on page 157) must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(1)
* Disable Convert Code 39 to Code 32

(0)
158
Symbologies
Code 32 Prefix
Parameter # 231
SSI # E7h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable adding the prefix character “A” to all Code 32 barcodes.
NOTE: Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (on page 158) must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Code 32 Prefix

(1)
* Disable Code 32 Prefix

(0)

L1 = Parameter # 18
SSI # 12h
L2 = Parameter # 19
SSI # 13h
range. If Code 39 Full ASCII is enabled, Length Within Range or Any Length are the preferred options. The
default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.
159
Symbologies

characters, scan Code 39 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the
and 12 characters, scan Code 39 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or
change the selection, scan Cancel on page 426.
capability.
* Code 39 - Length Within Range
Code 39 - Any Length
160
Symbologies
Code 39 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 48
SSI # 30h
Scan Enable Code 39 Check Digit to check the integrity of all Code 39 symbols to verify that the data complies
with specified check digit algorithm. Only Code 39 symbols which include a modulo 43 check digit are decoded.
Enable this feature if the Code 39 symbols contain a Modulo 43 check digit.
Enable Code 39 Check Digit

(1)
* Disable Code 39 Check Digit

(0)
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit

Parameter # 43
SSI # 2Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit Code 39 data with or without the check digit.
NOTE: Code 39 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Enable)

(1)
* Do Not Transmit Code 39 Check Digit (Disable)

(0)
161
Symbologies
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion

Parameter # 17
SSI # 11h
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII character set. Scan one
of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII.
NOTE: You cannot enable Trioptic Code 39 and Code 39 Full ASCII simultaneously.
Code 39 Full ASCII to Full ASCII Correlation is host-dependent, and is therefore described in the ASCII
character set table for the appropriate interface. See Table 29 on page 445.
Enable Code 39 Full ASCII

(1)
* Disable Code 39 Full ASCII

(0)
162
Symbologies
Code 39 Security Level

Parameter # 750
SSI # F1h EEh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Code 39 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between
• Code 39 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient
• Code 39 Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• Code 39 Security Level 2: This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1
fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Code 39 Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to
apply the highest safety requirements.
and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try
to improve the quality of the barcodes.

(0)
* Code 39 Security Level 1

(1)

(2)

(3)
163
Symbologies
Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone

Parameter # 1209
SSI # F8h 04h B9h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding Code 39 barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the
Enable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone

(1)
* Disable Code 39 Reduced Quiet Zone

(0)
Code 93
Parameter # 9
SSI # 09h
* Enable Code 93
(1)
Disable Code 93
(0)
164
Symbologies

L1 = Parameter # 26
SSI # 1Ah
L2 = Parameter # 27
SSI # 1Bh
range. The default is Length Within Range: 1 to 55.

capability.
165
Symbologies
166
Symbologies
Code 11
Parameter # 10
SSI # 0Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 11
Enable Code 11
(1)
* Disable Code 11
(0)

L1 = Parameter # 28
SSI # 1Ch
L2 = Parameter # 29
SSI # 1Dh
NOTE: When setting lengths, enter a leading zero for single digit numbers
capability.
167
Symbologies
168
Symbologies
Code 11 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 52
SSI # 34h
This feature allows the scanner to check the integrity of all Code 11 symbols to verify that the data complies with
the specified check digit algorithm.
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the number of check digits encoded in the Code 11 symbols, or to
disable this feature.
* Disable
(0)
One Check Digit

(1)
Two Check Digits

(2)
169
Symbologies
Transmit Code 11 Check Digits

Parameter # 47
SSI # 2Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to transmit the Code 11 check digit(s).
NOTE: Code 11 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Enable)

(1)
* Do Not Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) (Disable)

(0)
Parameter # 6
SSI # 06h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Interleaved 2 of 5.
* Enable Interleaved 2 of 5
(1)
Disable Interleaved 2 of 5
(0)
170
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5

L1 = Parameter # 22
SSI # 16h
L2 = Parameter # 23
SSI # 17h
the code contains. Set lengths for I 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range. The range for Interleaved 2 of 5 lengths is 0 - 80. The default is Length Within Range: 6 to 55.

• One Discrete Length - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters,
scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection,
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing either
2 or 14 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error
• Length Within Range - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the
barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4 and 12
characters, scan I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change
• Any Length - Decode I 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
NOTE: Due to the construction of the I 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
code to transmit as a complete scan, yielding less data than is encoded in the barcode. To prevent this,
select specific lengths (I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for I 2 of 5 applications, or
increase the I 2 of 5 Security Level on page 175.
171
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Interleaved 2 of 5 (continued)
I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
I 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
* I 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
I 2 of 5 - Any Length
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 49
SSI # 31h
Scan one of the following barcodes to check the integrity of all I 2 of 5 symbols to verify the data complies with
either the specified Uniform Symbology Specification (USS), or the Optical Product Code Council (OPCC) check
digit algorithm.
* Disable
(0)
USS Check Digit

(1)
OPCC Check Digit

(2)
172
Symbologies
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 44
SSI # 2Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit I 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Enable)

(1)
* Do Not Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit (Disable)

(0)
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13
Parameter # 82
SSI # 52h
Scan Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable) to convert 14-character I 2 of 5 codes to EAN-13, and transmit to the
host as EAN-13. To accomplish this, the I 2 of 5 code must be enabled, and the code must have a leading zero and
a valid EAN-13 check digit.
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Enable)

(1)
* Do Not Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN-13 (Disable)

(0)
173
Symbologies
Febraban
Parameter # 1750
SSI # F8h 06h D6h
Febraban is an I 2 of 5 barcode of length 44 that requires special check characters to be inserted in the transmitted
data stream. When enabled, the I 2 of 5 internal check digit calculation and transmission is disabled. When
disabled, all I 2 of 5 functionality works as usual.
Recommendations for Length Setting

I 2 of 5 Length 1: Larger of the fixed length and the FEBRABAN length (==44).
I 2 of 5 Length 2: Smaller of the fixed length and the FEBRABAN length (==44).
Enable Febraban
(1)
* Disable Febraban
(0)
174
Symbologies
I 2 of 5 Security Level
Parameter # 1121
SSI # F8h 04h 61h
Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes are vulnerable to misdecodes, particularly when I 2 of 5 Lengths is set to Any Length.
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes. There is an inverse relationship
between security and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of security can reduce scanning
aggressiveness, so select only the level of security necessary.
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 0: The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 1: A barcode must be successfully read twice, and satisfy certain safety
requirements before being decoded. This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 2: This option applies greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1
fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• I 2 of 5 Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this security
level. The highest safety requirements are applied. A barcode must be successfully read three times
before being decoded.
and significantly impairs the decoding ability of the scanner. If this level of security is required, try to
improve the quality of the barcodes.
I 2 of 5 Security Level 0
(0)
* I 2 of 5 Security Level 1
(1)
(2)
(3)
175
Symbologies
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone

Parameter # 1210
SSI # F8h 04h BAh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding I 2 of 5 barcodes with reduced quiet zones (the
Enable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone

(1)
* Disable I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone

(0)
Parameter # 5
SSI # 05h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Discrete 2 of 5.
Enable Discrete 2 of 5
(1)
* Disable Discrete 2 of 5
(0)
176
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5

L1 = Parameter # 20
SSI # 14h
L2 = Parameter # 21
SSI # 15h
the code contains. Set lengths for D 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific

• One Discrete Length - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols with 14 characters,
scan D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection,
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only D 2 of 5 symbols containing either
2 or 14 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an
error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 426.
• Length Within Range - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing between 4
and 12 characters, scan D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or
• Any Length - Decode D 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
177
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Discrete 2 of 5 (continued)
NOTE: Due to the construction of the D 2 of 5 symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
select specific lengths (D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for D 2 of 5 applications.
D 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
D 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
* D 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
D 2 of 5 - Any Length
178
Symbologies
Codabar (NW - 7)
Parameter # 7
SSI # 07h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Codabar.
* Enable Codabar
(1)
Disable Codabar
(0)
Set Lengths for Codabar

L1 = Parameter # 24
SSI # 18h
L2 = Parameter # 25
SSI # 19h
the code contains. Set lengths for Codabar to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific
range.The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.
• One Discrete Length - Decode only Codabar symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols with 14
characters, scan Codabar - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Codabar symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Codabar symbols containing
either 2 or 14 characters, scan Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct
an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 426.
• Length Within Range - Decode Codabar symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using
the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Codabar symbols containing between 4
and 12 characters, scan Codabar - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error
• Any Length - Decode Codabar symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
179
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Codabar (continued)
Codabar - One Discrete Length
Codabar - Two Discrete Lengths
* Codabar - Length Within Range
Codabar - Any Length
180
Symbologies
CLSI Editing
Parameter # 54
SSI # 36h
Scan Enable CLSI Editing to strip the start and stop characters and insert a space after the first, fifth, and tenth
characters of a 14-character Codabar symbol if the host system requires this data format.
NOTE: Symbol length does not include start and stop characters.
Enable CLSI Editing

(1)
* Disable CLSI Editing

(0)
NOTIS Editing
Parameter # 55
SSI # 37h
Scan Enable NOTIS Editing to strip the start and stop characters from a decoded Codabar symbol if the host
system requires this data format.
Enable NOTIS Editing

(1)
* Disable NOTIS Editing

(0)
181
Symbologies
Codabar Security Level

Parameter # 1776
SSI # F8h 06h F0h
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for Codabar barcodes. There is an inverse relationship between
• Codabar Security Level 0: This setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state, while
providing sufficient security in decoding most in-spec barcodes.
• Codabar Security Level 1: This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• Codabar Security Level 2: Select this option with greater barcode security requirements if Security
Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Codabar Security Level 3: If you selected Security Level 2, and misdecodes still occur, select this
security level to apply the highest safety requirements.
Codabar Security Level 0

(0)
* Codabar Security Level 1

(1)

(2)

(3)
182
Symbologies
Codabar Upper or Lower Case Start/Stop Characters

Parameter # 855
SSI # F2h 57h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit upper case or lower case Codabar start/stop
characters.
Lower Case
(1)
* Upper Case
(0)
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification

Parameter # 1784
SSI # F8h 06h F8h
Enable this feature to check the Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit to verify that the data complies with the specified
check digit algorithm.
Enable Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit

(1)
* Disable Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit

(0)
183
Symbologies
Transmit Codabar Check Digit

Parameter # 704
SSI # F1h C0h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether or not to transmit the Codabar check digit(s).
NOTE: Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit Verification must be enabled for this parameter to function.
Enable Codabar Check Digit Transmission

(1)
* Disable Codabar Check Digit Transmission

(0)
MSI
Parameter # 11
SSI # 0Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MSI.
Enable MSI
(1)
* Disable MSI
(0)
184
Symbologies
Set Lengths for MSI

L1 = Parameter # 30
SSI # 1Eh
L2 = Parameter # 31
SSI # 1Fh
the code contains. Set lengths for MSI to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a specific range.
The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.

• One Discrete Length - Decode only MSI symbols containing a selected length. Select the length using the
barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols with 14 characters, scan MSI -
One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on
page 426.
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only MSI symbols containing either of two lengths. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only MSI symbols containing either 2
or 14 characters, scan MSI - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1, 4. To correct an error or
• Length Within Range - Decode MSI symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths using the
barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode MSI symbols containing between 4 and 12
characters, scan MSI - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To correct an error or change
• Any Length - Decode MSI symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s capability.
185
Symbologies
Set Lengths for MSI (continued)
NOTE: Due to the construction of the MSI symbology, it is possible for a scan line covering only a portion of the
select specific lengths (MSI - One Discrete Length, Two Discrete Lengths) for MSI applications.
MSI - One Discrete Length
MSI - Two Discrete Lengths
* MSI - Length Within Range
MSI - Any Length
186
Symbologies
MSI Check Digits

Parameter # 50
SSI # 32h
With MSI symbols, one check digit is mandatory and always verified by the reader. The second check digit is
optional. If the MSI codes include two check digits, scan the Two MSI Check Digits barcode to enable verification
of the second check digit.
See MSI Check Digit Algorithm on page 189 to select second digit algorithms.
No MSI Check Digit

(0)
* One MSI Check Digit

(1)
Two MSI Check Digits

(2)
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s)

Parameter # 46
SSI # 2Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit MSI data with or without the check digit.
187
Symbologies
Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Enable)

(1)
* Do Not Transmit MSI Check Digit(s) (Disable)

(0)
188
Symbologies
MSI Check Digit Algorithm

Parameter # 51
SSI # 33h
Two algorithms are available for verifying the second MSI check digit. Scan one of the following barcodes to select
the algorithm used to encode the check digit.
MOD 11/MOD 10
(0)
* MOD 10/MOD 10
(1)
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone

Parameter # 1392
SSI # F8h 05h 70h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable decoding MSI barcodes with reduced quiet zones. If you
select Enable, select a 1D Quiet Zone Level on page 204.
* Disable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone

(0)
Enable MSI Reduced Quiet Zone

(1)
189
Symbologies
Chinese 2 of 5
Parameter # 408
SSI # F0h 98h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Chinese 2 of 5.
Enable Chinese 2 of 5
(1)
* Disable Chinese 2 of 5
(0)
Matrix 2 of 5
Parameter # 618
SSI # F1h 6Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Matrix 2 of 5.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5
(1)
* Disable Matrix 2 of 5
(0)
190
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5

SSI # F1h 6Bh
SSI # F1h 6Ch
the code contains. Set lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 to any length, one or two discrete lengths, or lengths within a
specific range. The default is Length Within Range: 4 to 55.

• One Discrete Length - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the length
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with 14
characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, and then scan 1, 4. To correct an error or change
• Two Discrete Lengths - Decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing either of two lengths. Select
lengths using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode only Matrix 2 of 5 symbols
containing either 2 or 14 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths, and then scan 0, 2, 1,
4. To correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 426.
• Length Within Range - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols with a specific length range. Select lengths
using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes. For example, to decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing
between 4 and 12 characters, scan Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range, and then scan 0, 4, 1, 2. To
correct an error or change the selection, scan Cancel on page 426.
• Any Length - Decode Matrix 2 of 5 symbols containing any number of characters within the scanner’s
capability.
191
Symbologies
Set Lengths for Matrix 2 of 5 (continued)
Matrix 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length
Matrix 2 of 5 - Two Discrete Lengths
* Matrix 2 of 5 - Length Within Range
Matrix 2 of 5 - Any Length
192
Symbologies
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 622
SSI # F1h 6Eh
barcodes to determine whether to include the Matrix 2 of 5 check digit with the barcode data.
Enable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(1)
* Disable Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(0)
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

Parameter # 623
SSI # F1h 6Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to transmit Matrix 2 of 5 data with or without the check digit.
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(1)
* Do Not Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit

(0)
193
Symbologies
Korean 3 of 5
Parameter # 581
SSI # F1h 45h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Korean 3 of 5.
NOTE: The length for Korean 3 of 5 is fixed at 6.
Enable Korean 3 of 5
(1)
* Disable Korean 3 of 5
(0)
Inverse 1D
Parameter # 586
SSI # F1h 4Ah
NOTE: The Inverse 1D setting may impact Composite or Inverse Composite decoding. See Composite Inverse
on page 206.
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the 1D inverse decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular 1D barcodes only.

• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse 1D barcodes only.
• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse 1D barcodes.
194
Symbologies
Inverse 1D (continued)
* Regular
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Inverse Autodetect
(2)
195
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar
The variants of GS1 DataBar are GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked,
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional, DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked and DataBar
Limited. The limited and expanded versions have stacked variants. Scan the appropriate barcodes to enable or
disable each variant of GS1 DataBar.
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1 DataBar

Truncated, GS1 DataBar Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
Parameter # 338
SSI # F0h 52h
NOTE: When GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional is enabled the variants are also enabled.
* Enable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional

(0)
196
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Limited

Parameter # 339
SSI # F0h 53h
* Enable GS1 DataBar Limited

(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Limited

(0)
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
Parameter # 340
SSI # F0h 54h
NOTE: When GS1 DataBar Expanded is enabled GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked is also enabled.
* Enable GS1 DataBar Expanded

(1)
Disable GS1 DataBar Expanded

(0)
197
Symbologies
Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN

Parameter # 397
SSI # F0h, 8Dh
This parameter only applies to GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited symbols not decoded as
part of a Composite symbol. Scan Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN to strip the leading '010' from
DataBar-14 and DataBar Limited symbols encoding a single zero as the first digit, and report the barcode as
EAN-13.
For barcodes beginning with between two and five zeros, this strips the leading '0100' and reports the barcode as
UPC-A. The UPC-A Preamble option that transmits the system character and country code applies to converted
barcodes. Note that neither the system character nor the check digit can be stripped.
Enable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN

(1)
* Disable Convert GS1 DataBar to UPC/EAN/JAN

(0)
198
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Security Level

Parameter # 1706
SSI # F8h 06h AAh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar (GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional, GS1 DataBar
Limited, GS1 DataBar Expanded) barcodes.
• Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security
decoding most in-spec barcodes.
• Security Level 1 - This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable aggressiveness.
• Security Level 2 - Select this option with greater barcode security requirements if Security Level 1 fails to
eliminate misdecodes.
• Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level to
apply the highest safety requirements.
GS1 DataBar Security Level 0

(0)
* GS1 DataBar Security Level 1

(1)

(2)

(3)
199
Symbologies
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check

Parameter # 728
SSI # F1h D8h
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for GS1 DataBar Limited barcodes. There is an inverse
relationship between the level of margin check and scanner aggressiveness. Increasing the level of margin check
can reduce scanning aggressiveness, so select only the level of margin check necessary.
• Margin Check Level 1 – No clear margin required. This complies with the original GS1 standard, yet can
result in erroneous decoding of a DataBar Limited barcode when scanning some UPC symbols that start
with digits 9 and 7.
• Margin Check Level 2 – Automatic risk detection. This level of margin check can result in erroneous
decoding of DataBar Limited barcodes when scanning some UPC symbols. If a misdecode is detected, the
scanner operates in Level 3 or Level 1.
• Margin Check Level 3 – Margin check level reflects the newly proposed GS1 standard that requires a five
times trailing clear margin.
• Margin Check Level 4 – Security level extends beyond the standard required by GS1. This level of margin
check requires a five times leading and trailing clear margin.
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 1

(1)

(2)
* GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check Level 3

(3)

(4)
200
Symbologies

Redundancy Level
Parameter # 78
SSI # 4Eh
The scanner offers four levels of decode redundancy. Select higher redundancy levels for decreasing levels of
barcode quality. As redundancy levels increase, the scanner’s aggressiveness decreases.
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the redundancy level appropriate for the barcode quality:
• Redundancy Level 1 - The scanner must read the following code types twice before decoding:
• Codabar (8 characters or less)
• MSI (4 characters or less)
• D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
• I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
• Redundancy Level 2 - The scanner must read all code types twice before decoding.
• Redundancy Level 3 - The scanner must read code types other than the following twice before decoding,
but must read the following codes three times:
• Codabar (8 characters or less)
• MSI (4 characters or less)
• D 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
• I 2 of 5 (8 characters or less)
• Redundancy Level 4 - The scanner must read all code types three times before decoding.
201
Symbologies
Redundancy Level (continued)
* Redundancy Level 1
(1)
Redundancy Level 2
(2)
Redundancy Level 3
(3)
Redundancy Level 4
(4)
202
Symbologies
Security Level
Parameter # 77
SSI # 4Dh
The scanner offers four levels of decode security for delta barcodes, which include the Code 128 family,
UPC/EAN/JAN, and Code 93. Select increasing levels of security for decreasing levels of barcode quality. There is
an inverse relationship between security and scanner aggressiveness, so choose only that level of security
necessary for the application.
• Security Level 0 - The scanner operates in its most aggressive state, while providing sufficient security
decoding most in-spec barcodes.
• Security Level 1 - This default setting eliminates most misdecodes.
• Security Level 2 - Select this option if Security Level 1 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
• Security Level 3 - If you selected Security Level 2 and misdecodes still occur, select this security level.
Security Level 0
(0)
* Security Level 1
(1)
Security Level 2
(2)
Security Level 3
(3)
203
Symbologies
1D Quiet Zone Level

Parameter # 1288
SSI # F8h 05h 08h
This feature sets the level of aggressiveness when decoding barcodes with a reduced quiet zone (the margin on
either side of a barcode), and applies to symbologies enabled by a Reduced Quiet Zone parameter. Because
higher levels increase the decoding time and risk of misdecodes, Zebra strongly recommends enabling only the
symbologies which require higher quiet zone levels, and leaving Reduced Quiet Zone disabled for all other
symbologies. Options are:
• 1D Quiet Zone Level 0 - The scanner performs normally in terms of quiet zone.
• 1D Quiet Zone Level 1 - The scanner performs more aggressively in terms of quiet zone.
• 1D Quiet Zone Level 2 - The scanner only requires a quiet zone at the end of barcode for decoding.
• 1D Quiet Zone Level 3 - The scanner decodes anything in terms of quiet zone or end of barcode.
1D Quiet Zone Level 0

(0)
* 1D Quiet Zone Level 1

(1)

(2)

(3)
204
Symbologies
Intercharacter Gap Size

Parameter # 381
SSI # F0h, 7Dh
The Code 39 and Codabar symbologies have an intercharacter gap that is ly quite small. Due to various barcode
printing technologies, this gap can grow larger than the maximum size allowed, preventing the scanner from
decoding the symbol. If this problem occurs, scan the Large Intercharacter Gaps parameter to tolerate these
out-of-specification barcodes.
* Normal Intercharacter Gaps

(6)
Large Intercharacter Gaps

(10)
Composite
Composite CC-C
Parameter # 341
SSI # F0h 55h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type CC-C.
Enable CC-C
(1)
* Disable CC-C
(0)
205
Symbologies
Composite CC-A/B
Parameter # 342
SSI # F0h 56h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type CC-A/B.
Enable CC-A/B
(1)
* Disable CC-A/B
(0)
Composite TLC-39
Parameter # 371
SSI # F0h 73h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Composite barcodes of type TLC-39.
Enable TLC39
(1)
* Disable TLC39
(0)
Composite Inverse
Parameter # 1113
SSI # F8h 04h 59h
Select an option to set Composite for either regular decode or inverse decode. This mode only supports Composite
Inverse that includes DataBar combined with CCAB, and does not support other 1D/2D combinations.
For this parameter to function, first enable Composite CC-A/B on page 206.
206
Symbologies
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Composite barcodes only. Before selecting this, set Inverse
1D on page 194 to Regular Only or Inverse Autodetect.
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Composite barcodes only. Before selecting this, set Inverse
1D on page 194 to Inverse Only or Inverse Autodetect.
* Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
207
Symbologies
UPC Composite Mode

Parameter # 344
SSI # F0h 58h
Select an option for linking UPC symbols with a 2D symbol during transmission as if they were one symbol:
• UPC Never Linked - Transmit UPC barcodes regardless of whether a 2D symbol is detected.
• UPC Always Linked - Transmit UPC barcodes and the 2D portion. If 2D is not present, do not transmit the
barcode.
• Autodiscriminate UPC Composites - The scanner determines if there is a 2D portion, then transmits the
UPC, as well as the 2D portion if present.
* UPC Never Linked

(0)
UPC Always Linked

(1)
Autodiscriminate UPC Composites

(2)
208
Symbologies
Composite Beep Mode

Parameter # 398
SSI # F0h, 8Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the number of decode beeps that sound upon decoding a Composite
barcode.
Single Beep After Both are Decoded

(0)
* Beep as Each Code Type is Decoded

(1)
Double Beep After Both are Decoded

(2)
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for UCC/EAN Composite Codes

Parameter # 427
SSI # F0h, ABh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable this mode.
Enable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for

UCC/EAN Composite Codes
(1)
* Disable GS1-128 Emulation Mode for

(0)
209
Symbologies
2D Symbologies
PDF417
Parameter # 15
SSI # 0Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable PDF417.
* Enable PDF417
(1)
Disable PDF417
(0)
MicroPDF417
Parameter # 227
SSI # E3h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MicroPDF417.
Enable MicroPDF417
(1)
* Disable MicroPDF417
(0)
210
Symbologies
Code 128 Emulation

Parameter # 123
SSI # 7Bh
Enable this parameter to transmit data from certain MicroPDF417 symbols as Code 128. You must enable AIM
Code ID Character (1) on page 88 for this parameter to work.
NOTE: Linked MicroPDF codewords 906, 907, 912, 914, and 915 are not supported. Use GS1 Composites
instead.
Enable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]C1 if the first codeword is 903-905
]C2 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]C0 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Disable Code 128 Emulation to transmit these MicroPDF417 symbols with one of the following prefixes:
]L3 if the first codeword is 903-905
]L4 if the first codeword is 908 or 909
]L5 if the first codeword is 910 or 911
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Code 128 Emulation.
Enable Code 128 Emulation

(1)
* Disable Code 128 Emulation

(0)
211
Symbologies
Data Matrix
Parameter # 292
SSI # F0h, 24h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Data Matrix.
* Enable Data Matrix

(1)
Disable Data Matrix

(0)
GS1 Data Matrix

Parameter # 1336
SSI # F8h 05h 38h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1 Data Matrix.
Enable GS1 Data Matrix

(1)
* Disable GS1 Data Matrix

(0)
212
Symbologies
Data Matrix Inverse

Parameter # 588
SSI # F1h 4Ch
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the Data Matrix inverse decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Data Matrix barcodes only.
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Data Matrix barcodes only.
• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Data Matrix barcodes.
Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
* Inverse Autodetect
(2)
213
Symbologies
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images

Parameter # 537
SSI # F1h 19h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select an option for decoding mirror image Data Matrix barcodes:
• Never - Do not decode Data Matrix barcodes that are mirror images.
• Always - Decode only Data Matrix barcodes that are mirror images.
• Auto - Decode both mirrored and unmirrored Data Matrix barcodes.
Never
(0)
Always
(1)
* Auto
(2)
214
Symbologies
Maxicode
Parameter # 294
SSI # F0h, 26h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Maxicode.
Enable Maxicode
(1)
* Disable Maxicode
(0)
QR Code
Parameter # 293
SSI # F0h, 25h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable QR Code.
NOTE: Inverse QR barcodes decode if QR Code is enabled.
* Enable QR Code
(1)
Disable QR Code
(0)
215
Symbologies
GS1 QR
Parameter # 1343
SSI # F8h 05h 3Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable GS1 QR.
* Enable GS1 QR
(1)
Disable GS1 QR
(0)
MicroQR
Parameter # 573
SSI # F1h 3Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MicroQR.
* Enable MicroQR
(1)
Disable MicroQR
(0)
216
Symbologies
Linked QR Mode
Parameter # 1847
SSI # 737h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a linked QR mode.
• Linked QR Only - Does not decode individual QRs from a set of linked QR codes.
• Individual QR With Headers - Decodes individual QRs from a set of linked QR codes and keeps the
header information and data.
• Individual QR No Headers - Decodes individual QRs from a set of linked QR codes and just transmits
data without header information.
* Linked QR Only
(0)
Individual QR With Headers

(1)
Individual QR No Headers
(2)
217
Symbologies
Aztec
Parameter # 574
SSI # F1h 3Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Aztec.
NOTE: Enabling Aztec also enables Linked Aztec.
* Enable Aztec
(1)
Disable Aztec
(0)
Aztec Inverse
Parameter # 589
SSI # F1h 4Dh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the Aztec inverse decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Aztec barcodes only.
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Aztec barcodes only.
• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Aztec barcodes.
Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
(2)
218
Symbologies
Han Xin
Parameter # 1167
SSI # F8h 04h 8Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Han Xin.
Enable Han Xin

(1)
* Disable Han Xin

(0)
Han Xin Inverse

Parameter # 1168
SSI # F8h 04h 90h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Han Xin inverse decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin barcodes with normal reflectance only.
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes Han Xin barcodes with inverse reflectance only.
• Inverse Autodetect - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Han Xin barcodes.
* Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Inverse Autodetect
(2)
219
Symbologies
Grid Matrix
Parameter # 1718
SSI # F8h 06h B6h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Grid Matrix.
Enable
(1)
* Disable
(0)
Grid Matrix Inverse

Parameter # 1719
SSI # F8h 06h B7h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Grid Matrix inverse decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Grid Matrix barcodes only.
• Inverse Only - The scanner decodes inverse Grid Matrix barcodes only.
• Autodiscriminate - The scanner decodes both regular and inverse Grid Matrix barcodes.
* Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Autodiscriminate
(2)
220
Symbologies
Grid Matrix Mirror

Parameter # 1736
SSI # F8h 06h C8h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a Grid Matrix mirror decoder setting:
• Regular Only - The scanner decodes regular Grid Matrix barcodes only.
• Mirrored Only - The scanner decodes mirrored Grid Matrix barcodes only.
• Auto-discriminate - The scanner decodes both regular and mirrored Grid Matrix barcodes.
* Regular Only
(0)
Mirrored Only
(1)
Autodiscriminate
(2)
221
Symbologies
DotCode
Parameter # 1906
SSI # F8 07 72h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable DotCode.
* Disable DotCode
(0)
Enable DotCode
(1)
222
Symbologies
DotCode Inverse
Parameter # 1907
SSI # F8 07 73h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DotCode Inverse decoder setting. Setting options are:
• Regular Only - Decoder decodes DotCode barcodes with normal reflectance only.
• Inverse Only - Decoder decodes DotCode barcodes with inverse reflectance only.
• Inverse Autodetect - Decoder decodes both regular and inverse DotCode barcodes.
Regular
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
(2)
223
Symbologies
DotCode Mirrored
Parameter # 1908
SSI # F8 07 74h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a DotCode Mirror decoder setting:
• Non-Mirrored Only - Digital scanner decodes non-mirrored DotCode barcodes only.

• Mirrored Only - Digital scanner decodes mirrored DotCode barcodes only.
• Autodetect - Digital scanner decodes both mirrored and non-mirrored DotCode barcodes.
Never
(0)
Always
(1)
* Autodetect
(2)
224
Symbologies
DotCode Prioritize
Parameter # 1937
SSI # F8 07 91h
Enable DotCode Prioritize to give priority to DotCode decoding as compared to other symbologies.
Disable
(0)
* Enable
(1)
Macro PDF Features

Macro PDF is a special feature for concatenating multiple PDF symbols into one file. The scanner can decode
symbols encoded with this feature, and can store more than 64 Kb of decoded data from up to 50 MacroPDF
symbols.
CAUTION:When printing, keep each Macro PDF sequence separate, as each sequence has unique identifiers.
Do not mix barcodes from several Macro PDF sequences, even if they encode the same data. When
scanning a Macro PDF sequence, scan the entire sequence without interruption. When scanning a
mixed sequence, two long low beeps (low / low) indicate an inconsistent file ID or inconsistent
symbology error.
225
Symbologies
Flush Macro Buffer

Scan the following barcode to flush the buffer of all decoded Macro PDF data stored to that point, transmit it to the
host device, and abort from Macro PDF mode.
Flush Macro PDF Buffer
Abort Macro PDF Entry

Scan the following barcode to clear all currently-stored Macro PDF data in the buffer without transmission and
abort from Macro PDF mode.
Abort Macro PDF Entry
Postal Codes
US Postnet
Parameter # 89
SSI # 59h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Postnet.
Enable US Postnet
(1)
* Disable US Postnet
(0)
226
Symbologies
US Planet
Parameter # 90
SSI # 5Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Planet.
Enable US Planet
(1)
* Disable US Planet
(0)
Transmit US Postal Check Digit

Parameter # 95
SSI # 5Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit US Postal data, which includes both US Postnet
and US Planet, with or without the check digit.
* Transmit US Postal Check Digit

(1)
Do Not Transmit US Postal Check Digit

(0)
227
Symbologies
UK Postal
Parameter # 91
SSI # 5Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UK Postal.
Enable UK Postal
(1)
* Disable UK Postal
(0)
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit

Parameter # 96
SSI # 60h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit UK Postal data with or without the check digit.
* Transmit UK Postal
Check Digit
(1)
Do Not Transmit UK Postal Check Digit

(0)
228
Symbologies
Japan Postal
Parameter # 290
SSI # F0h, 22h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Japan Postal.
Enable Japan Postal

(1)
* Disable Japan Postal

(0)
Australia Post
Parameter # 291
SSI # F0h, 23h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Australia Post.
Enable Australia Post

(1)
* Disable Australia Post

(0)
229
Symbologies
Australia Post Format

Parameter # 718
SSI # F1h, CEh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select a format for Australia Post:
• Autodiscriminate (or Smart mode) - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N and C Encoding
Tables.
NOTE: This option increases the risk of misdecodes because the encoded data format does not specify
the Encoding Table used for encoding.
• Raw Format - Output raw bar patterns as a series of numbers 0 through 3.

• Alphanumeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the C Encoding Table.
• Numeric Encoding - Decode the Customer Information Field using the N Encoding Table.
For more information on Australia Post Encoding Tables, refer to the Australia Post Customer Barcoding Technical
Specifications available at auspost.com.au.
* Autodiscriminate
(0)
Raw Format
(1)
Alphanumeric Encoding
(2)
Numeric Encoding
(3)
230
Symbologies
Netherlands KIX Code

Parameter # 326
SSI # F0h, 46h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Netherlands KIX Code.
Enable Netherlands KIX Code

(1)
* Disable Netherlands KIX Code

(0)
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

Parameter # 592
SSI # F1h 50h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail.
Enable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

(1)
* Disable USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail

(0)
231
Symbologies
UPU FICS Postal

Parameter # 611
SSI # F1h 63h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable UPU FICS Postal.
Enable UPU FICS Postal

(1)
* Disable UPU FICS Postal

(0)
Mailmark
Parameter # 1337
SSI # F8h 05h 39h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Mailmark.
* Disable Mailmark
(0)
Enable Mailmark
(1)
232
USB Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with a USB host. The scanner connects directly to a USB host, or
a powered USB hub, which powers it. No additional power supply is required.
Setting Parameters
To return all features to default values, scan Set Factory Defaults on page 62. Throughout the programming
* Enable Parameter

In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the USB keystroke delay to
medium, scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) barcode under USB Keystroke Delay on page 239. The scanner
issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

233
USB Interface
Connecting a USB Interface

Figure 19 USB Connection
Interface Cable
USB Connector
NOTE: When connecting via USB use the shielded connector cable (e.g., p/n CBA-U21-S07ZBR). Refer to
Solution Builder for guidance about cables.
For information about cables and cable compatibility, go to the Zebra Partner Portal at:
https://partnerportal.zebra.com/PartnerPortal/product_services/downloads_z/barcode_scanners/Univer
sal-Cable-Guide-Bar-Code-Scanners.xlsx.
The scanner connects to USB-capable hosts including:
• TGCS (IBM) terminals

• Apple ™ desktop and notebooks
• Other network computers that support more than one keyboard.
The following operating systems support the scanner through USB:
• Windows® XP, 7, 8, 10
• MacOS 8.5 - MacOS 10.6
• IBM 4690 OS
• Linux.
The scanner also interfaces with other USB hosts that support USB Human Interface Devices (HID).
To set up the scanner:
1. Connect the modular connector of the USB interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See
Inserting the Interface Cable on page 31.
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors illustrated in Figure 19 are examples
only. The connectors may be different than those illustrated, but the steps to connect the scanner are
the same.
234
USB Interface
2. Plug the series A connector in the USB host or hub, or plug the PowerPlus connector in an available port of the
IBM SurePOS terminal.
3. The scanner automatically detects the host and uses the default USB device type. If the default (*) does not
meet your requirements, select another USB device type by scanning the appropriate barcode from USB
Device Type on page 237.
4. On first installation when using Windows, the software may prompt to select or install the Human Interface
Device driver. To install this driver, provided by Windows, click Next at all choices and click Finished on the
last choice. The scanner powers up during this installation.
5. To modify any other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this chapter.
If problems occur with the system, see Troubleshooting on page 51.
USB Parameter Defaults

Table 13 lists defaults for USB host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
parameters.
Table 13 USB Interface Parameter Defaults

Parameter Default Page Number
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type USB Keyboard HID 237
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking Enable 239
USB Keystroke Delay No Delay 239
USB Caps Lock Override Disable 240
Barcodes with Unknown Characters Send Barcodes with Unknown 240

Characters
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 241
USB Fast HID Enable 241
USB Polling Interval 3 msec 242
Keypad Emulation Enable 244
Quick Keypad Emulation Enable 244
Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero Enable 245
USB FN1 Substitution Disable 245
Function Key Mapping Disable 246
235
USB Interface
Table 13 USB Interface Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Simulated Caps Lock Disable 246
Convert Case None 247
USB Static CDC Enable 248
CDC Beep on <BEL> Enable 248
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive Ignore 248
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive Ignore 249
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version Version 2.2 249
236
USB Interface
USB Host Parameters

USB Device Type
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the USB device type. To select a country keyboard type for the USB
Keyboard HID host, see Country Codes.
NOTES:
• When changing USB Device Types, the scanner resets and issues the standard startup beep
sequences.
• When connecting two scanners to a host, IBM does not allow selecting two of the same device type. If
you require two connections, select IBM Table-top USB for one scanner and IBM Hand-held USB for the
second scanner.
• Select IBM Hand-held USB to disable data transmission when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable
command. Aim, illumination, and decoding is still permitted. Select IBM OPOS (IBM Hand-held USB
with Full Scan Disable) to completely shut off the scanner when an IBM register issues a Scan Disable
command, including aim, illumination, decoding, and data transmission.
• To select the Toshiba TEC device type, refer to the Toshiba TEC Programmer’s Guide.
* USB Keyboard HID
IBM Table-top USB
IBM Hand-held USB
IBM OPOS
(IBM Hand-held USB with Full Scan Disable)
237
USB Interface
USB Device Type (continued)
NOTES:
• Before selecting USB CDC Host on page 238 or SSI over USB CDC on page 238, install the appropriate
USB CDC Driver on the host to ensure the scanner does not stall during power up (due to a failure to
enumerate USB). Go to zebra.com/support, Support & Downloads > Barcode Scanners > USB CDC
Driver, select the appropriate Windows platform, and download the appropriate CDC Driver (64 bit or 32 bit).
To recover a stalled scanner:
Install the USB CDC Driver
or
After power-up, hold the trigger for 10 seconds, which allows the scanner to power up using an alternate
USB configuration. Upon power-up, scan another USB Device Type.
• Select USB HID POS to communicate over a USB cable with Universal Windows Platform (UWP)
applications running on Windows 10 devices.
USB CDC Host
SSI over USB CDC
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging Interface
USB HID POS

(for Windows 10 devices only)
238
USB Interface
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status Handshaking

After selecting a SNAPI interface as the USB device type, scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to
enable or disable status handshaking.
* Enable SNAPI Status Handshaking
Disable SNAPI Status Handshaking
USB Keystroke Delay

Scan one of the following barcodes to set the delay, in milliseconds, between emulated keystrokes. Select a longer
delay for hosts that require slower data transmission.
* No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
239
USB Interface
USB Caps Lock Override

This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device. Scan Override Caps Lock Key to preserve the case of
the data regardless of the state of the Caps Lock key. This setting is always enabled for the Japanese Windows
(ASCII) keyboard type and can not be disabled.
Override Caps Lock Key

(Enable)
* Do Not Override Caps Lock Key

(Disable)
Barcodes with Unknown Characters

This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID and IBM devices. Unknown characters are characters the host
does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send all barcode data except for
unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.
Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters for IBM devices to prevent sending barcodes
containing at least one unknown character to the host, or for USB Keyboard HID devices to send the barcode
characters up to the unknown character. The scanner issues an error beep.
* Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
240
USB Interface
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39

This option applies only to the IBM hand-held, IBM table-top, and OPOS devices. Scan one of the following
barcodes to enable or disable converting unknown barcode type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
* Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
USB Fast HID

Scan Enable USB Fast HID to transmit USB HID data at a faster rate.
NOTE: Disable USB Fast HID if there are problems with transmission.
* Enable USB Fast HID
Disable USB Fast HID
241
USB Interface
USB Polling Interval

Scan one of the following barcodes to set the polling interval, which is the rate at which data transmits between the
scanner and host computer. A lower number indicates a faster data rate.
NOTE: When changing the USB polling interval, the scanner restarts and issues a power-up beep sequence.
IMPORTANT: Ensure the host supports the selected data rate.
1 msec
2 msec
* 3 msec
4 msec
5 msec
242
USB Interface
USB Polling Interval (continued)
6 msec
7 msec
8 msec
9 msec
243
USB Interface
Keypad Emulation
Scan Enable Keypad Emulation to send all characters as ASCII sequences over the numeric keypad.
For example, ASCII A transmits as “ALT make” 0 6 5 “ALT Break”.
NOTE: If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see Country Codes), disable Quick Keypad
Emulation and enable Keypad Emulation below.
* Enable Keypad Emulation
Disable Keypad Emulation
Quick Keypad Emulation

This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device when Keypad Emulation is enabled. Scan Enable Quick
Keypad Emulation for a quicker method of emulation using the numeric keypad where ASCII sequences are only
sent for ASCII characters not found on the keyboard.
* Enable Quick Keypad Emulation
Disable Quick Keypad Emulation
244
USB Interface
Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero

Scan Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero to send character sequences sent over the numeric keypad
as ISO characters which have a leading zero. For example, ASCII A transmits as “ALT MAKE” 0 0 6 5 “ALT
BREAK”.
* Enable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
Disable Keypad Emulation with Leading Zero
USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution

This option applies only to the USB Keyboard HID device. Scan Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution to
replace any FN1 character in a GS1 128 barcode with a user-selected Key Category and value.
See FN1 Substitution Values on page 92 to set the Key Category and Key Value.
Enable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
* Disable USB Keyboard FN1 Substitution
245
USB Interface
Function Key Mapping

ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as a control-key sequence (see Table 29 on page 445). Scan Enable
Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not
have a bold equivalent remain the same regardless of whether you enable this parameter.
Enable Function Key Mapping
* Disable Function Key Mapping
Simulated Caps Lock

Scan Enable Simulated Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the barcode as if the Caps Lock
state is enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state.
NOTES: - Simulated Caps Lock applies to ASCII characters only.

- Do not enable this parameter if any of the following parameters are enabled:
USB Caps Lock Override on page 240
Convert All to Upper Case on page 247
Convert All to Lower Case on page 247
Enable Simulated Caps Lock
* Disable Simulated Caps Lock
246
USB Interface
Convert Case
Scan one of the following barcodes to convert all barcode data to the selected case.
NOTE: Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.
* No Case Conversion
Convert All to Upper Case
Convert All to Lower Case
247
USB Interface
USB Static CDC

When disabled, each device connected consumes another COM port (first device = COM1,
second device = COM2, third device = COM3, etc.)
When enabled, each device connects to the same COM port.
* Enable USB Static CDC
Disable USB Static CDC
CDC Beep on <BEL>

If you enable this parameter, the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character in USB CDC
communications. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
* Enable CDC Beep on <BEL>
Disable CDC Beep on <BEL>
248
USB Interface
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive

The host can send a beep configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to prevent the
scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were
processed.
Honor Beep Directive
* Ignore Beep Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode Configuration Directive

The host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive to prevent the
scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the USB host as if they were
processed.
Honor Barcode Configuration Directive
* Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification Version

Select IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original) to send the following code types as Unknown:
• Data Matrix
• GS1 Data Matrix
• QR Code
• GS1 QR
• MicroQR Code
• Aztec
249
USB Interface
Select IBM Specification Level Version 2.2 to send the code types with the appropriate IBM identifiers.
IBM Specification Level Version 0 (Original)
* IBM Specification Level Version 2.2

See ASCII Character Sets for the following information:
• ASCII Character Set, Table 29 on page 445

• ALT Key Character Set, Table 30 on page 450
• GUI Key Character Set, Table 31 on page 451
• PF Key Character Set, Table 32 on page 452
• F Key Character Set, Table 33 on page 453
• Numeric Key Character Set, Table 34 on page 453
• Extended Key Character Set, Table 35 on page 454
250
SSI Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes the system requirements of the Simple Serial Interface (SSI), which provides a
communications link between Zebra decoders (e.g., scan engines, slot scanners, hand-held scanners,
two-dimensional scanners, Hands-free scanners, and RF base stations) and a serial host. It provides the means
for the host to control the decoder or scanner.
Communication
All communication between the scanner and host occurs over the hardware interface lines using the SSI protocol.
Refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer’s Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx, for more information on SSI.
The host and the scanner exchange messages in packets. A packet is a collection of bytes framed by the proper
SSI protocol formatting bytes. The maximum number of bytes per packet that the SSI protocol allows for any
transaction is 257 (255 bytes + 2 byte checksum).
Depending on the configuration, the scanner can send decode data as ASCII data (unpacketed), or as part of a
larger message (packeted).
SSI performs the following functions for the host device:
• Maintains a bi-directional interface with the scanner

• Allows the host to send commands that control the scanner
• Passes data from the scanner to a host device in SSI packet format or straight decode message.
The SSI environment consists of a scanner, a serial cable which attaches to the host device, and if required, a
power supply.
SSI transmits all decode data including special formatting (e.g., AIM ID). Parameter settings can control the format
of the transmitted data.
The scanner can also send parameter information, product identification information, or event codes to the host.
All commands sent between the scanner and host must use the format described in the SSI Message Formats
section. SSI Transactions on page 253 describes the required sequence of messages in specific cases.
251
SSI Interface
SSI Commands
Table 14 lists all the SSI opcodes the scanner supports. The host transmits opcodes designated type H. The
scanner (decoder) transmits type D opcodes, and either can transmit Host/Decoder (H/D) types.
Table 14 SSI Commands

Name Type Opcode Description
AIM_OFF H 0xC4 Deactivate aim pattern.
AIM_ON H 0xC5 Activate aim pattern.
BEEP H 0xE6 Sound the beeper.
CAPABILITIES_REPLY D 0xD4 Reply to CAPABILITIES_REQUEST; contains a list of the

capabilities and commands the decoder supports.
CAPABILITIES_REQUEST H 0xD3 Request capabilities report from the decoder.
CMD_ACK H/D 0xD0 Positive acknowledgment of received packet.
CMD_NAK H/D 0xD1 Negative acknowledgment of received packet.
DECODE_DATA D 0xF3 Decode data in SSI packet format.
EVENT D 0xF6 Event indicated by associated event code.
LED_OFF H 0xE8 De-activate LED output.
LED_ON H 0xE7 Activate LED output.
PARAM_DEFAULTS H 0xC8 Set parameter default values.
PARAM_REQUEST H 0xC7 Request values of certain parameters.
PARAM_SEND H/D 0xC6 Send parameter values.
REPLY_REVISION D 0xA4 Reply to REQUEST_REVISION, contains the decoder's

software/hardware configuration.
REQUEST_REVISION H 0xA3 Request the decoder's configuration.
SCAN_DISABLE H 0xEA Prevent the operator from scanning barcodes.
SCAN_ENABLE H 0xE9 Permit barcode scanning.
SLEEP H 0xEB Request to place the decoder into low power.
START_DECODE H 0xE4 Tell the decoder to attempt to decode a barcode.
STOP_DECODE H 0xE5 Tell the decoder to abort a decode attempt.
WAKEUP H N/A Wake the decoder from low power mode.
For details of the SSI protocol, refer to the Simple Serial Interface Programmer's Guide.
252
SSI Interface
SSI Transactions
General Data Transactions
ACK/NAK Handshaking
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking (the default), all packeted messages must have a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK
response, unless the command description states otherwise. Zebra recommends leaving this handshaking
enabled to provide feedback to the host. Raw decode data and WAKEUP do not use ACK/NAK handshaking since
they are not packeted data.
Following is an example of a problem which can occur if you disable ACK/NAK handshaking:
• The host sends a PARAM_SEND message to the scanner to change the baud rate from 9600 to 19200.
• The scanner cannot interpret the message.
• The scanner does not implement the change the host requested.
• The host assumes that the parameter change occurred and acts accordingly.
• Communication is lost because the change did not occur on both sides.
If you enable ACK/NAK handshaking, the following occurs:
• The host sends a PARAM_SEND message.

• The scanner cannot interpret the message.
• The scanner CMD_NAKs the message.
• The host resends the message.
• The scanner receives the message successfully, responds with CMD_ACK, and implements parameter
changes.
253
SSI Interface
Decoded Data Transmission

The Decode Data Packet Format parameter controls how decode data is sent to the host. Set this parameter to
send the data in a DECODE_DATA packet. Clear this parameter to transmit the data as raw ASCII data.
NOTE: When transmitting decode data as raw ASCII data, ACK/NAK handshaking does not apply regardless of
the state of the ACK/NAK handshaking parameter.
ACK/NAK Enabled and Packeted Data

The scanner sends a DECODE_DATA message after a successful decode. The scanner waits for a programmable
timeout for a CMD_ACK response. If it does not receive the response, the scanner tries to send two more times
before issuing a host transmission error. If the scanner receives a CMD_NAK from the host, it may attempt a retry
depending on the cause field of the CMD_NAK message.
(1)
DECODE_DATA
Decoder
Host
Data is captured
(2)
by decoder
CMD_ACK
message sent
ACK/NAK Enabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data

Even if ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled, no handshaking occurs because handshaking applies only to packeted
data. In this example the packeted_decode parameter is disabled.
Decoder
ASCII data Host
Data is captured
by decoder
254
SSI Interface
ACK/NAK Disabled and Packeted DECODE_DATA

In this example ACK/NAK does not occur even though packeted_decode is enabled because the ACK/NAK
handshaking parameter is disabled.
Decoder (1)
Data is captured DECODE_DATA Host

by decoder
message sent
ACK/NAK Disabled and Unpacketed ASCII Data

The decoder sends captured data to the host.
Decoder (1)
Data is captured ASCII data sent Host

by decoder
Communication Summary
RTS/CTS Lines
All communication must use RTS/CTS handshaking as described in the Simple Serial Interface Programmer’s
Guide, p/n 72E-40451-xx. If bypassing hardware handshaking, the host must send the WAKEUP command before
all other communication or the first byte of a message can be lost during the scanner wakeup sequence. Zebra
recommends not bypassing RTS/CTS hardware handshaking.
ACK/NAK Option
ACK/NAK handshaking is enabled by default and Zebra recommends leaving it enabled. Disabling this can cause
communication problems, as handshaking is the only acknowledgment that a message was received correctly.
ACK/NAK is not used with unpacketed decode data regardless of whether it is enabled.
Number of Data Bits

All communication with the scanner must use 8-bit data.
255
SSI Interface
Serial Response Timeout

The Host Serial Response Timeout parameter determines how long to wait for a handshaking response before
trying again or aborting further attempts. Set the same value for both the host and scanner.
NOTE: You can temporarily change the Host Serial Response Timeout when the host takes longer to process
an ACK or longer data string. Zebra does not recommend frequent permanent changes due to limited
write cycles of non-volatile memory.
Retries
The host resends data twice after the initial send if the scanner does not respond with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK
handshaking is enabled), or response data (e.g., PARAM_SEND, REPLY_REVISION). If the scanner replies with a
NAK RESEND, the host resends the data. All resent messages must have the resend bit set in the Status byte.
The scanner resends data two times after the initial send if the host fails to reply with an ACK or NAK (if ACK/NAK
handshaking is enabled).
Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Parity, Response Timeout, ACK/NAK Handshaking

If you use PARAM_SEND to change these serial parameters, the ACK response to the PARAM_SEND uses the
previous values for these parameters. The new values then take effect for the next transaction.
Errors
The scanner issues a communication error when:
• The CTS line is asserted when the scanner tries to transmit, and is still asserted on each of two successive
retries
• The scanner does not receive an ACK or NAK after initial transmit and two resends.
SSI Communication Notes

• When not using hardware handshaking, space messages sufficiently apart. The host must not
communicate with the scanner if the scanner is transmitting.
• When using hardware handshaking, frame each message properly with handshaking signals. Do not try to
send two commands within the same handshaking frame.
• There is a permanent/temporary bit in the PARAM_SEND message. Removing power from the scanner
discards temporary changes. Permanent changes are written to non-volatile memory. Frequent changes
shorten the life of the non-volatile memory.
256
SSI Interface
Using Time Delay to Low Power Mode with SSI

Time Delay to Low Power Mode on page 71 provides options to select a general time delay. To program a more
specific delay value, use an SSI command according to Table 15.
Table 15 Values for Selecting Time Delay to Low Power

Value Timeout Value Timeout Value Timeout Value Timeout
0x00 15 Min 0x10 1 Sec 0x20 1 Min 0x30 1 Hour
0x01 30 Min 0x11 1 Sec 0x21 1 Min 0x31 1 Hour
0x02 60 Min 0x12 2 Sec 0x22 2 Min 0x32 2 Hours
0x03 90 Min 0x13 3 Sec 0x23 3 Min 0x33 3 Hours
N/A N/A 0x14 4 Sec 0x24 4 Min 0x34 4 Hours
N/A N/A 0x1A 10 Sec 0x2A 10 Min 0x3A 10 Hours
N/A N/A 0x1B 15 Sec 0x2B 15 Min 0x3B 15 Hours
N/A N/A 0x1C 20 Sec 0x2C 20 Min 0x3C 20 Hours
N/A N/A 0x1D 30 Sec 0x2D 30 Min 0x3D 30 Hours
N/A N/A 0x1E 45 Sec 0x2E 45 Min 0x3E 45 Hours
N/A N/A 0x1F 60 Sec 0x2F 60 Min 0x3F 60 Hours
CAUTION:With hardware handshaking disabled, the scanner wakes from low power mode upon receiving a
character. However, the scanner does not process this character or any others it receives during the
10 ms period following wakeup. Wait at least 10 ms after wakeup to send valid characters.
257
SSI Interface
Encapsulation of RSM Commands/Responses over SSI

The SSI protocol allows the host to send a command that is variable in length up to 255 bytes. Although there is a
provision in the protocol to multi-packet commands from the host, the scanner does not support this. The host must
fragment packets using the provisions in the RSM protocol.
Command Structure
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Length (not including the checksum)
1 SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)
2 Message Source (4 - Host)
3 Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Cont'd packet Retransmit
4 Payload data (see the following example)
...
Length -1
Length 2's complement checksum (MSB)
Length +1 2's complement checksum (LSB)
The expected positive response is SSI_MGMT_COMMAND which can be a multi-packet response. Devices that do
not support this command respond with the standard SSI_NAK.
Response Structure
Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Length (not including the checksum)
1 SSI_MGMT_COMMAND (0x80)
2 Message Source (0 - Decoder)
3 Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Reserved (0) Cont'd packet Retransmit
4 Payload data (see the following example)
...
Length -1
Length 2's complement checksum (MSB)
Length +1 2's complement checksum (LSB)
258
SSI Interface
Example Transaction
The following example illustrates how to retrieve diagnostic information (Diagnostic Testing and Reporting
(Attribute #10061) decimal) from the scanner using encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI. Before sending an
RSM command, the host must send the RSM Get Packet Size command to query the packet size supported by the
device.
Command from Host to Query Packet Size Supported by Device

0A 80 04 00 00 06 20 00 FF FF FD 4E
Where:
• 0A 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header

• 00 06 20 00 FF FF is RSM Get Packet Size command
• FD 4E is SSI command checksum
Response from Device with Packet Size Information

0C 80 00 00 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 FD 6C
Where:
• 0C 80 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM command over SSI command header

• 00 08 20 00 00 F0 00 F0 is RSM Get Packet Size response
• FD 6C is SSI response checksum
Command from Host to Retrieve Diagnostic Information

0C 80 04 00 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 FE B0
Where:
• 0C 80 04 00 is encapsulation of RSM commands over SSI command header

• 00 08 02 00 27 4D 42 00 is attribute Get command requesting attribute 10061 decimal
• FE B0 is SSI command checksum
Response from Device with Diagnostic Information

21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 FF FF FC 15
Where:
• 21 80 00 00 00 1D 02 00 27 4D 41 01 42 00 0E 00 00 is encapsulation of RSM responses over SSI

command header
• 00 00 01 03 02 03 03 03 04 03 05 03 06 03 is attribute Get response which includes diagnostic report
value
• FF FF is attribute Get response, packet termination
• FC 15 is SSI response checksum
259
SSI Interface
Setting Parameters
This section describes how to set up the scanner with an SSI host. When using SSI, program the scanner via
barcode menu or SSI hosts commands.
* Indicates default *Enable Parameter

(1) Feature/option
Option value

In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan
the Baud Rate 19,200 barcode under Baud Rate on page 262. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the
LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

260
SSI Interface
Simple Serial Interface Parameter Defaults

Table 14 lists defaults for SSI host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
• Download data through the device’s serial port using SSI. Hexadecimal parameter numbers appear in this
chapter below the parameter title, and option values appear in parenthesis beneath the accompanying
barcodes. Refer to the Simple Serial Interface (SSI) Programmer’s Guide for detailed instructions for
changing parameters using this method.
NOTE: SSI interprets Prefix, Suffix1, and Suffix2 values listed in ASCII Character Set on page 445 differently
than other interfaces. SSI does not recognize key categories, only the 3-digit decimal value. The default
value of 7013 is interpreted as CR only.
parameters.
Table 16 SSI Interface Default Table

Parameter Page
Parameter SSI Number Default
Number Number
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host N/A N/A N/A 262
Baud Rate 156 9Ch 9600 262
Parity 158 9Eh None 264
Check Parity 151 97h Disable 265
Stop Bits 157 9Dh 1 265
Software Handshaking 159 9Fh ACK/NAK 266
Host RTS Line State 154 9Ah Low 267
Decode Data Packet Format 238 EEh Send Raw Decode Data 268
Host Serial Response Timeout 155 9Bh Low - 2 Seconds 269
Host Character Timeout 239 EFh Low - 200 msec 270
Multipacket Option 334 F0h 4Eh Multipacket Option 1 271
Interpacket Delay 335 F0h 4Fh Minimum - 0 msec 272
Event Reporting
Decode Event 256 F0h 00h Disable 273
Boot Up Event 258 F0h 02h Disable 274
Parameter Event 259 F0h 03h Disable 275
261
SSI Interface
SSI Host Parameters

Select SSI Host
To select SSI as the host interface, scan the following barcode.
SSI Host
Baud Rate
Parameter # 156
SSI # 9Ch
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the
scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host
device or may reach it in distorted form.
* Baud Rate 9600

(6)
Baud Rate 19,200

(7)
Baud Rate 38,400

(8)
Baud Rate 57,600

(10)
262
SSI Interface
Baud Rate (continued)
Baud Rate 115,200

(11)
Baud Rate 230,400

(13)
Baud Rate 460,800

(14)
Baud Rate 921,600

(15)
263
SSI Interface
Parity
Parameter # 158
SSI # 9Eh
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following barcodes to
select the parity type according to host device requirements:
• Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an
odd number of 1 bits.
• Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains
an even number of 1 bits.
• None - No parity bit is required.
Odd
(2)
Even
(1)
* None
(0)
264
SSI Interface
Check Parity
Parameter # 151
SSI # 97h
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to check the parity of received characters. See Parity to
select the type of parity.
* Do Not Check Parity

(0)
Check Parity
(1)
Stop Bits
Parameter # 157
SSI # 9Dh
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and
prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following barcodes
to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.
* 1 Stop Bit
(1)
2 Stop Bits
(2)
265
SSI Interface
Software Handshaking
Parameter # 159
SSI # 9Fh
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to the control hardware handshaking offers.
Hardware handshaking is always enabled; you cannot disable it.
Options:
• Disable ACK/NAK Handshaking - The scanner neither generates nor expects ACK/NAK handshaking
packets.
• Enable ACK/NAK Handshaking - After transmitting data, the scanner expects either an ACK or NAK
response from the host. The scanner also ACKs or NAKs messages from the host.
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout to receive an ACK or NAK. If
the scanner does not get a response in this time, it resends its data up to two times before discarding the
data and declaring a transmission error.
Disable ACK/NAK
(0)
* Enable ACK/NAK
(1)
266
SSI Interface
Host RTS Line State

Parameter # 154
SSI # 9Ah
Scan one of the following barcodes to set the expected idle state of the Serial Host RTS line.
The SSI interface is used with host applications which also implement the SSI protocol. However, you can use the
scanner in a "scan-and-transmit" mode to communicate with any standard serial communication software on a host
PC (see Decode Data Packet Format on page 268). If transmission errors occur in this mode, the host PC may be
asserting hardware handshaking lines which interfere with the SSI protocol. Scan the High barcode to address this
problem.
* Low
(0)
High
(1)
267
SSI Interface
Decode Data Packet Format

Parameter # 238
SSI # EEh
Scan one of the following barcodes to select whether to transmit decoded data in raw format (unpacketed), or with
the packet format defined by the serial protocol.
Selecting the raw format disables ACK/NAK handshaking for decode data.
* Send Raw Decode Data

(0)
Send Packeted Decode Data

(1)
268
SSI Interface
Host Serial Response Timeout

Parameter # 155
SSI # 9Bh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK before resending.
Also, if the scanner wants to send, and the host has already been granted permission to send, the scanner waits
for the designated timeout before declaring an error.
NOTE: Other values are available via SSI commands.
* Low - 2 Seconds
(20)
Medium - 5 Seconds
(50)
High - 7.5 Seconds

(75)
Maximum - 9.9 Seconds

(99)
269
SSI Interface
Host Character Timeout

Parameter # 239
SSI # EFh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the maximum time the scanner waits between characters transmitted
by the host before discarding the received data and declaring an error.
* Low - 200 msec

(20)
Medium - 500 msec

(50)
High - 750 msec

(75)
Maximum - 990 msec

(99)
270
SSI Interface
Multipacket Option
Parameter # 334
SSI # F0h 4Eh
Scan one of the following barcodes to control ACK/NAK handshaking for multi-packet transmissions:
• Multi-Packet Option 1 - The host sends an ACK/NAK for each data packet during a multi-packet
transmission.
• Multi-Packet Option 2 - The scanner sends data packets continuously, with no ACK/NAK handshaking to
pace the transmission. The host, if overrun, can use hardware handshaking to temporarily delay scanner
transmissions. At the end of transmission, the scanner waits for a CMD_ACK or CMD_NAK.
• Multi-Packet Option 3 - This is the same as option 2 with the addition of a programmable interpacket
delay. See Interpacket Delay on page 272 to set this delay.
* Multipacket Option 1
(0)
Multipacket Option 2
(1)
Multipacket Option 3
(2)
271
SSI Interface
Interpacket Delay
Parameter # 335
SSI # F0h 4Fh
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the interpacket delay if you selected Multipacket Option 3.
* Minimum - 0 msec
(0)
Low - 25 msec
(25)
Medium - 50 msec
(50)
High - 75 msec
(75)
Maximum - 99 msec
(99)
272
SSI Interface
Event Reporting
The host can request the scanner to provide certain information (events) relative to scanner behavior. Scan the
following barcodes to enable or disable the events listed in Table 17 and on the following pages.
Table 17 Event Codes

Event Class Event Code Reported
Decode Event Non-parameter decode 0x01
Boot Up Event System power-up 0x03
Parameter Event Parameter entry error 0x07
Parameter stored 0x08
Defaults set (and parameter event is enabled by default) 0x0A
Number expected 0x0F
Decode Event
Parameter # 256
SSI # F0h 00h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Decode Event.
• Enable Decode Event - The scanner generates a message to the host upon a successful barcode
decode.
• Disable Decode Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Decode Event

(1)
* Disable Decode Event

(0)
273
SSI Interface
Boot Up Event
Parameter # 258
SSI # F0h 02h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Boot Up Event:
• Enable Boot Up Event - The scanner generates a message to the host whenever power is applied.
• Disable Boot Up Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Boot Up Event

(1)
* Disable Boot Up Event

(0)
274
SSI Interface
Parameter Event
Parameter # 259
SSI # F0h 03h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable Parameter Event:
• Enable Parameter Event - The scanner generates a message to the host when one of the events
specified in Table 17 on page 273 occurs.
• Disable Parameter Event - No notification is sent.
Enable Parameter Event

(1)
* Disable Parameter Event

(0)
275
RS-232 Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an RS-232 host. The scanner uses the RS-232 interface to
connect to point-of-sale devices, host computers, or other devices with an available RS-232 port (e.g., com port).
If your host does not appear in Table 19, refer to the documentation for the host device to set communication
parameters to match the host.
NOTE: The scanner uses TTL RS-232 signal levels, which interface with most system architectures. For system
architectures requiring RS-232C signal levels, Zebra offers different cables providing TTL-to-RS-232C
conversion. Contact support for more information.
Setting Parameters

Feature/option
276
RS-232 Interface

In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the baud rate to 19,200, scan
the Baud Rate 19,200 barcode under Baud Rate on page 283. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the
LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

Connecting an RS-232 Interface

Connect the scanner directly to the host computer.
Figure 20 RS-232 Connection
Interface Cable
Serial Port
Connector to Host
Power Supply
Cable
1. Attach the modular connector of the RS-232 interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those
illustrated in Figure 1, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
2. Connect the other end of the RS-232 interface cable to the serial port on the host.
3. If required, connect the power supply to the serial connector end of the RS-232 interface cable. Plug the power
supply into an appropriate outlet.
4. The scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*) does
not meet your requirements, select another RS-232 host type by scanning the appropriate barcode from
RS-232 Host Types on page 281.
277
RS-232 Interface
RS-232 Parameter Defaults

Table 18 lists defaults for RS-232 host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
Table 18 RS-232 Interface Parameter Defaults

Page
Parameter Default
Number
RS-232 Host Parameters
RS-232 Host Types Standard 281
Baud Rate 9600 283
Parity None 284
Stop Bits 1 Stop Bit 284
Data Bits 8-bit 285
Check Receive Errors Enable 285
Hardware Handshaking None 286
Software Handshaking None 288
Host Serial Response Timeout 2 Seconds 290
RTS Line State Low RTS 291
Beep on <BEL> Disable 291
Intercharacter Delay 0 msec 292
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options Normal Operation 293
Barcodes with Unknown Characters Send Barcode With Unknown 293

Characters
278
RS-232 Interface

Various RS-232 hosts use their own parameter default settings. Selecting standard, ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf
Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or Common Use Terminal Equipment
(CUTE-LP/LG barcode readers) sets the defaults listed in Table 19.
Table 19 Terminal Specific RS-232

Wincor- Wincor-
Parameter ICL Fujitsu Nixdorf Nixdorf Mode Olivetti Omron CUTE
Mode A B/OPOS/JPOS
Transmit Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Code ID
Data Data/ Data/ Data/ Data/ Prefix/Data/ Data/ Prefix/

Transmission Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Suffix Data/
Format Suffix
Suffix CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) CR (1013) ETX (1002) CR (1013) CR

(1013)
ETX
(1003)
Baud Rate 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600
Parity Even None Odd Odd Even None Even
Hardware RTS/CTS None RTS/CTS RTS/CTS None None None

Handshaking Option 3 Option 3 Option 3
Software None None None None ACK/NAK None None

Handshaking
Serial 9.9 Sec. 2 Sec. None None 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec. 9.9 Sec.
Response
Timeout
Stop Bit One One One One One One One

Select
ASCII Format 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 8-Bit 7-Bit 8-Bit 7-Bit
Beep On Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable

<BEL>
In the Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A/B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled.
If you scan Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A/B without connecting the scanner to the proper host, it may appear
unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the
scanner.
The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan *
Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 63, then change the host selection.
279
RS-232 Interface
Table 19 Terminal Specific RS-232 (Continued)

Wincor- Wincor-
Parameter ICL Fujitsu Nixdorf Nixdorf Mode Olivetti Omron CUTE
Mode A B/OPOS/JPOS
RTS Line High Low Low Low = No data Low High High
State to send
Prefix None None None None STX (1003) None STX

(1002)
In the Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A/B, if CTS is low, scanning is disabled. When CTS is high, scanning is enabled.
If you scan Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A/B without connecting the scanner to the proper host, it may appear
unable to scan. If this happens, scan a different RS-232 host type within 5 seconds of cycling power to the
scanner.
The CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan *
Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 63, then change the host selection.
Selecting ICL, Fujitsu, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode A, Wincor-Nixdorf Mode B, OPOS/JPOS, Olivetti, Omron, or
CUTE-LP/LG barcode readers transmits the code ID characters listed in Table 20. These code ID characters are
not programmable and are separate from the Transmit Code ID feature. Do not enable the Transmit Code ID
feature for these terminals.
Table 20 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters

Wincor- Wincor-Nixdorf
Code Type ICL Fujitsu Nixdorf Mode B/ Olivetti Omron CUTE
Mode A OPOS/JPOS
UPC-A A A A A A A A
UPC-E E E C C C E None
EAN-8/JAN-8 FF FF B B B FF None
EAN-13/JAN-13 F F A A A F A
Code 39 C <len> None M M M <len> C <len> 3
Code 39 Full ASCII None None M M None None 3
Codabar N <len> None N N N <len> N <len> None
Code 128 L <len> None K K K <len> L <len> 5
I 2 of 5 I <len> None I I I <len> I <len> 1
Code 93 None None L L L <len> None None
D 2 of 5 H <len> None H H H <len> H <len> 2
GS1-128 L <len> None P P P <len> L <len> 5
MSI None None O O O <len> None None
Bookland EAN F F A A A F None
Trioptic None None None None None None None
Code 11 None None None None None None None
280
RS-232 Interface
Table 20 Terminal Specific Code ID Characters (Continued)

Wincor- Wincor-Nixdorf
Code Type ICL Fujitsu Nixdorf Mode B/ Olivetti Omron CUTE
Mode A OPOS/JPOS
IATA H<len> None H H H<len> H<len> 2
Code 32 None None None None None None None
GS1 DataBar None None E E None None None

Variants
PDF417 None None Q Q None None 6
Data Matrix None None R R None None 4
GS1 Data Matrix None None W W None None None
QR Codes None None U U None None 7
GS1 QR None None X X None None None
Aztec/Aztec Rune None None V V None None 8
Maxicode None None T T None None None
MicroPDF None None S S None None 6
RS-232 Host Types

To select an RS-232 host interface, scan one of the following barcodes.
NOTE: For a list of supported scanner functionality by communication protocol, see Communication Protocol
Functionality.
* Standard RS-2321
ICL RS-232
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A
281
RS-232 Interface
RS-232 Host Types (continued)
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B
Olivetti ORS4500
Omron
OPOS/JPOS
Fujitsu RS-232
CUTE2
1Scanning
Standard RS-232 activates the RS-232 driver, but does not change port settings (e.g., parity, data bits,
handshaking). Selecting another RS-232 host type barcode changes these settings.
2The
CUTE host disables all parameter scanning, including Set Defaults. If you inadvertently select CUTE, scan *
Enable Parameter Barcode Scanning (1) on page 63, and then change the host selection.
282
RS-232 Interface
Baud Rate
Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Scan one of the following barcodes to set the
scanner's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. Otherwise, data may not reach the host
device or may reach it in distorted form.
Baud Rate 4800
* Baud Rate 9600
Baud Rate 19,200
Baud Rate 38,400
Baud Rate 57,600
Baud Rate 115,200
283
RS-232 Interface
Parity
A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Scan one of the following barcodes to
select the parity type according to host device requirements:
• Odd - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains an
odd number of 1 bits.
• Even - This sets the parity bit value to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that the coded character contains
an even number of 1 bits.
• None - No parity bit is required.
Odd
Even
* None
Stop Bits
The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and
prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. Scan one of the following barcodes
to set the number of stop bits (one or two) based on the number the receiving host can accommodate.
* 1 Stop Bit
2 Stop Bits
284
RS-232 Interface
Data Bits
This parameter allows the scanner to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol.
7-bit
* 8-bit
Check Receive Errors

Scan one of the following barcodes to set whether to check the parity, framing, and overrun of received characters.
The parity value of received characters is verified against the value set for Parity on page 284.
* Check For Received Errors
Do Not Check For Received Errors
285
RS-232 Interface
Hardware Handshaking
The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking
lines Request to Send (RTS) and Clear to Send (CTS).
If hardware handshaking and software handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes precedence.
NOTE: The DTR signal is jumpered to the active state.
Options:
• None - This disables hardware handshaking and transmits scan data as it becomes available.
• Standard RTS/CTS - This sets standard RTS/CTS hardware handshaking and transmits scanned data
according to the following sequence:
a. The scanner reads the CTS line for activity:
• If the CTS line is de-asserted, the scanner asserts the RTS line and waits up to Host Serial Response
Timeout on page 290 for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits data when asserted. If, after the
timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
• If CTS is asserted, the scanner waits up to Host Serial Response Timeout for the host to de-assert
CTS. If after this timeout the CTS line is still asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error and
discards the scanned data.
b. The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data.
c. The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission.
During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a
transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.
• RTS/CTS Option 1 - The scanner asserts RTS before transmitting and ignores the state of CTS. The
scanner de-asserts RTS when transmission completes.
• RTS/CTS Option 2 - RTS is always high or low (user-programmed logic level). However, the scanner
waits for the host to assert CTS before transmitting data. If CTS is not asserted within the Host Serial
Response Timeout, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data. During data transmission,
if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a transmit error and
discards the data.
• RTS/CTS Option 3 - This transmits scanned data according to the following sequence:
d. The scanner asserts RTS before data transmission, regardless of the state of CTS.
e. The scanner waits up to the Host Serial Response Timeout for the host to assert CTS, and then transmits
data when asserted. If, after the timeout, the CTS line is not asserted, the scanner sounds a transmit error
and discards the data.
f. The scanner de-asserts RTS after sending the last character of data.
g. The host negates CTS. The scanner checks for a de-asserted CTS upon the next data transmission.
During data transmission, if CTS is deasserted for more than 50 ms between characters, the scanner sounds a
transmit error and discards the data. The data must be re-scanned.
286
RS-232 Interface
Hardware Handshaking (continued)
* None
Standard RTS/CTS
RTS/CTS Option 1
RTS/CTS Option 2
RTS/CTS Option 3
287
RS-232 Interface
Software Handshaking
This parameter offers control of data transmission in addition to, or instead of, that offered by hardware
handshaking. If software handshaking and hardware handshaking are both enabled, hardware handshaking takes
precedence.
Options:
• None - This transmits data immediately. The scanner expects no response from the host.
• ACK/NAK - After transmitting data, the scanner waits for an ACK or NAK response from the host. If it
receives a NAK, the scanner transmits the data again and waits for an ACK or NAK. After three
unsuccessful attempts to send data after receiving NAKs, the scanner sounds a transmit error and
discards the data.
The scanner waits up to the programmable Host Serial Response Timeout to receive an ACK or NAK. If
the scanner does not get a response in this time, it sounds a transmit error and discards the data. There
are no reattempts.
• ENQ - The scanner waits for an ENQ character from the host before transmitting data. If it does not receive
an ENQ within the Host Serial Response Timeout, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the
data. The host must transmit an ENQ character at least every Host Serial Response Timeout to prevent
transmission errors.
• ACK/NAK with ENQ - This combines the two previous options. An additional ENQ is not required to
re-transmit data due to a NAK from the host.
• XON/XOFF - An XOFF character stops data transmission until the scanner receives an XON character.
There are two situations for XON/XOFF:
• The scanner receives an XOFF before it has data to send. When the scanner has data, it waits up to
the Host Serial Response Timeout for an XON character before transmitting. If it does not receive the
XON within this time, the scanner sounds a transmit error and discards the data.
• The scanner receives an XOFF during data transmission and stops transmission after sending the
current byte. When the scanner receives an XON character, it sends the rest of the data. The scanner
waits indefinitely for the XON.
288
RS-232 Interface
Software Handshaking (continued)
* None
ACK/NAK
ENQ
ACK/NAK with ENQ
XON/XOFF
289
RS-232 Interface
Host Serial Response Timeout

Scan one of the following barcodes to specify how long the scanner waits for an ACK, NAK, or CTS before
determining that a transmission error occurred. This only applies when in one of the ACK/NAK software
handshaking modes, or RTS/CTS hardware handshaking mode.
* Minimum: 2 Seconds
Low: 2.5 Seconds
Medium: 5 Seconds
High: 7.5 Seconds
Maximum: 9.9 Seconds
290
RS-232 Interface
RTS Line State

Scan one of the following barcodes to set the idle state of the serial host RTS line to Low RTS or High RTS.
* Host: Low RTS
Host: High RTS
Beep on <BEL>
Scan one of the following barcodes to set whether the scanner issues a beep when it detects a <BEL> character
on the RS-232 serial line. <BEL> indicates an illegal entry or other important event.
Beep On <BEL> Character

(Enable)
* Do Not Beep On <BEL> Character

(Disable)
291
RS-232 Interface
Intercharacter Delay
Scan one of the following barcodes to specify the intercharacter delay inserted between character transmissions.
* Minimum: 0 msec
Low: 25 msec
Medium: 50 msec
High: 75 msec
Maximum: 99 msec
292
RS-232 Interface
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options

If you selected Nixdorf Mode B, scan one of the following barcodes to indicate when the scanner beeps and turns
on its LED after a decode.
* Normal Operation
(Beep/LED Immediately After Decode)
Beep/LED After Transmission
Beep/LED After CTS Pulse

Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown
Characters to send all barcode data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.
Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send barcode data up to the first unknown character.
The scanner issues an error beep.
* Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters
293
RS-232 Interface

See ASCII Character Set, Table 29 on page 445, for prefix/suffix values
294
IBM Interface
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner with an IBM 468X/469X host.
Setting Parameters
* Enable Parameter

In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to select the Port 9B address, scan
the Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B) barcode under Port Address on page 298. The scanner issues a
fast warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

295
IBM Interface
Connecting an IBM 468X/469X Host

Connect the scanner directly to the host computer.
Figure 21 IBM Connection
Interface Cable
Host Port Connector
1. Attach the modular connector of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those
illustrated in Figure 21, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
2. Connect the other end of the IBM 46XX interface cable to the appropriate port on the host (ly Port 9).
3. The scanner automatically detects the host interface type, but there is no default setting. Scan the appropriate
barcode from Port Address on page 298 to select the port address.
NOTE: The only required configuration is the port address. The IBM system ly controls other scanner
parameters.
296
IBM Interface
IBM Parameter Defaults

Table 21 lists defaults for IBM host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
Table 21 IBM 468X/469X Interface Parameter Defaults

Page
Parameter Default
Number
IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address None 298
Convert Unknown to Code 39 Disable 299
RS-485 Beep Directive Ignore 299
RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive Ignore 300
IBM-485 Specification Version Original Specification 300
297
IBM Interface
IBM Host Parameters

Port Address
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the IBM 468X/469X port.
NOTE: Scanning a Port Address barcode enables the RS-485 interface on the scanner.
Functionality.
* None
Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B)
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B)
Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17)
298
IBM Interface
Convert Unknown to Code 39

Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable converting unknown barcode type data to Code 39.
Enable Convert Unknown to Code 39
* Disable Convert Unknown to Code 39
RS-485 Beep Directive

The IBM RS-485 host can send a beep configuration request to the scanner. Scan Ignore Beep Directive to
prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the host as if they
were processed.
Honor Beep Directive
* Ignore Beep Directive
299
IBM Interface
RS-485 Barcode Configuration Directive

The IBM RS-485 host can enable and disable code types. Scan Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive to
prevent the scanner from processing the host request. All directives are still acknowledged to the IBM RS-485 host
as if they were processed.
Honor Barcode Configuration Directive
* Ignore Barcode Configuration Directive
IBM-485 Specification Version

Parameter # 1729 (SSI # F8h 06h C1h)
The IBM interface specification version selected defines how code types are reported over the IBM interface.
When you scan Original Specification, only Symbologies that were historically supported on each individual port
are reported as known. When you scan Version 2.0, all Symbologies covered in the newer IBM specification are
reported as known with their respective code types.
* Original Specification
(0)
Version 2.0
(1)
300
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up a keyboard wedge interface with the scanner. The scanner connects between
the keyboard and host computer and translates barcode data into keystrokes, which the host accepts as if they
originated from the keyboard. This mode adds barcode reading functionality to a system designed for manual
keyboard input. Keyboard keystrokes are simply passed through.
Setting Parameters
To return all features to default values, scan a barcode in Default Parameters on page 62. Throughout the
programming barcode menus, asterisks (*) indicate default values.
* Enable Parameter

In most cases, scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to select a medium keystroke delay,
scan the Medium Delay (20 msec) barcode under Keystroke Delay on page 305. The scanner issues a fast
warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

301
Connecting a Keyboard Wedge Interface

Figure 22 Keyboard Wedge Connection
Power Supply
Male DIN (if necessary)
Connector
Keyboard Connector Male DIN Connector
NOTE: Interface cables vary depending on configuration. The connectors can be different than those illustrated
in Figure 22, but the steps to connect the scanner are the same.
1. Turn off the host and unplug the keyboard connector.

2. Attach the modular connector of the Y-cable to the cable interface port on the scanner. See Inserting the
Interface Cable on page 31.
3. Connect the round male DIN host connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard port on the host device.
4. Connect the round female DIN keyboard connector of the Y-cable to the keyboard connector.
5. If required, attach the optional power supply to the connector in the middle of the Y-cable.
6. Ensure that all connections are secure.
7. Turn on the host system.
8. The scanner automatically detects the host interface type and uses the default setting. If the default (*) does
not meet your requirements, scan IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles on page 304.
9. To modify other parameter options, scan the appropriate barcodes in this guide.
302
Keyboard Wedge Parameter Defaults

Table 22 lists defaults for keyboard wedge host parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
Table 22 Keyboard Wedge Interface Parameter Defaults

Page
Parameter Default
Number
Keyboard Wedge Host Parameters
Keyboard Wedge Host Type IBM AT Notebook 304
Barcodes with Unknown Characters Send Barcodes with Unknown 304

Characters
Keystroke Delay No Delay 305
Intra-keystroke Delay Disable 305
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation Enable 306
Quick Keypad Emulation Enable 306
Simulated Caps Lock Disable 307
Caps Lock Override Disable 308
Convert Case Do Not Convert 308
Function Key Mapping Disable 309
FN1 Substitution Disable 309
Send Make and Break Send Make and Break Scan 310
Codes
303

Keyboard Wedge Host Types
Scan one of the following barcodes to select the keyboard wedge host.
Functionality.
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles
* IBM AT Notebook

Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. Scan Send Barcodes With Unknown
Characters to send all barcode data except for unknown characters. The scanner issues no error beeps.
Scan Do Not Send Barcodes With Unknown Characters to send barcode data up to the first unknown character.
The scanner issues an error beep.
*Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
Do Not Send Barcodes with Unknown Characters
304
Keystroke Delay
This is the delay in milliseconds between emulated keystrokes. Scan one of the following barcodes to increase the
delay when hosts require a slower data transmission.
* No Delay
Medium Delay (20 msec)
Long Delay (40 msec)
Intra-keystroke Delay
Scan Enable Intra-keystroke Delay to insert an additional delay between each emulated key press and release.
This also sets Keystroke Delay to a minimum of 5 msec.
Enable Intra-keystroke Delay
* Disable Intra-keystroke Delay
305
Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation

This allows emulation of most other country keyboard types not listed in Country Codes in a Microsoft® operating
system environment.
NOTE: If your keyboard type is not listed in the country code list (see Country Codes), disable Quick Keypad
Emulation on page 306 and ensure Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 306 is enabled.
* Enable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Disable Alternate Numeric Keypad
Quick Keypad Emulation

This enables faster keypad emulation where character value sequences are only sent for characters not found on
the keyboard.
NOTE: This option applies only when Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation is enabled.
* Enable Quick Keypad Emulation
Disable Quick Keypad Emulation
306
Simulated Caps Lock

Scan Enable Caps Lock to invert upper and lower case characters on the barcode as if the Caps Lock state is
enabled on the keyboard. This inversion occurs regardless of the keyboard’s Caps Lock state. Note that this only
applies to alpha characters.
NOTES: - Simulated Caps Lock applies to ASCII characters only.

- Do not enable this parameter if either of the following parameters are enabled:
Convert to Upper Case on page 308
Convert to Lower Case on page 308
Enable Caps Lock
* Disable Caps Lock
307
Caps Lock Override

Scan Enable Caps Lock Override for AT or AT Notebook hosts to preserve the case of the data regardless of the
state of the Caps Lock key. Therefore, an ‘A’ in the barcode transmits as an ‘A’ regardless of the setting of the
keyboard’s Caps Lock key.
NOTE: If both Simulated Caps Lock and Caps Lock Override are enabled, Caps Lock Override takes
precedence.
Enable Caps Lock Override
* Disable Caps Lock Override
Convert Case
Scan one of the following barcodes to convert all barcode data to the selected case.
NOTE: Convert Case applies to ASCII characters only.
Convert to Upper Case
Convert to Lower Case
* Do Not Convert
308
Function Key Mapping

ASCII values under 32 are normally sent as control key sequences (see Table 29 on page 445). Scan Enable
Function Key Mapping to send the keys in bold in place of the standard key mapping. Table entries that do not
have a bold entry remain the same whether or not you enable this parameter.
Enable Function Key Mapping
* Disable Function Key Mapping
FN1 Substitution
Scan Enable FN1 Substitution to replace FN1 characters in an EAN128 barcode with a user-selected keystroke
(see FN1 Substitution Values on page 92).
Enable FN1 Substitution
* Disable FN1 Substitution
309
Send Make and Break

Scan Send Make and Break Scan Codes to prevent sending the scan codes for releasing a key.
NOTE: Windows-based systems must use Send Make and Break Scan Codes.
* Send Make and Break Scan Codes
Send Make Scan Code Only
Keyboard Map
The following keyboard map is a reference for prefix/suffix keystroke parameters. To program the prefix/suffix
values, see Prefix/Suffix Values on page 89.
Figure 23 IBM PS2 Type Keyboard
7006
7014 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005 5006 5007 5008 5009 5010 5011 5012 7010 7007
7001
7008 7011 7012 7003
7009 7002 7004 7005
7013
7015
7017 7016 7018
310

See ASCII Character Sets for the following information:
• ASCII Character Set, Table 29 on page 445

• ALT Key Character Set, Table 30 on page 450
• GUI Key Character Set, Table 31 on page 451
• PF Key Character Set, Table 32 on page 452
• F Key Character Set, Table 33 on page 453
• Numeric Key Character Set, Table 34 on page 453
• Extended Key Character Set, Table 35 on page 454
311
OCR Programming
Introduction
This chapter describes how to set up the scanner for OCR programming. The scanner can read 6 to 60 point OCR
typeface. It supports font types OCR-A, OCR-B, MICR E13B, and US Currency Serial Number.
OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an accurate OCR
template and character subset, and use a check digit.
All OCR fonts are disabled by default. Enabling OCR could slow barcode decoding. You can enable OCR-A and
OCR-B at the same time, but not other combined font types.
Setting Parameters

(1) Feature/option
Option value
312
OCR Programming

In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to enable OCR-B, scan the Enable
OCR-B barcode under OCR-B on page 316. The scanner issues a fast warble beep and the LED turns green,
signifying a successful parameter entry.

OCR Parameter Defaults

Table 23 lists the defaults for OCR parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
parameters.
Table 23 OCR Programming Default Table

Parameter
Parameter SSI Number Default Page Number
Number
OCR Programming Parameters
OCR-A 680 F1h A8h Disable 314
OCR-A Variant 684 F1h ACh OCR-A Full ASCII 315
OCR-B 681 F1h A9h Disable 316
OCR-B Variant 685 F1h ADh OCR-B Full ASCII 317
MICR E13B 682 F1h AAh Disable 321
US Currency Serial Number 683 F1h ABh Disable 322
OCR Orientation 687 F1h AFh 0o 322
OCR Lines 691 F1h B3h 1 324
OCR Minimum Characters 689 F1h B1h 3 324
OCR Maximum Characters 690 F1h B2h 100 325
OCR Subset 686 F1h AEh Selected font 325

variant
OCR Quiet Zone 695 F1h B7h 50 326
313
OCR Programming
Table 23 OCR Programming Default Table (Continued)

Parameter
Parameter SSI Number Default Page Number
Number
OCR Template 547 F1h 23h 99999999 326
OCR Check Digit Modulus 688 F1h B0h 1 336
OCR Check Digit Multiplier 700 F1h BCh 121212121212 336
OCR Check Digit Validation 694 F1h B6h None 337
Inverse OCR 856 F2h 58h Regular 343
OCR Redundancy 1770 F8h 06h EAh Level 1 344

OCR-A
Parameter # 680
SSI # F1h A8h
NOTE: OCR is not as secure as a barcode. To decrease OCR misdecodes and speed OCR reading, set an
accurate OCR template and character subset, and use a check digit. See OCR Subset on page 325 and
OCR Template on page 326.
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable OCR-A.
Enable OCR-A
(1)
* Disable OCR-A
(0)
314
OCR Programming
OCR-A Variant
Parameter # 684
SSI # F1 ACh
NOTE: Enable OCR-A before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-A, set the variant to its default
(OCR-A Full ASCII).
The font variant sets a processing algorithm and default character subset for the given font. To choose a variant,
scan one of the following barcodes. Select the most appropriate font variant to optimize performance and
accuracy.
OCR-A supports the following variants:
• OCR-A Full ASCII

!"#$()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ\^
• OCR-A Reserved 1
$*+-./0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-A Reserved 2
$*+-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-A Banking
-0123456789<>
Special banking characters output as the following representative characters:
outputs as f
outputs as c
outputs as h
*OCR-A Full ASCII

(0)
OCR-A Reserved 1
(1)
315
OCR Programming
OCR-A Variant (continued)
OCR-A Reserved 2
(2)
OCR-A Banking
(3)
OCR-B
Parameter # 681
SSI # F1h A9h
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable OCR-B.
Enable OCR-B
(1)
* Disable OCR-B
(0)
316
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant
Parameter # 685
SSI # F1h ADh
NOTE: Enable OCR-B before setting this parameter. If disabling OCR-B, set the variant to its default
(OCR-B Full ASCII).
OCR-B has the following variants. Select the most appropriate font variant to optimize performance and accuracy.
• OCR-B Full ASCII

!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|Ñ
• OCR-B Banking
#+-0123456789<>JNP|
• OCR-B Limited
+,-./0123456789<>ACENPSTVX
• OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
• OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers
-0123456789>BCEINPSXz
• OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1) 3-Line ID Cards
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
• OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2) 2-Line ID Cards
• OCR-B Travel Document 2 or 3-Line ID Cards Auto-Detect
!#$%()*+,-./0123456789<>ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^|Ñ
• OCR-B Passport
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÑ
• OCR-B Visa Type A
• OCR-B Visa Type B
-0123456789<ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÑ
• OCR-B ICAO Travel Documents
This allows reading either TD1, TD2, Passport, Visa Type A, or Visa Type B without switching between
these options. It automatically recognizes the travel document read.
Scanning any ISBN Book Number automatically applies the appropriate ISBN checksum.
317
OCR Programming
To choose a variant, scan one of the barcodes below. Selecting the following OCR-B variants automatically sets
the appropriate OCR Lines on page 324. These five variants invoke extensive special algorithms and checking for
that particular document type:
Variant OCR Lines Setting
Passport 2
TD1 ID Cards 3
TD2 ID Cards 2
Visa Type A 2
Visa Type B 2
NOTE: When setting one of the variants above with both OCR-A and OCR-B enabled, the scanner reads the
specified travel document but does not read OCR-A. When the OCR-B variant is set back to the default
(OCR-B Full ASCII), the scanner reads OCR-A.
* OCR-B Full ASCII

(0)
OCR-B Banking
(1)
OCR-B Limited
(2)
OCR-B ISBN 10-Digit Book Numbers

(6)
318
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant (continued)
OCR-B ISBN 10 or 13-Digit Book Numbers

(7)
OCR-B Travel Document Version 1 (TD1)

3 Line ID Cards
(3)
OCR-B Travel Document Version 2 (TD2)

2-Line ID Cards
(8)
Travel Document 2 or 3-Line ID Cards Auto-Detect

(20)
OCR-B Passport
(4)
319
OCR Programming
OCR-B Variant (continued)
OCR-B Visa Type A

(9)
OCR-B Visa Type B

(10)
OCR-B ICAO Travel Documents

(11)
320
OCR Programming
MICR E13B
Parameter # 682
SSI # F1h AAh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable MICR E13B.
MICR E 13B uses the following characters:
TOAD characters (Transit, On Us, Amount, and Dash) output as the following representative characters:
outputs as t
outputs as a
outputs as o
outputs as d
Enable MICR E13B

(1)
* Disable MICR E13B

(0)
321
OCR Programming
US Currency Serial Number

Parameter # 683
SSI # F1h ABh
Scan one of the following barcodes to enable or disable US Currency Serial Number.
Enable US Currency
(1)
* Disable US Currency
(0)
OCR Orientation
Parameter # 687
SSI # F1h AFh
Select one of five options to specify the orientation of the OCR to read:
• 0o to the imaging engine (default)

• 270o clockwise (or 90o counterclockwise) to the imaging engine
• 180o (upside down) to the imaging engine
• 90o clockwise to the imaging engine
• Omnidirectional
Setting an incorrect orientation can cause misdecodes.
322
OCR Programming
OCR Orientation (continued)
* OCR Orientation 0o
(0)
OCR Orientation 270o Clockwise

(1)

(2)

(3)
OCR Orientation Omnidirectional

(4)
323
OCR Programming
OCR Lines
Parameter # 691
SSI # F1h B3h
To select the number of OCR lines to decode, scan one of the following barcodes. Selecting Visas, TD1, or TD2 ID
cards automatically sets the appropriate OCR Lines. Also see OCR-B Variant on page 317.
* OCR 1 Line
(1)
OCR 2 Lines
(2)
OCR 3 Lines
(3)
OCR Minimum Characters

Parameter # 689
SSI # F1h B1h
To select the minimum number of OCR characters (not including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following
barcode, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes
representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR characters less than the minimum are
ignored. The default is 003.
OCR Minimum Characters
324
OCR Programming
OCR Maximum Characters

Parameter # 690
SSI # F1h B2h
To select the maximum number of OCR characters (including spaces) per line to decode, scan the following
barcode, then scan a three-digit number between 003 and 100 using the barcodes in Numeric Barcodes
representing the number of OCR characters to decode. Strings of OCR characters greater than the maximum are
ignored. The default is 100.
OCR Maximum Characters
OCR Subset
Parameter # 686
SSI # F1h AEh
Create an OCR subset to define a custom group of characters in place of a preset font variant. For example, if
scanning only numbers and the letters A, B, and C, create a subset of just these characters to speed decoding.
This applies a designated OCR Subset across all enabled OCR fonts.
To set or modify the OCR font subset:
1. Enable the appropriate OCR font(s).

2. Scan the OCR Subset barcode.
3. Scan numbers and letters to form the OCR Subset from Alphanumeric Barcodes.
4. Scan End of Message on page 326.
OCR Subset
To cancel an OCR subset, for OCR-A or OCR-B, scan OCR-A variant Full ASCII, or OCR-B variant Full ASCII.
For MICR E13B or US Currency Serial Number, create a subset which includes all allowed characters in that
character set, or scan an option from the Default Parameters on page 62 and re-program the scanner.
325
OCR Programming
OCR Quiet Zone

Parameter # 695
SSI # F1h B7h
This option sets the OCR quiet zone. The scanner stops scanning a field when it detects a sufficiently wide blank
space. The width of this space is defined by the End of Field option. Used with parsers that tolerate slanted
characters, the End of Field count is approximately a count of 8 for a character width. For example, if set to 15,
then two character widths are an end of line indicator for the parser. Larger end of field numbers require bigger
quiet zones at each end of text line.
To set a quiet zone, scan the following barcode, then scan a two-digit number using the numeric keypad in
Numeric Barcodes. The range of the quiet zone is 20 - 99 and the default is 50, indicating a six character width
quiet zone.
OCR Quiet Zone
OCR Template
Parameter # 547
SSI # F1h 23h
This option creates a template for precisely matching scanned OCR characters to a desired input format. Carefully
constructing an OCR template eliminates scanning errors.
To set or modify the OCR decode template, scan the OCR Template barcode, and then scan barcodes on the
following pages that correspond to numbers and letters to form the template expression. Then scan End of
Message. The default is 99999999 which accepts OCR strings containing any character.
OCR Template
End of Message
326
OCR Programming
Required Digit (9)

Only a numeric character is accepted in this position.
Template Valid data Valid data Invalid data
99999 12987 30517 123AB
Required Alpha (A)

Only an alpha character is accepted in this position.
AAAAA ABCDE UVWXY 12FGH
Require and Suppress (0)

Any character in this position, including space or reject, is suppressed from the output.
Template Incoming data Output
990AA 12QAB 12AB
Optional Alphanumeric (1)

An alphanumeric character is accepted in this position if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first
character(s) in a field of like characters.
99991 1234A 12345 1234<
327
OCR Programming
Optional Alpha (2)

An alpha character is accepted in this position if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first
character(s) in a field of like characters.
AAAA2 ABCDE WXYZ ABCD6
Alpha or Digit (3)

An alphanumeric character is required in this position to validate the incoming data.
33333 12ABC WXY34 12AB<
Any Including Space & Reject (4)

Any character is accepted in this position, including space and reject. An underscore (_) represents rejects in the
output. This is a good selection for troubleshooting.
Template Valid data Valid data
99499 12$34 34 98
328
OCR Programming
Any except Space & Reject (5)

Any character is accepted in this position, except a space or reject.
55999 A.123 *Z456 A BCD
Optional Digit (7)

A numeric character is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of
like characters.
99977 12345 789 789AB
Digit or Fill (8)

Any numeric or fill character is accepted in this position.
Template Valid data Valid data Valid data
88899 12345 >>789 <<789
329
OCR Programming
Alpha or Fill (F)

Any alpha or fill character is accepted in this position.
Template Valid data Valid data Valid data
AAAFF ABCXY LMN>> ABC<5
Optional Space ( )
A space is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of like
characters.
99 99 12 34 1234 67891
Space
Optional Small Special (.)

A special character is accepted if present. Optional characters are not allowed as the first character(s) in a field of
like characters. Small special characters are - , and .
AA.99 MN.35 XY98 XYZ12
Other Template Operators

These template operators assist in capturing, delimiting, and formatting scanned OCR data.
Literal String (" and +)
Use either of these delimiting characters surrounding characters from the alphanumeric keyboard in Alphanumeric
Barcodes to define a literal string within a template that must be present in scanned OCR data. There are two
330
OCR Programming
characters used to delimit required literal strings; if one of the delimiter characters is present in the desired literal
string, use the other delimiter.
Template Valid data Invalid data
"35+BC" 35+BC AB+22
New Line (E)
To create a template of multiple lines, add E between the template of each single line.
999EAAAA 321 987 XYZW
BCAD ZXYW 12
String Extract (C)
This operator combined with others defines a string of characters to extract from the scanned data. The string
extract is structured as follows:
CbPe
Where:
• C is the string extract operator

• b is the string begin delimiter
• P is the category (one or more numeric or alpha characters) describing the string representation
• e is the string end delimiter
331
OCR Programming
Values for b and e can be any scannable character. They are included in the output stream.
C>A> XQ3>ABCDE> >ABCDE>
->ATHRUZ>123 >ATHRUZ>
1ABCZXYZ No Output
Ignore to End of Field (D)
This operator causes all characters after a template to be ignored. Use this as the last character in a template
expression. Examples for the template 999D:
999D 123-PED 123
357298 357
193 193
Skip Until (P1)
This operator skips over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is detected. It can be used in
two ways:
P1ct
Where:
• P1 is the Skip Until operator

• c is the type of character that triggers the start of output
• t is one or more template characters
P1"s"t
Where:
• P1 is the Skip Until operator

• "s" is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 330) that trigger the start of
output
332
OCR Programming
The trigger character or literal string is included in output from a Skip Until operator, and the first character in the
template should accommodate this trigger.
P1"PN"AA9999 123PN9876 PN9876
PN1234 PN1234
X-PN3592 PN3592
Skip Until Not (P0)
This operator skips over characters until a specific character type or a literal string is not matched in the output
stream. It can be used in two ways:
P0ct
Where:
• P0 is the Skip Until Not operator

• c is the type of character that triggers the start of output
P0"s"t
Where:
• P0 is the Skip Until Not operator

• "s" is one or more literal string characters (see Literal String (" and +) on page 330) that trigger the start
of output
333
OCR Programming
The trigger character or literal string is not included in output from a Skip Until Not operator.
P0A9999 BPN3456 3456
PN1234 1234
5341 No output

P0"PN"9999 PN3456 3456
5341 No output
PNPN7654 7654
Repeat Previous (R)

This operator allows a template character to repeat one or more times, allowing the capture of variable-length
scanned data. The following examples capture two required alpha characters followed by one or more required
digits:
AA9R AB3 AB3
PN12345 PN12345
32RM52700 No output
334
OCR Programming
Scroll Until Match (S)
This operator steps through scanned data one character at a time until the data matches the template.
S99999 AB3 No Output
PN12345 12345
32RM52700 52700
Multiple Templates
This feature sets up multiple templates for OCR decoding. To do this, follow the procedure described in OCR
Template on page 326 (scan the OCR Template barcode, and then barcodes corresponding to numbers and
letters to form the template expression, and then End of Message) for each template in the multiple template string,
using a capital letter X as a separator between templates.
For example, set the OCR Template as 99999XAAAAA to decode OCR strings of either 12345 or ABCDE.
Template Examples
Following are sample templates with descriptions of valid data for each definition.
Field Definition Description
"M"99977 M followed by three digits and two optional digits.
"X"997777"X" X followed by two digits, four optional digits, and an X.
9959775599 Two digits followed by any character, a digit, two optional digits, any two characters,
and two digits.
A55"-"999"-"99 A letter followed by two characters, a dash, three digits, a dash, and two digits.
33A"."99 Two alphanumeric characters followed by a letter, a period, and two digits.
999992991Five digits followed by an optional alpha, two digits, and an optional alphanumeric.
"PN98" Literal field - PN98
335
OCR Programming
OCR Check Digit Modulus

Parameter # 688
SSI # F1h B0h
The check digit is the last digit (in the right-most position) in an OCR string and improves the accuracy of the
collected data. This option sets OCR module check digit calculation. The calculation is performed on incoming data
to determine this check digit, based on the numeric weight of the alpha and numeric characters. See OCR Check
Digit Multiplier on page 336. If the incoming data does not match the check digit, the data is considered corrupt.
The selected check digit option does not take effect until you set OCR Check Digit Validation on page 337.
To choose the Check Digit Modulus, such as 10 for Modulus 10, scan the following barcode, and then scan a
three-digit number from 001 to 099 representing the check digit using the numeric keypad in Numeric Barcodes.
The default is 1.
OCR Check Digit
OCR Check Digit Multiplier

Parameter # 700
SSI # F1h BCh
This option sets OCR check digit multipliers for character positions. For check digit validation, each character in
scanned data has an assigned weight to use in calculating the check digit. The scanner OCR ships with the
following weight equivalents:
0=0 A = 10 K = 20 U = 30
1=1 B = 11 L = 21 V = 31
2=2 C = 12 M = 22 W = 32
3=3 D = 13 N = 23 X = 33
4=4 E = 14 O = 24 Y = 34
5=5 F = 15 P = 25 Z = 35
6=6 G = 16 Q = 26 Space = 0
7=7 H = 17 R = 27
8=8 I = 18 S = 28
9=9 J = 19 T = 29
All other characters are equivalent to one (1).
You can define the multiplier string if it is different from the default.
121212121212 (default)
123456789A (for ISBN, Product Add Right to Left. See OCR Check Digit Validation on page 337)
336
OCR Programming
For example:
ISBN 0 2 0 1 1 8 3 9 9 4
Multiplier 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Product 0 18 0 7 6 40 12 27 18 4
Product add 0+ 18 + 0 + 7+ 6+ 40 + 12 + 27 + 18 + 4 = 132
ISBN uses Modulus 11 for the check digit. In this case, 132 is divisible by 11, so it passes the check digit.
To set the check digit multiplier, scan the following barcode, and then scan numbers and letters to form the
multiplier string from Alphanumeric Barcodes. Then scan End of Message on page 326.
OCR Check Digit Multiplier
OCR Check Digit Validation

Parameter # 694
SSI # F1h B6h
Use the following options to protect against scanning errors by applying a check digit validation scheme.
None
No check digit validation, indicating no check digit is applied. This is the default.
* No Check Digit
(0)
337
OCR Programming
Product Add Left to Right

Each character in the scanned data is assigned a numeric value (see OCR Check Digit Multiplier on page 336).
Each digit representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier, and
the sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Scanned data numeric value is 132456 (check digit is 6)
Check digit multiplier string is 123456

Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6
Multiplier 1 2 3 4 5 6
Product 1 6 6 16 25 36
Product add 1+ 6+ 6+ 16+ 25+ 36= 90
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 90 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is zero).
Product Add Left to Right

(3)
Product Add Right to Left

The check digit multiplier is reversed in order. Each value representing a character in the scanned data is
multiplied by its corresponding digit in the reversed multiplier, resulting in a product for each character in the
scanned data. The sum of these products is computed. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit
Modulus is zero.
Example:

Digit 1 3 2 4 5 9
Product 6 15 8 12 10 9
Product add 6+ 15+ 8+ 12+ 10+ 9= 60
338
OCR Programming
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 60 is divisible by 10 (the remainder is 0).
Product Add Right to Left

(1)
Digit Add Left to Right

Each value representing a character in the scanned data is multiplied by its corresponding digit in the multiplier,
resulting in a product for each character in the scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products
is then calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:
Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6
Product 1 6 6 16 25 36
Digit add 1+ 6+ 6+ 1+6+ 2+5+ 3+6= 36
Digit Add Left to Right

(4)
339
OCR Programming
Digit Add Right to Left

scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products is then calculated. The check digit passes if
this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is zero.
Example:

Digit 1 3 2 4 5 6
Product 6 15 8 12 10 6
Digit add 6+ 1+5+ 8+ 1+2+ 1+0+ 6= 30
Digit Add Right to Left

(2)
Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder

scanned data. The sum of these products except for the check digit's product is computed. The check digit passes
if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product.
Example:

Digit 1 2 2 4 5 6
Product 6 10 8 12 10 6
Product add 6+ 10+ 8+ 12+ 10= 46 6
340
OCR Programming
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 46 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 6.
Product Add Right to Left Simple Remainder

(5)
Digit Add Right To Left Simple Remainder

scanned data. The sum of each individual digit in all of the products except for the check digit's product is then
calculated. The check digit passes if this sum modulo Check Digit Modulus is equal to the check digit's product.
Example:

Digit 1 2 2 4 5 9
Product 6 10 8 12 10 9
Digit add 6+ 1+0+ 8+ 1+2+ 1+0= 19 9
The Check Digit Modulus is 10. It passes because 19 divided by 10 leaves a remainder of 9.
Digit Add Right to Left Simple Remainder

(6)
341
OCR Programming
Health Industry - HIBCC43

This is the health industry module 43 check digit standard. The check digit is the modulus 43 sum of all the
character values in a given message, and is printed as the last character in a given message.
Example:
Supplier Labeling Data Structure: + A 1 2 3 B J C 5 D 6 E 7 1
Sum of values: 41+10+1+2+3+11+19+12+5+13+6+14+7+1 = 145
Divide 145 by 43. The quotient is 3 with a remainder of 16. The check digit is the character corresponding to the
value of the remainder (see Table 24), which in this example is 16, or G. The complete Supplier Labeling Data
Structure, including the check digit, therefore is:
A123BJC5D6E71G
Table 24 Table of Numeric Value Assignments for Computing HIBC LIC Data Format Check Digit
0=0 9=9 I = 18 R = 27 - = 36
1=1 A = 10 J = 19 S = 28 . = 37
2=2 B = 11 K = 20 T = 29 Space = 38
3=3 C = 12 L = 21 U =30 $ = 39
4=4 D = 13 M = 22 V = 31 / = 40
5=5 E = 14 N = 23 W = 32 + = 41
6=6 F = 15 O = 24 X = 33 % = 42
7=7 G = 16 P = 25 Y = 34
8=8 H = 17 Q = 26 Z = 35
Health Industry - HIBCC43

(9)
342
OCR Programming
Inverse OCR
Parameter # 856
SSI # F2h 58h
Inverse OCR is white or light words on a black or dark background. Select an option for decoding inverse OCR:
• Regular Only - Decode regular OCR (black on white) strings only.

• Inverse Only - Decode inverse OCR (white on black) strings only.
• Autodiscriminate - Decode both regular and inverse OCR strings.
* Regular Only
(0)
Inverse Only
(1)
Autodiscriminate
(2)
343
OCR Programming
OCR Redundancy
Parameter # 1770
SSI # F8h 06h EAh
This option adjusts the number of times to decode an OCR text string before transmission. There are three levels
of OCR decode redundancy. There is an inverse relationship between the redundancy level and OCR decoding
aggressiveness. Increasing the level of the redundancy can reduce OCR scanning aggressiveness, so select only
the level of redundancy necessary.
• OCR Redundancy Level 1: This default setting allows the scanner to operate in its most aggressive state
while providing sufficient accuracy in decoding most in-spec OCR text strings.
• OCR Redundancy Level 2: This setting eliminates most misdecodes while maintaining reasonable
aggressiveness.
• OCR Redundancy Level 3: Select this option with greater redundancy requirements if OCR Redundancy
Level 2 fails to eliminate misdecodes.
* OCR Redundancy Level 1

(1)
OCR Redundancy Level 2

(2)
OCR Redundancy Level 3

(3)
344
Intelligent Document
Capture (Hand-held Mode
Only)
Introduction
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) is Zebra advanced image processing firmware for select imager based
scanners. This chapter describes the IDC functionality, provides parameter barcodes to control IDC features, and
includes a quick start procedure.
The IDC Process

Intelligent Document Capture:
1. Verifies a barcode is appropriate to use as an IDC anchor or link. See Barcode Acceptance Test on page 346.
2. Determines the rectangular region to capture as an image. See Capture Region Determination on page 346.
3. Processes the captured image. See Image Post Processing on page 347.
4. Transmits the data. See Data Transmission on page 347.
345
Barcode Acceptance Test

Upon decoding a barcode, the scanner checks that the barcode fits the description of a barcode that anchors or
links to an IDC form. To be accepted as an IDC barcode:
• The symbology must be enabled for decode, and also enabled via IDC Symbology on page 351. The IDC
firmware allows enabling between zero and eight symbologies simultaneously:
Code 128, Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, Discrete 2 of 5, Codabar, PDF417, Data Matrix, and EAN-128.
• The decoded data must satisfy the values set in the IDC Minimum Text Length and IDC Maximum Text
Length parameters. To disable either of these checks, set the value to zero.
If the barcode does not satisfy both requirements, it is sent as a normal (non-IDC) decode.
An IDC barcode is required when IDC Operating Mode on page 350 is set to Anchored or Linked.
Free-Form operating mode does not require a barcode, but transmits decoded data if one is found and satisfies
the requirements. If no barcode is decoded, the document capture process starts but may require specifying a
non-zero value for the IDC Delay Time on page 360. The scanner must wait for at least this amount of time after
trigger pull before capturing a document, unless a barcode is decoded before the time expires.
If Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout on page 76 is enabled, the barcode must be directly under the aiming pattern
and within the scanner’s decode range, and the region to capture must be completely within the scanner's
field-of-view.
Capture Region Determination

After accepting an IDC barcode, the firmware establishes the region to capture as an image. The method used
depends on the setting of the IDC Operating Mode as follows.
The IDC firmware emits a single low beep after successfully capturing a region. The scanner is then no longer
capturing images and can be moved without disturbing the IDC output. Be sure to hold the trigger button until the
decode beep, otherwise the IDC process may be aborted.
IDC Operating Mode = Anchored

A coordinate system is built based on the barcode in its rectified (de-skewed) form. The origin is the center of the
barcode, and the x-axis is set toward the right, from the barcode's point of view. The unit module width of the
barcode is the unit for x. Similarly, the y-axis is set toward the up direction. The unit for the y-axis is specified via
the parameter IDC Aspect on page 354. This is the aspect ratio of a thin bar or space - the barcode's height is
divided by this value to get this unit. Set IDC Aspect to zero to automatically calculate the aspect ratio. The barcode
can be of different sizes for the same form, as long as the center of the barcode is the same when the barcode's
length changes.
From this coordinate system, the IDC area is determined using four parameters: offsets in x and y (IDC X
Coordinate, IDC Y Coordinate) to the region's top-left corner, and width and height (IDC Width, IDC Height).
If the capture area is relatively large as compared to the barcode area, the calculation to obtain the capture area is
prone to significant errors. A recommended solution is to enclose the form with a single black-lined rectangular
border (a box), which is not in contact with any other line on the outside of the form (although it can be connected
to lines on the inside of the form). When the IDC Find Box Outline is set, the firmware searches for the box, and
does not decode if any edges are broken (such as by a protruding thumb).
The IDC Zoom Limit parameter controls the quality of the captured form. The IDC firmware rejects capturing a form
unless the width is at least the IDC Zoom Limit percentage of the IDC Width parameter. For example, if IDC Zoom
Limit is set to 100 and IDC Width is set to 150, the form must be at least 300 pixels wide before it is captured (each
unit module is scaled to two pixels).
346
The IDC Maximum Rotation parameter controls the maximum rotation any edge of the form can have in relation to
the scanner's horizontal or vertical axis.
IDC Operating Mode = Free-Form or Linked

The document capture region is a rectangular piece of paper, or a portion of it enclosed by a rectangular border. In
either case, all four sides of the capture region must be completely within the scanner's field-of-view, and there
must be sufficient contrast at the border of the capture region. For example, if a piece of white paper contains the
document to capture, it must be put in front of a dark background.
By default, the scanner captures the largest rectangular region within the field-of-view. To specify a particular
border type, use the IDC Border Type parameter.
The region must contain at least 10% of the field-of-view in two dimensions.
If an IDC barcode is decoded, IDC uses its location to start the search for the capture region. Otherwise, it
searches the capture region from the center of the field-of-view. IDC also uses the orientation of a decoded IDC
barcode to orient the output image.
Image Post Processing

After determining the document capture region, the firmware de-skews and re-samples the region as follows.
Enabling IDC Captured Image Brighten calls normalization, which makes the brightness of the image uniform, and
enhances contrast as a large percent of background pixels is made completely white (a smaller percent of pixels is
made completely black if the firmware determines there is no danger of enhancing the contrast of a very bland
area). Enabling IDC Captured Image Sharpen enhances the sharpness of the image.
IDC re-samples the image about one output pixel per input pixel for Free-Form or Linked modes and two
pixels-per-module in Anchored mode.
IDC compresses and transmits the image in one of the standard image formats selected by the IDC File Format
Selector, IDC Bits Per Pixel, and IDC JPEG Quality parameters.
Note that it may take several seconds for post processing to complete, depending on the size of the captured
region, the options enabled, and the scanner model.
Data Transmission
After processing the captured image, IDC assembles the image with the decoded barcode data (if applicable) into
an ISO/IEC 15434 style packet and transmits it to the host. The scanner issues the standard decode beep and the
trigger can be released. Be sure to set the USB Device Type on page 237 to Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with
Imaging Interface.
PC Application and Programming Support

For a sample application running on the Microsoft Windows operating system, contact your Zebra representative.
This application displays barcode data and/or captured images from Intelligent Document Capture enabled
scanners and allows setting and reading IDC parameters. Complete source code and documentation are also
provided for developing custom applications. The application includes documentation for the ISO/IEC 15434
format as used by the IDC firmware and C# code to process it.
347
Setting Parameters
This section describes the parameters controlling the IDC firmware and provides programming barcodes for setting
them.
* Indicates default *Enable Parameter

(1) Feature/option
Option value

In most cases scanning one barcode sets the parameter value. For example, to set the document capture file
format to BMP, scan the BMP barcode under IDC File Format Selector on page 354. The scanner issues a fast
warble beep and the LED turns green, signifying a successful parameter entry.

348
Image Document Capture Parameter Defaults

Table 25 lists defaults for IDC parameters. Change these values in one of two ways:
parameters.
Alternatively, use the sample application to set parameters using the parameter name. The application provides
prompts and error checking to assist in setting the parameters correctly and easily. You must use an application to
set a parameter to a negative value, as the IDC X Coordinate can require.
Table 25 Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Parameter Name Default
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameters
IDC Operating Mode DocCap_MODE 594 F1h 52h Off 350
IDC Symbology DocCap_SYMBOLOGY 655 F1h 8Fh 001 351
IDC X Coordinate DocCap_X 596 F4h F1h 54h -151 352
IDC Y Coordinate DocCap_Y 597 F4h F1h 55h -050 352
IDC Width DocCap_WIDTH 598 F1h 56h 0300 353
IDC Height DocCap_HEIGHT 599 F1h 57h 0050 353
IDC Aspect DocCap_ASPECT 595 F1h 53h 000 354
IDC File Format Selector DocCap_FMT 601 F1h 59h JPEG 354
IDC Bits Per Pixel DocCap_BPP 602 F1h 5Ah 8 BPP 355
IDC JPEG Quality DocCap_JPEG_Qual 603 F1h 5Bh 065 355
IDC Find Box Outline Sig_FINDBOX 727 F1h D7h Disable 356
IDC Minimum Text Length DocCap_MIN_TEXT 656 F1h 90h 00 356
IDC Maximum Text Length DocCap_MAX_TEXT 657 F1h 91h 00 357
IDC Captured Image Brighten Sig_BRIGHTEN 654 F1h 8Eh Enable 357
IDC Captured Image Sharpen Sig_SHARPEN 658 F1h 92h Enable 358
IDC Border Type DocCap_BORDER 829 F2h 3Dh None 359
IDC Delay Time DocCap_DELAY 830 F2h 3Eh 000 360
349
Table 25 Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Parameter Name Default
IDC Zoom Limit Sig_MIN_PERCENT 651 F1h 8Bh 000 360
IDC Maximum Rotation Sig_MAX_ROT 652 F1h 8Ch 00 361
IDC Operating Mode

Parameter Name: DocCap_MODE
Parameter # 594
SSI # F1h 52h
Select the operating mode of the Intelligent Document Capture firmware:
• Off - Disables the IDC feature.

• Anchored - Requires a barcode decode. The image capture region is based off this barcode.
• Free-Form - A printed border or page edge defines the image capture region. A barcode is optional.
• Linked - A printed border or page edge defines the image capture region. A barcode is required.
* Off
(0)
Anchored
(1)
Free-Form
(2)
Linked
(3)
350
IDC Symbology
Parameter Name: DocCap_SYMBOLOGY
Parameter # 655
SSI # F1h 8Fh
Select the barcode type(s) to use when Document Capture mode is not set to Off. To enable more than one
symbology at a time, simply add the values together. For example, to enable PDF417, Data Matrix, and Code 39
write a value of 98 (32 + 64 + 2).
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 001 to 511
decimal. The default is 001.
Table 26 IDC Symbologies

Symbology Value (Decimal)
Code 128 1
Code 39 2
I 2 of 5 4
D 2 of 5 8
Codabar 16
PD 417 32
Data Matrix 64
EAN 128 128
Aztec 256
IDC Symbology
351
IDC X Coordinate
Parameter Name: DocCap_X
Parameter # 596
SSI # F4h F1h 54h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the horizontal offset to the top
left corner of the region to capture relative to the center of the barcode. Negative values move toward the left.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of
+/- 1279. The default is -151. Note that you must use an application to set a negative value.
IDC X Coordinate
IDC Y Coordinate
Parameter Name: DocCap_Y
Parameter # 597
SSI # F4h F1h 55h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the vertical offset to the top left
corner of the region to capture relative to the center of the barcode. Negative values move toward the top.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of
+/- 1023. The default is -050. Note that you must use an application to set a negative value.
IDC Y Coordinate
352
IDC Width
Parameter Name: DocCap_WIDTH
Parameter # 598
SSI # F1h 56h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the width of the region to
capture.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 0000 to 1279.
The default is 0300.
IDC Width
IDC Height
Parameter Name: DocCap_HEIGHT
Parameter # 599
SSI # F1h 57h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the height of the region to
capture.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan four barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 0000 to 1279.
The default is 0050.
IDC Height
353
IDC Aspect
Parameter Name: DocCap_ASPECT
Parameter # 595
SSI # F1h 53h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Specify the barcode's aspect ratio of a
thin bar or space. The barcode's height is divided by this value to obtain the unit in the y-axis. Set this parameter to
zero to calculate the aspect value automatically.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan three barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 000 to 255. The
default is 000.
IDC Aspect
IDC File Format Selector

Parameter Name: DocCap_FMT
Parameter # 601
SSI # F1h 59h
Select a document capture file format appropriate for your system (BMP, TIFF, or JPEG). The scanner stores
captured areas in the selected format.
* JPEG
(1)
BMP
(3)
TIFF
(4)
354
IDC Bits Per Pixel

Parameter Name: DocCap_BPP
Parameter # 602
SSI # F1h 5Ah
Select the number of significant bits per pixel (BPP) to use when capturing an image. Select 1 BPP for a black and
white image, 4 BPP to assign 1 of 16 levels of grey to each pixel, or 8 BPP to assign 1 of 256 levels of grey to each
pixel.
NOTE: The scanner ignores these settings for JPEG file formats, which only support 8 BPP.
1 BPP
(0)
4 BPP
(1)
* 8 BPP
(2)
IDC JPEG Quality

Parameter Name: DocCap_JPEG_Qual
Parameter # 603
SSI # F1h 5Bh
Set the amount of JPEG compression to perform on the captured image. Higher numbers produce a better quality
image but larger files.
decimal. The default is 065.
IDC JPEG Quality
355
IDC Find Box Outline

Parameter Name: Sig_FINDBOX
Parameter # 727
SSI # F1h D7h
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Scan Enable Find Box Outline to
search for a rectangular border during document capture.
Enable Find Box Outline

(1)
* Disable Find Box Outline

(0)
IDC Minimum Text Length

Parameter Name: DocCap_MIN_TEXT
Parameter # 656
SSI # F1h 90h
Specify the minimum number of characters encoded in a barcode for the IDC firmware to use it as an anchored or
linked barcode. Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking and use all barcodes.
Scan the following barcode, and then scan two barcodes from Numeric Barcodes in the range of 00 to 55 decimal.
The default is 00.
IDC Minimum Text Length
356
IDC Maximum Text Length

Parameter Name: DocCap_MAX_TEXT
Parameter # 657
SSI # F1h 91h
Specify the maximum number of characters encoded in a barcode for the IDC firmware to use it as an anchored or
linked barcode. Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking and use all barcodes.
The default is 00.
IDC Maximum Text Length
IDC Captured Image Brighten

Parameter Name: Sig_BRIGHTEN
Parameter # 654
SSI # F1h 8Eh
Enable Captured Image Brighten to make image brightness uniform and enhance contrast such that a large
percent of the background pixels is made completely white (a smaller percent of pixels is made completely black if
the program determines there is no danger of enhancing the contrast of a very bland area).
NOTE: This parameter is also used for Signature Capture.
* Enable Captured Image Brighten

(1)
Disable Captured Image Brighten

(0)
357
IDC Captured Image Sharpen

Parameter Name: Sig_SHARPEN
Parameter # 658
SSI # F1h 92h
Enable this to enhance the sharpness of the image.
NOTE: This parameter is also used for Signature Capture.
* Enable Captured Image Sharpen

(1)
Disable Captured Image Sharpen

(0)
358
IDC Border Type

Parameter Name: DocCap_BORDER
Parameter # 829
SSI # F2h 3Dh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Free-Form or Linked. Select the style of border
used to determine the outline of the capture region:
• None - Capture the largest rectangular region within the field-of-view.

• Black - The border must be black (such as a printed rectangular border).
• White - The border must be white (e.g., paper edge on a dark background).
• Advanced Edge Detection (AED) - Capture a region defined by edges of any color and potentially
broken.
* None
(0)
Black
(1)
White
(2)
Advanced Edge Detection (AED)

(3)
359
IDC Delay Time

Parameter Name: DocCap_DELAY
Parameter # 830
SSI # F2h 3Eh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Free-Form. Set the delay for capturing a
document after a trigger pull. Decoding a barcode aborts this delay.
decimal in units of 10 msec. The default is 000.
IDC Delay Time
IDC Zoom Limit

Parameter Name: Sig_MIN_PERCENT
Parameter # 651
SSI # F1h 8Bh
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Set the minimal "zoom" percentage
value of a form for it to be considered for capture. This controls the quality of the captured form. The IDC firmware
rejects capturing a form unless the width is at least the IDC Zoom Limit percentage of the IDC Width parameter.
For example, if you set this parameter to 100 and IDC Width to 150, the form must be at least 300 pixels wide
before it is captured (each unit module is scaled to two pixels).
Set this to zero (the default) to disable all checking.
percent. The default is 000.
IDC Zoom Limit
360
IDC Maximum Rotation

Parameter Name: Sig_MAX_ROT
Parameter # 652
SSI # F1h 8Ch
This parameter only applies when IDC Operating Mode is set to Anchored. Set the maximum rotation any edge of
the form can have in relation to the scanner's horizontal or vertical axis for it to be considered for capture. Set this
to zero (the default) to disable all checking.
The default is 00.
IDC Maximum Rotation
361
Quick Start
This section familiarizes you with some of the Intelligent Document Capture features. IDC Demonstrations on page
363 includes instructions to demonstrate the Anchored, Free-Form, and Linked modes using a sample form to
provide an understanding of how to use IDC. These examples do not illustrate all capabilities of the advanced IDC
firmware. Build upon these using different parameter settings and forms.
Sample IDC Setup

To set up IDC:
1. Connect a scanner equipped with IDC to the host computer's USB port.
2. To set the scanner to the default settings and proper USB host type, scan Set Defaults followed by the
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface barcode. Allow time for the scanner to reset and the
USB connection to remunerate after each scan before continuing.
Set Defaults
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Interface
3. Start the sample application and select the scanner in the SNAPI Scanners drop-down menu.
4. Set parameters as specified in IDC Demonstrations on page 363 using the sample application or by scanning
parameter barcodes in this guide. The barcode in the sample form is Code 128, which is enabled by default for
decoding and as a Document Capture symbology. You can change these settings for your IDC application.
5. Perform each demo. When scanning, aim the scanner at the barcode in the center of the rectangle. Pull the
scanner back so the rectangle is fully contained in the aiming pattern. When you pull the trigger, the scanner
emits a low tone to indicate that the IDC firmware identified and captured an image, then a decode beep to
indicate that the data transmitted. There may be several seconds between the two beeps, depending on the
size of the captured image and options selected (de-skew, brighten, etc). You can move the scanner after the
first beep, but continue the hold the trigger or the scanner may end the session before sending the data.
362
IDC Demonstrations
Anchored Mode Demo
• Set IDC Operating Mode on page 350 to Anchored.
• Set parameters to these values:
• Set IDC Height on page 353 to 100.
• Set IDC Width on page 353 to 90.
• Set IDC X Coordinate on page 352 to -175.
• Set IDC Y Coordinate on page 352 to -50.
• Pull the trigger. The scanner decodes the barcode and captures an image of the text scroll.
• Rotate the form clockwise so the word Capture is along the bottom edge, and pull the trigger. The scanner
decodes the barcode and captures the same image, including orientation. (This example also works with
the form rotated counter-clockwise or upside down).
• Modify the values for height, width, x, and y. Pull the trigger. The captured area changes in size and
location.
• Cover the barcode with a small piece of paper (or your finger) and pull the trigger. The scanner does not
decode the barcode or capture an image.
What This Demonstrates
Anchored mode captures an image of fixed size and location relative to a barcode on the page. Parameters control
the height, width, and location. The IDC firmware requires that a barcode is present in order to capture an image. It
decodes the barcode and uses it to adjust the image to the upright orientation.
Free-Form Mode Demo

• Set IDC Operating Mode on page 350 to Free-Form.
• Pull the trigger. The scanner decodes the barcode and captures an image of the entire rectangle, including
the contents.
• Modify the values for height, width, x, and y. Pull the trigger. Note that the captured image is not affected.
• Rotate the form clockwise so the word Capture is along the bottom edge, and pull the trigger. The scanner
decodes the barcode and captures the same image, including orientation. (This example also works with
the form rotated counterclockwise or upside down).
• Cover the barcode with a small piece of paper and pull the trigger. The scanner does not decode the
barcode and does not re-orient the captured image to the normal position, i.e., with the logo in the
upper-left corner.
Free-Form mode captures an image where a rectangular border on the page determines the size and position. It
adjusts the image to the upright orientation if a barcode is found and decoded in the image.
Linked Mode Demo

Set IDC Operating Mode on page 350 to Linked.
Use the examples from the Free-Form Mode Demo, noting that the last item (covering the barcode) does not
decode the barcode or capture an image.
363
Linked mode captures an image where a rectangular border on the page determines the size and position. The
IDC firmware requires that a barcode is present in order to capture an image. It decodes the barcode and uses it to
adjust the image to the upright orientation.
Other Suggestions
Hold the scanner at an angle (up/down or side to side) to the page instead of perpendicular to it. The IDC firmware
de-skews and adjusts the brightness (enabled by default) to produce a quality image when the scanner is held at
less than ideal conditions.
Quick Start Form

Figure 24 Quick Start Form
364
Digimarc (DS9308-SRD
and DS9308-DLD)
Introduction
Digimarc Barcode is a machine-readable code that is invisible to people.
Digimarc Symbology Selection

Digimarc codes are reported as UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-13 or GS1 DataBar Expanded.
NOTE: Conversion of the Digimarc reported code types to other barcode types is not supported.
AIM and Symbol code IDs are supported for the reported Digimarc code types.
Picklist
The Digimarc decoder searches configured block areas of the image for Digimarc codes. The Digimarc decoder
works the same whether or not Picklist is enabled or disabled.
NOTE: Decode time could be greater given the extra processing done by system and decoder when in Picklist
mode.
365
Digimarc
Digimarc Digital Watermarks

Parameter # 1687
SSI # F8h 06h 97h
To enable or disable the Digimarc Digital Watermarks code scan the appropriate barcode below.
Enabling Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW increases decode times slightly. Increasing the Timeout
Between Decodes, Same Symbol on page 79 may be required to avoid double decodes.
* Enable Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW

(1)
Disable Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW

(0)
366
Data Formatting: ADF,
MDF, Preferred Symbol
Introduction
This chapter briefly describes the Zebra features available for customizing scanner operation.
Advanced Data Formatting (ADF)

Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) allows customizing data before transmission to the host device. Use ADF to edit
scanned data to suit the host application's requirements. With ADF you scan one barcode per trigger pull. ADF is
programmed using 123Scan.
For a video on Creating an Advanced Data Formatting (ADF) Rule using 123Scan, go to:
www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos.
For additional information, refer to the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Multicode Data Formatting (Hand-held Mode Only)

Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) enables a 2D scanner to scan all barcodes on a label with a single trigger pull,
and then modify and transmit the data to meet host application requirements. MDF supports programming up to
nine unique labels into one scanner. MDF also supports scanning multiple barcodes on opposite sides of a box by
holding the trigger.
MDF options include:
• Output all or specific barcodes.

• Control the barcode output sequence.
• Apply unique multicode data formatting (MDF) to each output barcode.
• Discard scanned data if all required barcodes are not present.
367
Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol
Programming a Scanner
• Using 123Scan, programming an MDF is similar to programming an ADF rule. MDF programming is saved
in a 123Scan configuration file.
• MDF can be deployed to a fleet of 2D scanners using the Scanner Management Service (SMS) through a
traditional SMS package.
For more information, refer to the Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol User Guide,
p/n MN-002895-xx.
For a video on Creating an Multicode Data Formatting (MDF) Rule using 123Scan, go to:
www.zebra.com/ScannerHowToVideos.
Preferred Symbol
Preferred Symbol is a barcode prioritization technique that enables favored decoding of high priority barcode(s).
The Preferred Symbol is the only barcode that is decoded and output within the preset Preferred Symbol Timeout.
During this time, the scanner attempts to decode the prioritized barcode and reports only this barcode.
For more information, refer to the Multicode Data Formatting and Preferred Symbol User Guide,
p/n MN-002895-xx.
To program Preferred Symbol via 123Scan, select 123Scan > Configuration Wizard > Symbologies screen, and
then select Preferred Symbol from the drop-down menu. Preferred Symbol programming is saved in the 123Scan
configuration file.
368
Driver’s License Set Up
(DS9308-DL)
Introduction
The scanner uses internally embedded algorithms to parse out barcode information from standard US driver's
licenses and certain other American Association of Motor Vehicle Administrators (AAMVA) compliant ID cards.
Scanning these barcodes produces formatted data for use in age verification, credit card application information,
and more.
This chapter describes how to program the scanner to read and use the data contained in the 2D barcodes on US
driver's licenses and AAMVA compliant ID cards.
Table 27 DL Parsing Parameter Table

DL Parsing Parameters
Driver’s License Parsing No Driver’s License Parsing 370
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields N/A 371
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes N/A 372
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes N/A 374
Parser Version ID Barcode N/A 383
Set Default Parameter N/A 384
Output Gender as M or F N/A 384
Date Format CCYYMMDD 385
No Separator N/A 386
Send Keystroke N/A 387

Control Characters 387
Keyboard Characters 391
Parsing Rule Example N/A 405
Embedded Driver’s License Parsing ADF Example N/A 409
369
Driver’s License Parsing

Parameter # 645
SSI # F1 85
To enable driver's license parsing on the scanner, scan the Embedded Driver's License Parsing barcode. This does
not require Zebra software (.DLL).
Scan the barcodes on the following pages in the order indicating the sequence of data fields that the scanner
outputs. See Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Parsing) on page 371 for more
information.
* No Driver’s License Parsing
Embedded Driver’s License Parsing
370
Parsing Driver’s License Data Fields (Embedded Driver's License Pars-

ing)
To program a parsing rule:
1. Scan Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule on page 372.

2. Scan any of the field barcodes on the following pages, or Send Keystroke (Control Characters and
Keyboard Characters) on page 387.
3. After entering the entire rule, scan Save Driver’s License Parse Rule on page 372 to save the rule.
NOTE: The scanner stores only one driver’s license parsing rule in memory at a time. Saving a new rule
replaces the prior rule.
To abort the programming sequence at any time during programming, scan Quit Entering Driver’s License Rule on
page 372. Any previously saved rule is retained.
To erase a saved rule, scan Erase Driver’s License Parse Rules on page 372.
Embedded Driver's License Parsing Criteria - Code Type

After specifying the fields and their order for the parsed driver's license, you can also apply standard ADF rules to
the parsed data using the Parsed Driver’s License criterion barcode in the Advanced Data Formatting Programmer
Guide.
NOTE: Only create standard ADF rules on parsed driver's license data when configured for Embedded Driver's
License Parsing.
See Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example on page 409 for a sample ADF rule using this code type
criterion.
371
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes
Begin New Driver’s License Parse Rule
Save Driver’s License Parse Rule
Quit Entering Driver’s License Rule
Erase Driver’s License Parse Rules
The supported parse fields begin below. Not all IDs present data in the same format. For example, some IDs can have
separate fields for first name, last name, and middle initial, while others have a single field with the entire name. Also,
some IDs expire on the subject's birth date while the expiration date field only indicates the year. To present data in a
consistent format, use the following nine barcodes to return data calculated from the actual data contained in the ID
barcode.
First Name
Middle Name/Initial
372
Driver’s License Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Last Name
Name Suffix
Name Prefix
Expiration Date
Birth Date
Issue Date
ID Number (Formatted)
373
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes
AAMVA Issuer ID
Full Name
Last Name
First Name
Middle Name / Initial
Name Suffix
Name Prefix
374
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes (continued)
Mailing Address Line 1
Mailing Address City
Mailing Address State
Mailing Address Postal Code
Home Address Line 1
Home Address Line 2
375
Home Address City
Home Address State
Home Address Postal Code
License ID Number
License Class
License Restrictions
License Endorsements
376
Height (Feet and/or Inches)
Height (Centimeters)
Weight (Pounds)
Weight (Kilograms)
Eye Color
Hair Color
License Expiration Date
377
Birth Date
Gender
License Issue Date
License Issue State
Social Security Number
Permit Class
Permit Expiration Date
378
Permit ID Number
Permit Issue Date
Permit Restrictions
Permit Endorsements
AKA Social Security Name
AKA Full Name
AKA Last Name
AKA First Name
379
AKA Middle Name / Initial
AKA Name Suffix
AKA Name Prefix
AKA Birth Date
Issue Timestamp
Number of Duplicates
Medical Codes
380
Organ Donor
Nonresident
Customer ID
Weight Range
Document Discriminator
Country
Federal Commission Codes
381
Place of Birth
Audit Information
Inventory Control
Race / Ethnicity
Std Vehicle Class
Std Endorsements
Std Restrictions
382
Class Description
Endorsement Description
Restrictions Description
Height in Inches
Height in Centimeters
Parser Version ID Barcode

Include this field to emit embedded parser software version identification
Parser Version ID
383
User Preferences
Set Default Parameter
Scan this barcode to return all parameters to the default values listed in Table 28 on page 411.
* Set All Defaults
Output Gender as M or F
Scan this barcode to report the gender as M or F instead of a numeric value.
Output gender as M or F
384
Date Format
Use these barcodes to select the date format to display. Date fields include the following:
• CCYY = 4-digit year (CC=2-digit century [00-99], YY=2-digit year in the century [00-99])
• MM = 2-digit month [01-12]
• DD = 2-digit day of the month [00-31]
The default is CCYYMMDD.
NOTE: To specify a date separator, i.e., a character separating each field of the date, scan the Send
<character> barcode that corresponds to the alphanumeric character to use as the date separator
immediately following the date format barcode. To select no date separator, scan the No Separator DL
parsing rule immediately following the date format barcode.
* CCYYMMDD
CCYYDDMM
MMDDCCYY
MMCCYYDD
DDMMCCYY
DDCCYYMM
385
Date Format (continued)
YYMMDD
YYDDMM
MMDDYY
MMYYDD
DDMMYY
DDYYMM
No Separator
Scan this barcode immediately following a date format barcode to use no separator character between the date
fields.
No Separator
386
Send Keystroke (Control Characters and Keyboard Characters)

Control Characters
Scan a Send barcode for the keystroke to send.
Send Control A
Send Control B
Send Control C
Send Control D
Send Control E
Send Control F
Send Control G
Send Control H
387
Control Characters (continued)
Send Control I
Send Control J
Send Control K
Send Control L
Send Control M
Send Control N
Send Control O
Send Control P
388
Send Control Q
Send Control R
Send Control S
Send Control T
Send Control U
Send Control V
Send Control W
389
Send Control X
Send Control Y
Send Control Z
Send Control [
Send Control \
Send Control ]
390
Send Control 6
Send Control -
Keyboard Characters
Scan a Send barcode for the keyboard characters to send.
Send Space
Send !
Send “
Send #
391
Keyboard Characters (continued)
Send $
Send %
Send &
Send ‘
Send (
Send )
Send *
392
Send +
Send ,
Send -
Send .
Send /
Send 0
Send 1
393
Send 2
Send 3
Send 4
Send 5
Send 6
Send 7
Send 8
394
Send 9
Send :
Send ;
Send <
Send =
Send >
Send ?
395
Send @
Send A
Send B
Send C
Send D
Send E
Send F
396
Send G
Send H
Send I
Send J
Send K
Send L
Send M
397
Send N
Send O
Send P
Send Q
Send R
Send S
Send T
398
Send U
Send V
Send W
Send X
Send Y
Send Z
Send [
399
Send \
Send ]
Send ^
Send _
Send `
Send a
Send b
400
Send c
Send d
Send e
Send f
Send g
Send h
Send i
401
Send j
Send k
Send l
Send m
Send n
Send o
Send p
402
Send q
Send r
Send s
Send t
Send u
Send v
Send w
403
Send x
Send y
Send z
Send {
Send |
Send }
Send ~
404
Send Tab Key
Send Enter Key
Parsing Rule Example

Scan the following barcodes in sequence to program the scanner to extract and transmit first, middle, and last
names; mailing address line 1; mailing address line 2; mailing address city; mailing address state; mailing address
postal code; and, date of birth. Then, scan a driver’s license barcode.
NOTE: This example applies to RS-232. To use this example with a USB interface, enable Function Key
Mapping on page 246 to send the Enter key properly.
Embedded Driver’s License Parsing
First Name
405
Parsing Rule Example (continued)

4
Send Space
Middle Name / Initial
Send Space
Last Name
Send Enter Key
406

10
Send Space
11
12
Send Enter Key
13
Mailing Address City
14
Send Space
15
Mailing Address State
407

16
Send Space
17
Mailing Address Postal Code
18
Send Enter Key
19
Birth Date
20
Send Enter Key
21
408
Embedded Driver's License Parsing ADF Example

This example creates a parsing rule for parsed data configured to result in the format:
Last Name, First Name
Last Name
Send ,
Send Space
First Name
409
Then, in order to limit the full name to 15 characters, create the following ADF rule:
Begin New Rule
Criterion: Parsed Driver's License
Action: Send Next 15 Characters
Save Rule
For a license belonging to Michael Williams, the parsed data is Williams, Michael and Williams, Micha after
applying the previous ADF rule.
410
Parameter Defaults
Table 28 Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Serial Number N/A N/A N/A 54
Report Software Version N/A N/A N/A 54
Manufacturing Information N/A N/A N/A 54
Parameter Barcode Scanning 236 ECh Enable 63
Beep After Good Decode 56 38h Enable 63
Beep Volume 140 8Ch High 64
Beep Tone 145 91h Medium 65
Beep Duration 628 F1h 74h Short 66
Volume Adjustment Trigger 403 F0h 93h 5 Seconds 67

Timeout
Suppress Power Up Beeps 721 F1h D1h Do Not Suppress 68
Direct Decode Indicator 859 F2h 5Bh Disable 69
Low Power Mode 128 80h Disable 70
Time Delay to Low Power Mode 146 92h 1 Hour 71
Trigger Mode 138 8Ah Presentation Mode 73
Hand-held Decode Aiming Pattern 306 F0h 32h Enable 74
Presentation (Hands-free) Decode 590 F1h 4Eh Disable Presentation 75

Aiming Pattern (Hands-free) Decode Aiming
Pattern
411
Parameter Defaults
Table 28 Parameter Defaults (Continued)

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Momentary Trigger Mode Timeout 2030 EDh 5 Seconds 76
Picklist Mode 402 F0h 92h Enable Picklist Mode in 77

Hand-held Mode
Continuous Barcode Read 649 F1h 89h Disable 78
Unique Barcode Reporting 723 F1h D3h Enable 78
Decode Session Timeout 136 88h 9.9 Seconds 79
Timeout Between Decodes, Same 137 89h 0.5 Seconds 79

Symbol
Timeout Between Decodes, 144 90h 0.1 Seconds 80

Different Symbols
Triggered Timeout, Same Symbol 724 F1h D4h Disable 80
Mobile Phone/Display Mode 716 F1h CCh Normal 81
PDF Prioritization 719 F1h CFh Disable 82
PDF Prioritization Timeout 720 F1h D0h 200 ms 82
Decoding Illumination 298 F0h 2Ah Enable 83
Illumination Brightness 669 F1h 9Dh High 83
Motion Tolerance (Hand-held 858 F2h 5Ah Less Motion Tolerance 85

Trigger Mode Only)
Product ID (PID) Type 1281 F8h 05h 01h Host Type Unique 85
Product ID (PID) Value 1725 F8h 06h BDh 0 86
ECLevel 1710 F8h 06h AEh 0 86
Enter Key N/A N/A N/A 87
Tab Key N/A N/A N/A 87
Transmit Code ID Character 45 2Dh None 88
Prefix Value 99, 105 63h, 69h 7013 <CR><LF> 89
Suffix 1 Value 98, 104 62h, 68h 7013 <CR><LF> 89

Suffix 2 Value 100, 106 64h, 6Ah
Scan Data Transmission Format 235 EBh Data As Is 90
FN1 Substitution Values 103, 109 67h, 6Dh 7013 <CR><LF> 92
Transmit “No Read” Message 94 5E Disable 93
412
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Unsolicited Heartbeat Interval 1118 F8h 04h 5Eh Disable 94
securPharm Decoding 1752 F8h 06h D8h Disable 95
securPharm Output Formatting 1753 F8h 06h D9h No Formatting 96
Operational Modes N/A N/A N/A 102
Image Capture Illumination 361 F0h 69h Enable 103
Image Capture Autoexposure 360 F0h 68h Enable 103
Fixed Exposure 567 F4h F1h 37h 100 104
Analog Gain 1232 F4h D0h Analog Gain x 2 105
Digital Gain 1233 F4h D1h 32 105
Gain / Exposure Priority for 562 F1h 32h Autodetect 106

Snapshot Mode
Snapshot Mode Timeout 323 F0h 43h 0 (30 seconds) 107
Snapshot Aiming Pattern 300 F0h 2Ch Enable 108
Silence Operational Mode Changes 1293 F8h 05h 0Dh Disable (do not silence) 108
Image Cropping 301 F0h 2Dh Disable 109
Crop to Pixel Addresses 315 F4h F0h 3Bh 0 top 109

316 F4h F0h 3Ch 0 left
317 F4h F0h 3Dh 799 bottom
318 F4h F0h 3Eh 1279 right
Image Size (Number of Pixels) 302 F0h 2Eh Full 111
Image Brightness (Target White) 390 F0h 86h 180 112
JPEG Image Options 299 F0h 2Bh Quality 112
JPEG Quality Value 305 F0h 31h 65 113
JPEG Size Value 561 F1h 31h 160 kB 113
Image Enhancement 564 F1h 34h Low (1) 114
Image File Format Selection 304 F0h 30h JPEG 115
Image Rotation 665 F1h 99h 0 116
Bits per Pixel (BPP) 303 F0h 2Fh 8 BPP 117
Signature Capture 93 5Dh Disable 118
413
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Signature Capture Image File 313 F0h 39h JPEG 119

Format Selection
Signature Capture Bits per Pixel 314 F0h 3Ah 8 BPP 120
(BPP)
Signature Capture Width 366 F4h F0h 6Eh 400 121
Signature Capture Height 367 F4h F0h 6Fh 100 121
Signature Capture JPEG Quality 421 F0h A5h 65 121
Enable/Disable All Code Types 131
1D Symbologies
UPC/EAN/JAN
UPC-A 1 01h Enable 131
UPC-E 2 02h Enable 132
UPC-E1 12 0Ch Disable 132
Bookland EAN 83 53h Disable 134
Bookland ISBN Format 576 F1h 40h ISBN-10 135
ISSN EAN 617 F1h 69h Disable 136
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN 16 10h Ignore 137

Supplementals
(2 and 5 digits)
User-Programmable 000 140

Supplementals 579 F1h 43h
Supplemental 2:
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental 80 50h 10 140

Redundancy
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN 672 F1h A0h Combined 141

Supplemental
AIM ID
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit 40 28h Enable 142
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit 41 29h Enable 142
414
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit 42 2Ah Enable 143
UPC-A Preamble 34 22h System Character 144
UPC-E Preamble 35 23h System Character 145
UPC-E1 Preamble 36 24h System Character 146
Convert UPC-E to UPC-A 37 25h Disable 147
Convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A 38 26h Disable 147
EAN/JAN Zero Extend 39 27h Disable 148
UCC Coupon Extended Code 85 55h Disable 148
Coupon Report 730 F1h DAh New Coupon Format 149
UPC Reduced Quiet Zone 1289 F8h 05h 09h Disable 150
Code 128
Set Length(s) for Code 128 209, 210 D1h, D2h Any Length 151
GS1-128 (formerly UCC/EAN-128) 14 0Eh Enable 152
ISBT 128 84 54h Enable 153
ISBT Concatenation 577 F1h 41h Disable 153
Check ISBT Table 578 F1h 42h Enable 154
ISBT Concatenation Redundancy 223 DFh 10 155
Code 128 <FNC4> 1254 F8h 04h E6h Honor 155
Code 128 Security Level 751 F1h EFh Security Level 1 156
Code 39
Trioptic Code 39 13 0Dh Disable 158
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 86 56h Disable 158

(Italian Pharmacy Code)
Code 32 Prefix 231 E7h Disable 159
Set Length(s) for Code 39 18, 19 12h, 13h 1 to 55 159
415
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit 43 2Bh Disable 161
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion 17 11h Disable 162
Code 39 Security Level 750 F1h EEh Security Level 1 163
Code 93
Set Length(s) for Code 93 26, 27 1Ah, 1Bh 1 to 55 165
Code 11
Code 11 10 0Ah Disable 167
Set Lengths for Code 11 28, 29 1Ch, 1Dh 4 to 55 167
Transmit Code 11 Check Digit(s) 47 2Fh Disable 170
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 6 06h Enable 170
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 22, 23 16h, 17h 6 to 55 171
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification 49 31h Disable 172
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit 44 2Ch Disable 173
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 82 52h Disable 173
Febraban 1750 F8h 06h D6h Disable 174
I 2 of 5 Security Level 1121 F8h 04h 61h Security Level 1 175
I 2 of 5 Reduced Quiet Zone 1210 F8h 04h BAh Disable 176
Discrete 2 of 5 5 05h Disable 176
Set Length(s) for D 2 of 5 20, 21 14h 15h 1 to 55 177
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar 7 07h Enable 179
416
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Set Lengths for Codabar 24, 25 18h, 19h 4 to 55 179
CLSI Editing 54 36h Disable 181
NOTIS Editing 55 37h Disable 181
Codabar Security Level 1776 F8h 06h F0h Security Level 1 182
Codabar Upper or Lower Case 855 F2h 57h Upper Case 183
Start/
Stop Characters Detection
Codabar Mod 16 Check Digit 1784 F8h 06h F8h Disable 183
Verification
Transmit Codabar Check Digit 704 F1h C0h Disable 184
MSI
MSI 11 0Bh Disable 184
Set Length(s) for MSI 30, 31 1Eh, 1Fh 4 to 55 185
MSI Check Digits 50 32h One MSI Check Digit 187
Transmit MSI Check Digit 46 2Eh Disable 187
MSI Check Digit Algorithm 51 33h Mod 10/Mod 10 189
MSI Reduced Quiet Zone 1392 F8h 05h 70h Disable 189
Chinese 2 of 5
Chinese 2 of 5 408 F0h 98h Disable 190
Matrix 2 of 5
Matrix 2 of 5 618 F1h 6Ah Disable 190
Matrix 2 of 5 Lengths 619 F1h 6Bh 4 to 55 191

620 F1h 6Ch
Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 622 F1h 6Eh Disable 193
Transmit Matrix 2 of 5 Check Digit 623 F1h 6Fh Disable 193
Korean 3 of 5
Korean 3 of 5 581 F1h 45h Disable 194
Inverse 1D
Inverse 1D 586 F1h 4Ah Regular 194
417
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional 338 F0h 52h Enable 196

(formerly GS1 DataBar-14), GS1
DataBar Truncated, GS1 DataBar
Stacked, GS1 DataBar Stacked
Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited 339 F0h 53h Enable 197
GS1 DataBar Expanded, GS1 340 F0h 54h Enable 197

DataBar Expanded Stacked
Convert GS1 DataBar to 397 F0h 8Dh Disable 198

UPC/EAN/JAN
GS1 DataBar Security Level 1706 F8h 06h AAh Level 1 199
GS1 DataBar Limited Margin Check 728 F1h D8h Level 3 200
Redundancy Level 78 4Eh 1 201
Security Level 77 4Dh 1 203
1D Quiet Zone Level 1288 F8h 05h 08h 1 204
Intercharacter Gap Size 381 F0h 7Dh Normal 205
Composite Codes
Composite CC-C 341 F0h 55h Disable 205
Composite CC-A/B 342 F0h 56h Disable 206
Composite TLC-39 371 F0h 73h Disable 206
Composite Inverse 1113 F8h 04h 59h Regular Only 206
UPC Composite Mode 344 F0h 58h UPC Never Linked 208
Composite Beep Mode 398 F0h 8Eh Beep As Each Code Type is 209
Decoded
GS1-128 Emulation Mode for 427 F0h ABh Disable 209

418
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
2D Symbologies
PDF417 15 0Fh Enable 210
MicroPDF417 227 E3h Disable 210
Code 128 Emulation 123 7Bh Disable 211
Data Matrix 292 F0h 24h Enable 212
GS1 Data Matrix 1336 F8h 05h 38h Disable 212
Data Matrix Inverse 588 F1h 4Ch Inverse Autodetect 213
Decode Data Matrix Mirror Images 537 F1h 19h Auto 214
Maxicode 294 F0h 26h Disable 215
QR Code 293 F0h 25h Enable 215
GS1 QR 1343 F8h 05h 3Fh Enable 216
MicroQR 573 F1h 3Dh Enable 216
Linked QR Mode 1847 737h Linked QR Only 217
Aztec 574 F1h 3Eh Enable 218
Aztec Inverse 589 F1h 4Dh Inverse Autodetect 218
Han Xin 1167 F8h 04h 8Fh Disable 219
Han Xin Inverse 1168 F8h 04h 90h Regular 219
Grid Matrix 1718 F8h 06h B6h Disable 220
Grid Matrix Inverse 1719 F8h 06h B7h Regular Only 220
Grid Matrix Mirror 1736 F8h 06h C8h Regular Only 221
DotCode 1906 F8 07 72h Disable 222
DotCode Inverse 1907 F8 07 73h Inverse Autodetect 223
DotCode Mirrored 1908 F8 07 74h Autodetect 224
DotCode Prioritize 1937 F8 07 91h Enable 225
Macro PDF
Flush Macro PDF Buffer N/A N/A N/A 226
Abort Macro PDF Entry N/A N/A N/A 226
419
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Postal Codes
US Postnet 89 59h Disable 226
US Planet 90 5Ah Disable 227
Transmit US Postal Check Digit 95 5Fh Enable 227
UK Postal 91 5Bh Disable 228
Transmit UK Postal Check Digit 96 60h Enable 228
Japan Postal 290 F0h 22h Disable 229
Australia Post 291 F0h 23h Disable 229
Australia Post Format 718 F1h CEh Autodiscriminate 230
Netherlands KIX Code 326 F0h 46h Disable 231
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent 592 F1h 50h Disable 231

Mail
UPU FICS Postal 611 F1h 63h Disable 232
Mailmark 1337 F8h 05h 39h Disable 232
USB Host Parameters
USB Device Type N/A N/A USB Keyboard HID 237
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) Status N/A N/A Enable 239

Handshaking
USB Keystroke Delay N/A N/A No Delay 239
USB Caps Lock Override N/A N/A Disable 240
Barcodes with Unknown N/A N/A Send Barcodes with 240

Characters Unknown Characters
USB Convert Unknown to Code 39 N/A N/A Disable 241
USB Fast HID N/A N/A Enable 241
USB Polling Interval N/A N/A 3 msec 242
Keypad Emulation N/A N/A Enable 244
Quick Keypad Emulation N/A N/A Enable 244
Keypad Emulation with Leading N/A N/A Enable 245

Zero
USB FN1 Substitution N/A N/A Disable 245
420
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Function Key Mapping N/A N/A Disable 246
Simulated Caps Lock N/A N/A Disable 246
Convert Case N/A N/A None 247
USB Static CDC N/A N/A Enable 248
CDC Beep on <BEL> N/A N/A Enable 248
TGCS (IBM) USB Beep Directive N/A N/A Ignore 248
TGCS (IBM) USB Barcode N/A N/A Ignore 249

Configuration Directive
TGCS (IBM) USB Specification N/A N/A Version 2.2 249

Version
SSI Host Parameters
Select SSI Host N/A N/A N/A 262
Baud Rate 156 9Ch 9600 262
Parity 158 9Eh None 264
Check Parity 151 97h Disable 265
Stop Bits 157 9Dh 1 265
Software Handshaking 159 9Fh ACK/NAK 266
Host RTS Line State 154 9Ah Low 267
Decode Data Packet Format 238 EEh Send Raw Decode Data 268
Host Serial Response Timeout 155 9Bh Low - 2 Seconds 269
Host Character Timeout 239 EFh Low - 200 msec 270
Multipacket Option 334 F0h 4Eh Multipacket Option 1 271
Interpacket Delay 335 F0h 4Fh Minimum - 0 msec 272
Event Reporting
Decode Event 256 F0h 00h Disable 273
Boot Up Event 258 F0h 02h Disable 274
Parameter Event 259 F0h 03h Disable 275
RS-232 Host Types N/A N/A Standard 281
Baud Rate N/A N/A 9600 283
421
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Parity N/A N/A None 284
Stop Bits N/A N/A 1 Stop Bit 284
Data Bits N/A N/A 8-bit 285
Check Receive Errors N/A N/A Enable 285
Hardware Handshaking N/A N/A None 286
Software Handshaking N/A N/A None 288
Host Serial Response Timeout N/A N/A 2 Seconds 290
RTS Line State N/A N/A Low RTS 291
Beep on <BEL> N/A N/A Disable 291
Intercharacter Delay N/A N/A 0 msec 292
Nixdorf Beep/LED Options N/A N/A Normal Operation 293
Barcodes with Unknown N/A N/A Send Barcode With 293

IBM 468X/469X Host Parameters
Port Address N/A N/A None 298
Convert Unknown to Code 39 N/A N/A Disable 299
RS-485 Beep Directive N/A N/A Ignore 299
RS-485 Barcode Configuration N/A N/A Ignore 300

Directive
IBM-485 Specification Version N/A N/A Original Specification 300
Keyboard Wedge Host Type N/A N/A IBM AT Notebook 304
Barcodes with Unknown N/A N/A Send Barcodes with 304

Keystroke Delay N/A N/A No Delay 305
Intra-keystroke Delay N/A N/A Disable 305
Alternate Numeric Keypad N/A N/A Enable 306

Emulation
Quick Keypad Emulation N/A N/A Enable 306
Simulated Caps Lock N/A N/A Disable 307
422
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Caps Lock Override N/A N/A Disable 308
Convert Case N/A N/A Do Not Convert 308
Function Key Mapping N/A N/A Disable 309
FN1 Substitution N/A N/A Disable 309
Send Make and Break N/A N/A Send Make and Break Scan 310
Codes
OCR-A 680 F1h A8h Disable 314
OCR-A Variant 684 F1h ACh OCR-A Full ASCII 315
OCR-B 681 F1h A9h Disable 316
OCR-B Variant 685 F1h ADh OCR-B Full ASCII 317
MICR E13B 682 F1h AAh Disable 321
US Currency Serial Number 683 F1h ABh Disable 322
OCR Orientation 687 F1h AFh 0o 322
OCR Lines 691 F1h B3h 1 324
OCR Minimum Characters 689 F1h B1h 3 324
OCR Maximum Characters 690 F1h B2h 100 325
OCR Subset 686 F1h AEh Selected font variant 325
OCR Quiet Zone 695 F1h B7h 50 326
OCR Template 547 F1h 23h 99999999 326
OCR Check Digit Modulus 688 F1h B0h 1 336
OCR Check Digit Multiplier 700 F1h BCh 121212121212 336
OCR Check Digit Validation 694 F1h B6h None 337
Inverse OCR 856 F2h 58h Regular 343
OCR Redundancy 1770 F8h 06h EAh Level 1 344
Intelligent Document Capture (IDC) Parameters
IDC Operating Mode 594 F1h 52h Off 350
IDC Symbology 655 F1h 8Fh 001 351
IDC X Coordinate 596 F4h F1h 54h -151 352
423
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
IDC Y Coordinate 597 F4h F1h 55h -050 352
IDC Width 598 F1h 56h 0300 353
IDC Height 599 F1h 57h 0050 353
IDC Aspect 595 F1h 53h 000 354
IDC File Format Selector 601 F1h 59h JPEG 354
IDC Bits Per Pixel 602 F1h 5Ah 8 BPP 355
IDC JPEG Quality 603 F1h 5Bh 065 355
IDC Find Box Outline 727 F1h D7h Disable 356
IDC Minimum Text Length 656 F1h 90h 00 356
IDC Maximum Text Length 657 F1h 91h 00 357
IDC Captured Image Brighten 654 F1h 8Eh Enable 357
IDC Captured Image Sharpen 658 F1h 92h Enable 358
IDC Border Type 829 F2h 3Dh None 359
IDC Delay Time 830 F2h 3Eh 000 360
IDC Zoom Limit 651 F1h 8Bh 000 360
IDC Maximum Rotation 652 F1h 8Ch 00 361
Digimarc Digital Watermarks
Digimarc Digital Watermarks/DW 1687 F8h 06h 97h Enable 366
DL Parsing Parameters
Driver’s License Parsing N/A N/A No Driver’s License Parsing 370
Parsing Driver’s License Data N/A N/A N/A 371

Fields
Driver’s License Parse Field N/A N/A N/A 372

Barcodes
AAMVA Parse Field Barcodes N/A N/A N/A 374
Parser Version ID Barcode N/A N/A N/A 383
Output Gender as M or F N/A N/A N/A 384
Date Format N/A N/A CCYYMMDD 385
No Separator N/A N/A N/A 386
424
Parameter Defaults

Parameter SSI Page
Parameter Default
Send Keystroke N/A N/A N/A 387

Control Characters
Keyboard Characters
Parsing Rule Example N/A N/A N/A 405
Embedded Driver’s License N/A N/A N/A 409

Parsing ADF Example
425
Numeric Barcodes
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the barcode below.
Cancel
Numeric Barcodes
For parameters requiring specific numeric values, scan the appropriately numbered barcode(s).
426
Numeric Barcodes
Numeric Barcodes (continued)
427
Cancel
To correct an error or change a selection, scan the following barcode.
Cancel
Space
428
Alphanumeric Barcodes (continued)
429
&
430
<
>
431
432
NOTE: Do not confuse the following barcodes with those on the numeric keypad.
433
End of Message
Cancel
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
Introduction
NOTE: For the Keyboard Wedge Interface, Code 39 Full ASCII interprets the barcode special character ($ + %
/) preceding a Code 39 character and assigns an ASCII character value to the pair. For example, if you
enable Code 39 Full ASCII and scan +B, it transmits as b, %J as ?, and %V as @.
Scanning ABC%I outputs the keystroke equivalent of ABC >.
Table 29 ASCII Character Set

ASCII Value Full ASCII Code 39 ASCII Character
Keystroke
(Prefix/Suffix Value) Encode Char (Applies to RS-232 Only)
1000 %U CTRL 2 NUL
1001 $A CTRL A SOH
1002 $B CTRL B STX
1003 $C CTRL C ETX
1004 $D CTRL D EOT
1005 $E CTRL E ENQ
1006 $F CTRL F ACK
1007 $G CTRL G BELL
1
1008 $H CTRL H/BACKSPACE BCKSPC
1
1009 $I CTRL I/HORIZONTAL TAB HORIZ TAB
1010 $J CTRL J LF/NW LN
1011 $K CTRL K VT
1012 $L CTRL L FF
1013 $M CTRL M/ENTER1 CR/ENTER
1014 $N CTRL N SO
1Thekeystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key
Mapping on page 309. Otherwise, the unbold keystroke transmits.
445
Table 29 ASCII Character Set (Continued)

Keystroke
1015 $O CTRL O SI
1016 $P CTRL P DLE
1017 $Q CTRL Q DC1/XON
1018 $R CTRL R DC2
1019 $S CTRL S DC3/XOFF
1020 $T CTRL T DC4
1021 $U CTRL U NAK
1022 $V CTRL V SYN
1023 $W CTRL W ETB
1024 $X CTRL X CAN
1025 $Y CTRL Y EM
1026 $Z CTRL Z SUB
1027 %A CTRL [ ESC
1028 %B CTRL \ FS
1029 %C CTRL ] GS
1030 %D CTRL 6 RS
1031 %E CTRL - US
1032 Space Space Space
1033 /A ! !
1034 /B “ "
1035 /C # #
1036 /D $ $
1037 /E % %
1038 /F & &
1039 /G ‘ ‘
1040 /H ( (
1041 /I ) )
1042 /J * *
1043 /K + +
1
The keystroke in bold transmits only if you enabled Function Key Mapping on page 246 or Function Key
446

Keystroke
1044 /L , ,
1045 - - -
1046 . . .
1047 /o / /
1048 0 0 0
1049 1 1 1
1050 2 2 2
1051 3 3 3
1052 4 4 4
1053 5 5 5
1054 6 6 6
1055 7 7 7
1056 8 8 8
1057 9 9 9
1058 /Z : :
1059 %F ; ;
1060 %G < <
1061 %H = =
1062 %I > >
1063 %J ? ?
1064 %V @ @
1065 A A A
1066 B B B
1067 C C C
1068 D D D
1069 E E E
1070 F F F
1071 G G G
1072 H H H
1
447

Keystroke
1073 I I I
1074 J J J
1075 K K K
1076 L L L
1077 M M M
1078 N N N
1079 O O O
1080 P P P
1081 Q Q Q
1082 R R R
1083 S S S
1084 T T T
1085 U U U
1086 V V V
1087 W W W
1088 X X X
1089 Y Y Y
1090 Z Z Z
1091 %K [ [
1092 %L \ \
1093 %M ] ]
1094 %N ^ ^
1095 %O _ _
1096 %W ‘ `
1097 +A a a
1098 +B b b
1099 +C c c
1100 +D d d
1101 +E e e
1
448

Keystroke
1102 +F f f
1103 +G g g
1104 +H h h
1105 +I i i
1106 +J j j
1107 +K k k
1108 +L l l
1109 +M m m
1110 +N n n
1111 +O o o
1112 +P p p
1113 +Q q q
1114 +R r r
1115 +S s s
1116 +T t t
1117 +U u u
1118 +V v v
1119 +W w w
1120 +X x x
1121 +Y y y
1122 +Z z z
1123 %P { {
1124 %Q I |
1125 %R } }
1126 %S ~ ~
1127 Undefined
7013 ENTER
1
449
Table 30 ALT Key Character Set

ALT Keys Keystroke
2064 ALT 2
2065 ALT A
2066 ALT B
2067 ALT C
2068 ALT D
2069 ALT E
2070 ALT F
2071 ALT G
2072 ALT H
2073 ALT I
2074 ALT J
2075 ALT K
2076 ALT L
2077 ALT M
2078 ALT N
2079 ALT O
2080 ALT P
2081 ALT Q
2082 ALT R
2083 ALT S
2084 ALT T
2085 ALT U
2086 ALT V
2087 ALT W
2088 ALT X
2089 ALT Y
2090 ALT Z
450
Table 31 GUI Key Character Set

GUI Key Keystroke
3000 Right Control Key
3048 GUI 0
3049 GUI 1
3050 GUI 2
3051 GUI 3
3052 GUI 4
3053 GUI 5
3054 GUI 6
3055 GUI 7
3056 GUI 8
3057 GUI 9
3065 GUI A
3066 GUI B
3067 GUI C
3068 GUI D
3069 GUI E
3070 GUI F
3071 GUI G
3072 GUI H
3073 GUI I
3074 GUI J
3075 GUI K
3076 GUI L
3077 GUI M
3078 GUI N
3079 GUI O
3080 GUI P
3081 GUI Q
3082 GUI R
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple ™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar.
Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
451
Table 31 GUI Key Character Set (Continued)

GUI Key Keystroke
3083 GUI S
3084 GUI T
3085 GUI U
3086 GUI V
3087 GUI W
3088 GUI X
3089 GUI Y
3090 GUI Z
Note: GUI Shift Keys - The Apple ™ iMac keyboard has an apple key on either side of the space bar.
Windows-based systems have a GUI key to the left of the left ALT key, and to the right of the right ALT key.
Table 32 PF Key Character Set

PF Keys Keystroke
4001 PF 1
4002 PF 2
4003 PF 3
4004 PF 4
4005 PF 5
4006 PF 6
4007 PF 7
4008 PF 8
4009 PF 9
4010 PF 10
4011 PF 11
4012 PF 12
4013 PF 13
4014 PF 14
4015 PF 15
4016 PF 16
452
Table 33 F Key Character Set

F Keys Keystroke
5001 F1
5002 F2
5003 F3
5004 F4
5005 F5
5006 F6
5007 F7
5008 F8
5009 F9
5010 F 10
5011 F 11
5012 F 12
5013 F 13
5014 F 14
5015 F 15
5016 F 16
5017 F 17
5018 F 18
5019 F 19
5020 F 20
5021 F 21
5022 F 22
5023 F 23
5024 F 24
Table 34 Numeric Key Character Set

Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6042 *
6043 +
6044 Undefined
6045 -
453
Table 34 Numeric Key Character Set (Continued)

Numeric Keypad Keystroke
6046 .
6047 /
6048 0
6049 1
6050 2
6051 3
6052 4
6053 5
6054 6
6055 7
6056 8
6057 9
6058 Enter
6059 Num Lock
Table 35 Extended Key Character Set

Extended Keypad Keystroke
7001 Break
7002 Delete
7003 Pg Up
7004 End
7005 Pg Dn
7006 Pause
7007 Scroll Lock
7008 Backspace
7009 Tab
7010 Print Screen
7011 Insert
7012 Home
7013 Enter
7014 Escape
454
Table 35 Extended Key Character Set (Continued)

Extended Keypad Keystroke
7015 Up Arrow
7016 Dn Arrow
7017 Left Arrow
7018 Right Arrow
455
Symbol Code Identifiers
Table 36 Symbol Code Characters

Code Character Code Type
A UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, EAN-8, EAN-13
B Code 39, Code 32
C Codabar
D Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated

E Code 93
F Interleaved 2 of 5
G Discrete 2 of 5, or Discrete 2 of 5 IATA
H Code 11
J MSI
K GS1-128
L Bookland EAN
M Trioptic Code 39
N Coupon Code
R GS1 DataBar Family
S Matrix 2 of 5
T UCC Composite, TLC 39
U Chinese 2 of 5
V Korean 3 of 5
X ISSN EAN, PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
z Aztec, Aztec Rune

P00 Data Matrix
456
Table 36 Symbol Code Characters (Continued)

P01 QR Code, MicroQR
P02 Maxicode
P03 US Postnet
P04 US Planet
P05 Japan Postal
P06 UK Postal
P08 Netherlands KIX Code
P09 Australia Post
P0A USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail
P0B UPU FICS Postal
P0C Mailmark
P0D Grid Matrix, Grid Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror
P0G GS1 Data Matrix
P0H Han Xin
P0Q GS1 QR
P0X Signature Capture
AIM Code Identifiers

Each AIM Code Identifier contains the three-character string ]cm where:
] = Flag Character (ASCII 93)

c = Code Character (see Table 37)
m = Modifier Character (see Table 38)
Table 37 Aim Code Characters

A Code 39, Code 39 Full ASCII, Code 32
C Code 128, ISBT 128, ISBT 128 Concatenated, GS1-128,

Coupon (Code 128 portion)
d Data Matrix, GS1 Data Matrix
E UPC/EAN, Coupon (UPC portion)
e GS1 DataBar Family
F Codabar
457
Table 37 Aim Code Characters (Continued)

G Code 93
H Code 11
h Han Xin
I Interleaved 2 of 5
L PDF417, Macro PDF417, Micro PDF417
L2 TLC 39
M MSI
Q QR Code, MicroQR, GS1 QR
S Discrete 2 of 5, IATA 2 of 5
U Maxicode
z Aztec, Aztec Rune

X Bookland EAN, ISSN EAN, Trioptic Code 39, Chinese 2 of 5,
Matrix 2 of 5, Korean 3 of 5, US Postnet, US Planet, UK Postal, Japan Postal,
Australia Post, Netherlands KIX Code, USPS 4CB/One Code/ Intelligent Mail, UPU
FICS Postal, Mailmark, Signature Capture
]g Grid Matrix, Grid Matrix Inverse, Grid Matrix Mirror
The modifier character is the sum of the applicable option values based on Table 38.
Table 38 Modifier Characters

Code Type Option Value Option
Code 39 0 No check character or Full ASCII processing.
1 Reader has checked one check character.
3 Reader has checked and stripped check character.
4 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion.
5 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked

one check character.
7 Reader has performed Full ASCII character conversion and checked

and stripped check character.
Example: A Full ASCII barcode with check character W, A+I+MI+DW, is transmitted as

]A7AIMID where 7 = (3+4).
Trioptic Code 39 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Trioptic barcode 412356 is transmitted as ]X0412356
458
Table 38 Modifier Characters (Continued)

Code 128 0 Standard data packet, no Function code 1 in first symbol position.
1 Function code 1 in first symbol character position.
2 Function code 1 in second symbol character position.
Example: A Code (EAN) 128 barcode with Function 1 character FNC1 in the first position,
AIMID is transmitted as ]C1AIMID
I 2 of 5 0 No check digit processing.
1 Reader has validated check digit.
3 Reader has validated and stripped check digit.
Example: An I 2 of 5 barcode without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]I04123
Codabar 0 No check digit processing.
1 Reader has checked check digit.
3 Reader has stripped check digit before transmission.
Example: A Codabar barcode without check digit, 4123, is transmitted as ]F04123
Code 93 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Code 93 barcode 012345678905 is transmitted as ]G0012345678905
MSI 0 Check digits are sent.
1 No check digit is sent.
Example: An MSI barcode 4123, with a single check digit checked, is transmitted as
]M14123
D 2 of 5 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A D 2 of 5 barcode 4123, is transmitted as ]S04123
UPC/EAN 0 Standard data packet in full EAN format, i.e., 13 digits for UPC-A,
UPC-E, and EAN-13 (not including supplemental data).
1 Two digit supplemental data only.
2 Five digit supplemental data only.
3 Combined data packet comprising 13 digits from EAN-13, UPC-A or

UPC-E symbol and 2 or 5 digits from supplemental symbol.
4 EAN-8 data packet.
Example: A UPC-A barcode 012345678905 is transmitted as ]E00012345678905
Bookland EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: A Bookland EAN barcode 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
ISSN EAN 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Example: An ISSN EAN barcode 123456789X is transmitted as ]X0123456789X
459

Code 11 0 Single check digit
1 Two check digits
3 Check characters validated but not transmitted.
GS1 DataBar No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0. GS1 DataBar
Family Omnidirectional and GS1 DataBar Limited transmit with an Application
Identifier “01”.
Note: In GS1-128 emulation mode, GS1 DataBar is transmitted using
Code 128 rules (i.e., ]C1).
Example: A GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional barcode 0110012345678902 is transmitted as

]e00110012345678902.
EAN.UCC Native mode transmission.

Composites (GS1 Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
DataBar, GS1-128,
2D portion of UPC 0 Standard data packet.
composite)
1 Data packet containing the data following an encoded symbol
separator character.
2 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism

character. The data packet does not support the ECI protocol.
3 Data packet containing the data following an escape mechanism

character. The data packet supports the ECI protocol.
GS1-128 emulation
Note: UPC portion of composite is transmitted using UPC rules.
1 Data packet is a GS1-128 symbol (i.e., data is preceded with ]JC1).
PDF417, 0 Reader set to conform to protocol defined in 1994 PDF417 symbology

Micro PDF417 specifications. Note: When this option is transmitted, the receiver
cannot reliably determine whether ECIs have been invoked or whether
data byte 92DEC has been doubled in transmission.
1 Reader set to follow the ECI protocol (Extended Channel

Interpretation). All data characters 92DEC are doubled.
2 Reader set for Basic Channel operation (no escape character

transmission protocol). Data characters 92DEC are not doubled. Note:
When decoders are set to this mode, unbuffered Macro symbols and
symbols requiring the decoder to convey ECI escape sequences
cannot be transmitted.
3 The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is

903-907, 912, 914, 915.
4 The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in

the range 908-909.
5 The barcode contains a GS1-128 symbol, and the first codeword is in

the range 910-911.
Example: A PDF417 barcode ABCD, with no transmission protocol enabled, is transmitted

as ]L2ABCD.
460

Data Matrix 0 ECC 000-140, not supported.
1 ECC 200.
2 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
3 ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position.
4 ECC 200, ECI protocol implemented.
5 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position, ECI protocol implemented.
6 ECC 200, FNC1 in second or sixth position, ECI protocol

implemented.
GS1 Data Matrix 2 ECC 200, FNC1 in first or fifth position.
MaxiCode 0 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5.
1 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3.
2 Symbol in Mode 4 or 5, ECI protocol implemented.
3 Symbol in Mode 2 or 3, ECI protocol implemented in secondary

message.
QR Code 0 Model 1 symbol.
1 Model 2 / MicroQR symbol, ECI protocol not implemented.
2 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented.
3 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first

position.
4 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in first

position.
5 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in

second position.
6 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol implemented, FNC1 implied in second

position.
GS1 QR 3 Model 2 symbol, ECI protocol not implemented, FNC1 implied in first
position.
Aztec 0 Aztec symbol.
C Aztec Rune symbol.

Han Xin 0 Generic data, no special features are set. The transmitted data does
not follow the AIM ECI protocol.
1 ECI protocol enabled. There is at least one ECI mode encoded.

Transmitted data must follow the AIM ECI protocol.
461

Grid Matrix, Grid 0 No options specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
Matrix Inverse,
Grid Matrix Mirror
Mailmark 0 No option specified at this time. Always transmit 0.
462
Communication Protocol
Functionality
Functionality Supported via Communication (Cable) Interface

Table 39 lists supported scanner functionality by communication protocol.
Table 39 Communication Interface Functionality

Functionality
Communication Interfaces Data Remote Image and Video
Transmission Management Transmission
USB
HID Keyboard Emulation Supported Not Available Not Available
CDC COM Port Emulation Supported Not Available Not Available
SSI over CDC COM Port Emulation Supported Supported Supported
IBM Table-top USB Supported Supported Not Available
IBM Hand-held USB Supported Supported Not Available
USB OPOS Hand-held Supported Supported Not Available
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) without Imaging Supported Supported Not Available
Interface
Symbol Native API (SNAPI) with Imaging Supported Supported Supported

Interface
RS-232
Standard RS-232 Supported Not Available Not Available
ICL RS-232 Supported Not Available Not Available
Fujitsu RS-232 Supported Not Available Not Available
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode A Supported Not Available Not Available
Wincor-Nixdorf RS-232 Mode B Supported Not Available Not Available
Olivetti ORS4500 Supported Not Available Not Available
Omron Supported Not Available Not Available
463
Communication Protocol Functionality
Table 39 Communication Interface Functionality (Continued)

Functionality
Communication Interfaces Data Remote Image and Video
Transmission Management Transmission
CUTE Supported Not Available Not Available
OPOS/JPOS Supported Not Available Not Available
SSI Supported Supported Supported
IBM 4690
Hand-held Scanner Emulation (Port 9B) Supported Not Available Not Available
Table-top Scanner Emulation (Port 17) Supported Supported Not Available
Non-IBM Scanner Emulation (Port 5B) Supported Supported Not Available
Keyboard Wedge
IBM PC/AT & IBM PC Compatibles Supported Not Available Not Available
IBM AT Notebook Supported Not Available Not Available
464
Country Codes
Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for programming the keyboard to interface with a USB or Keyboard Wedge host.
The host powers the scanner. For host setup information, see USB Interface and Keyboard Wedge Interface.
To select a code page for the country keyboard type, see Country Code Pages.
Throughout the programming barcode menus, default values are indicated with asterisks (*).
*Indicates Default *US English (North American) Feature/Option
465
Country Codes
USB and Keyboard Wedge Country Keyboard Types (Country Codes)

Scan the barcode corresponding to the keyboard type. For a USB host, this setting applies only to the USB
Keyboard (HID) device. If the keyboard type is not listed, see Keypad Emulation on page 244 for the USB HID
host. For a keyboard wedge host, see Alternate Numeric Keypad Emulation on page 306.
NOTE: When changing USB country keyboard types the scanner automatically resets and issues the standard
startup beep sequences.
NOTE: For best results when using international keyboards, enable Quick Keypad Emulation on page 244.
IMPORTANT:
• Some country keyboard barcode types are specific to certain Windows operating systems (that is, XP
and Windows 7 or higher). Barcodes requiring a specific Windows OS are noted in the barcode
captions.
• Use the French International barcode for Belgian French keyboards.
* US English (North American)
US English (Mac)
Albanian
Arabic (101)
466
Country Codes
Country Codes (Continued)
Arabic (102)
Arabic (102) AZERTY
Azeri (Latin)
Azeri (Cyrillic)
Belarusian
Bosnian (Latin)
Bosnian (Cyrillic)
467
Country Codes
Bulgarian (Latin)
Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter)

(Bulgarian -Windows XP
Typewriter - Windows 7 or higher)
Canadian French Win7
Canadian French (Legacy)
Canadian Multilingual Standard
Chinese (ASCII)
468
Country Codes
Chinese (Simplified)*
Chinese (Traditional)*
*For CJK keyboard types, see CJK Decode Control.
Croatian
Czech
Czech (Programmer)
Czech (QWERTY)
Danish
469
Country Codes
Dutch (Netherlands)
Estonian
Faeroese
Finnish
French (France)
French International
(Belgian French)
French (Canada) 95/98
470
Country Codes
French (Canada) 2000/XP*

*There is also a country code barcode for Canadian
Multilingual Standard on page 468. Be sure to select the
appropriate barcode for your host system.
Galician
German
Greek Latin
Greek (220) Latin
Greek (319) Latin
Greek
471
Country Codes
Greek (220)
Greek (319)
Greek Polytonic
Hebrew Israel
Hungarian
Hungarian_101KEY
Icelandic
472
Country Codes
Irish
Italian
Italian (142)
Japanese (ASCII)
Japanese (SHIFT-JIS)*
Kazakh
Korean (ASCII)
473
Country Codes
Korean (Hangul)*
Kyrgyz
Latin American
Latvian
Latvian (QWERTY)
Lithuanian
Lithuanian (IBM)
474
Country Codes
Macedonian (FYROM)
Maltese_47KEY
Mongolian
Norwegian
Polish (214)
Polish (Programmer)
Portuguese (Brazil)
(Windows XP)
475
Country Codes
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT)
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2)
Portuguese (Portugal)
Romanian
(Windows XP)
Romanian (Legacy)
(Windows 7 or higher)
Romanian (Standard)
476
Country Codes
Romanian (Programmer)
Russian
Russian (Typewriter)
Serbian (Latin)
Serbian (Cyrillic)
Slovak
477
Country Codes
Slovak (QWERTY)
Slovenian
Spanish
Spanish (Variation)
Swedish
Swiss French
Swiss German
478
Country Codes
Tatar
Thai (Kedmanee)
Turkish F
Turkish Q
UK English
Ukrainian
US Dvorak
479
Country Codes
US Dvorak Left
US Dvorak Right
US International
Uzbek
Vietnamese
480
Country Code Pages
Introduction
This chapter provides barcodes for selecting code pages for the country keyboard type selected in Country Codes.
If the default code page in Table 40 is appropriate for your selected country keyboard type, you do not need to
scan a country code page barcode.
NOTE: ADF rules can also specify a code page based on the symbology and other ADF criteria. Refer to the
Advanced Data Formatting Programmer Guide.
Country Code Page Defaults

Table 40 lists the code page default for each country keyboard.
Table 40 Country Code Page Defaults

Country Keyboard Code Page Default
US English (North American) Windows 1252
US English (Mac) Mac CP10000
Albanian Windows 1250
Arabic 101 Windows 1256
Arabic 102 Windows 1256
Arabic 102 AZERTY Windows 1256
Azeri Latin Windows 1254
Azeri Cyrillic Windows 1251
Belarusian Windows 1251
Bosnian Latin Windows 1250
Bosnian Cyrillic Windows 1251
Bulgarian Latin Windows 1250
Bulgarian Cyrillic Windows 1251
481
Country Code Pages
Table 40 Country Code Page Defaults (Continued)

Canadian French Win7 Windows 1252
Canadian French (Legacy) Windows 1252
Canadian Multilingual Windows 1252
Croatian Windows 1250
Chinese ASCII Windows 1252
Chinese (Simplified) Windows 936, GBK
Chinese (Traditional) Windows 950, Big5
Czech Windows 1250
Czech Programmers Windows 1250
Czech QWERTY Windows 1250
Danish Windows 1252
Dutch Netherland Windows 1252
Estonian Windows 1257
Faeroese Windows 1252
Finnish Windows 1252
French (France) Windows 1252
French (Canada) 95/98 Windows 1252
French (Canada) 2000/XP Windows 1252
French International (Belgian French) Windows 1252
Galician Windows 1252
German Windows 1252
Greek Latin Windows 1252
Greek220 Latin Windows 1253
Greek319 Latin Windows 1252
Greek Windows 1253
Greek220 Windows 1253
Greek319 Windows 1253
Greek Polytonic Windows 1253
Hebrew Israel Windows 1255
Hungarian Windows 1250
Hungarian_101KEY Windows 1250
482
Country Code Pages

Icelandic Windows 1252
Irish Windows 1252
Italian Windows 1252
Italian_142 Windows 1252
Japanese ASCII Windows 1252
Japanese (Shift-JIS) Windows 932, Shift-JIS
Kazakh Windows 1251
Korean ASCII Windows 1252
Korean (Hangul) Windows 949, Hangul
Kyrgyz Cyrillic Windows 1251
Latin America Windows 1252
Latvian Windows 1257
Latvian QWERTY Windows 1257
Lithuanian Windows 1257
Lithuanian_IBM Windows 1257
Macedonian -FYROM Windows 1251
Maltese_47KEY Windows 1252
Mongolian-Cyrillic Windows 1251
Norwegian Windows 1252
Polish_214 Windows 1250
Polish Programmer Windows 1250
Portuguese Brazil Windows 1252
Portuguese Brazilian ABNT Windows 1252
Portuguese Brazilian ABNT2 Windows 1252
Portuguese Portugal Windows 1252
Romanian Windows 1250
Romanian Legacy Windows 1250
Romanian Standard Windows 1250
Romanian Programmer Windows 1250
Russian Windows 1251
Russian Typewriter Windows 1251
483
Country Code Pages

Serbian Latin Windows 1250
Serbian Cyrillic Windows 1251
Slovak Windows 1250
Slovak QWERTY Windows 1250
Slovenian Windows 1250
Spanish Windows 1252
Spanish Variation Windows 1252
Swedish Windows 1252
Swiss French Windows 1252
Swiss German Windows 1252
Tatar Windows 1251
Thai-Kedmanee Windows 874
Turkish F Windows 1254
Turkish Q Windows 1254
Ukrainian Windows 1251
United Kingdom Windows 1252
United States Windows 1252
US Dvorak Windows 1252
US Dvorak Left Hand Windows 1252
US Dvorak Right Hand Windows 1252
US International Windows 1252
Uzbek Cyrillic Windows 1251
Vietnamese Windows 1258
484
Country Code Pages
Country Code Page Barcodes

Scan the barcode corresponding to the country keyboard code page.
Windows 1250
Latin 2, Central European
Windows 1251
Cyrillic, Slavic
Windows 1252
Latin 1, Western European
Windows 1253
Greek
Windows 1254
Latin 5, Turkish
485
Country Code Pages
Country Code Pages (Continued)
Windows 1255
Hebrew
Windows 1256
Arabic
Windows 1257
Baltic
Windows 1258
Vietnamese
Windows 874
Thai
486
Country Code Pages
Windows 20866
Cyrillic KOI8-R
Windows 932
Japanese Shift-JIS
Windows 936
Simplified Chinese GBK
Windows 54936
Simplified Chinese GB18030
Windows 949
Korean Hangul
Windows 950
Traditional Chinese Big5
487
Country Code Pages
MS-DOS 437
Latin US
MS-DOS 737
Greek
MS-DOS 775
Baltic
MS-DOS 850
Latin 1
MS-DOS 852
Latin 2
488
Country Code Pages
MS-DOS 855
Cyrillic
MS-DOS 857
Turkish
MS-DOS 860
Portuguese
MS-DOS 861
Icelandic
MS-DOS 862
Hebrew
489
Country Code Pages
MS-DOS 863
French Canada
MS-DOS 865
Nordic
MS-DOS 866
Cyrillic
MS-DOS 869
Greek 2
490
Country Code Pages
ISO 8859-1
Latin 1, Western European
ISO 8859-2
Latin 2, Central European
ISO 8859-3
Latin 3, South European
ISO 8859-4
Latin 4, North European
ISO 8859-5
Cyrillic
491
Country Code Pages
ISO 8859-6
Arabic
ISO 8859-7
Greek
ISO 8859-8
Hebrew
ISO 8859-9
Latin 5, Turkish
ISO 8859-10
Latin 6, Nordic
492
Country Code Pages
ISO 8859-11
Thai
ISO 8859-13
Latin 7, Baltic
ISO 8859-14
Latin 8, Celtic
ISO 8859-15
Latin 9
ISO 8859-16
Latin 10, South-Eastern European
493
Country Code Pages
UTF-8
UTF-16LE
UTF-16 Little Endian
UTF-16BE
UTF-16 Big Endian
Mac CP10000
Roman
494
CJK Decode Control
Introduction
This chapter describes control parameters for CJK (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) barcode decode through USB
HID Keyboard Emulation mode.
NOTE: Because ADF does not support CJK character processing, there is no format manipulation for CJK
output.
CJK Control Parameters

Unicode Output Control
Parameter # 973
For a Unicode encoded CJK barcode, select one of the following options for unicode output:
• Universal Output to Unicode and MBCS Application - This default method applies to Unicode and
MBCS expected applications, such as MS Word and Notepad on a Windows host.
NOTE: To support Unicode universal output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See
Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host on page 499.
• Output to Unicode Application Only - This method applies only to Unicode expected applications, such
as MS Word and WordPad, but not Notepad.
* Universal Output
(0)
Unicode Application Only

(1)
495
CJK Decode Control
CJK Output Method to Windows Host

Parameter # 972
For a national standard encoded CJK barcode, select one of the following options for CJK output to a Windows
host:
• Universal CJK Output - This is the default universal CJK output method for US English IME or
Chinese/Japanese/Korean ASCII IME on a Windows host. This method converts CJK characters to
Unicode and emulates the characters when transmitting to the host. Use the Unicode Output Control
parameter to control Unicode output.
NOTE: To support universal CJK output, set up the registry table for the Windows host. See Unicode/CJK
Decode Setup with Windows Host on page 499.
• Other options for CJK output - With the following methods, the scanner sends the CJK character
hexadecimal internal code (Nei Ma) value to the host, or converts the CJK character to Unicode and sends
the hexadecimal Unicode value to the host. When using these methods, the Windows host must select the
corresponding IME to accept the CJK character. See Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host on
page 499.
• Japanese Unicode Output
• Simplified Chinese GBK Code Output
• Simplified Chinese Unicode Output
• Korean Unicode Code Output
• Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows XP)
• Traditional Chinese Big5 Code Output (Windows 7)
• Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows XP)
• Traditional Chinese Unicode Code Output (Windows 7)
NOTE: The Unicode emulate output method depends on the host system (Windows XP or Windows 7).
* Universal CJK Output

(0)
Japanese Unicode Output

(34)
(For Japanese Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese
Unicode IME on the Windows host)
496
CJK Decode Control
CJK Output Method to Windows Host (continued)
Chinese (Simplified) GBK Output

(1)
Chinese (Simplified) Unicode Output

(2)
Korean Unicode Output

(50)
(for Korean Unicode Output, select Simplified Chinese
Unicode IME on the Windows host)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows XP)

(17)
Chinese (Traditional) Big5 Output (Windows 7)

(19)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows XP)

(18)
Chinese (Traditional) Unicode Output (Windows 7)

(20)
497
CJK Decode Control
Non-CJK UTF Barcode Output

Parameter # 960
Some country keyboard type layouts contain characters that do not exist in the default code page (see Country
Keyboard Type Missing Characters on page 498). Although the default code page can not encode these
characters in a barcode, they can be encoded in the UTF-8 barcode. Scan the following barcode to output the
Unicode values by emulation mode.
NOTE: Use this special country keyboard type to decode the non-CJK UTF-8 barcode. After decoding,
re-configure the scanner to use the original country keyboard type.
Use US English IME on Windows. See Unicode Output Control on page 495.
Non-CJK UTF-8 Emulation Output
Country Keyboard Type Missing Characters

Country keyboard type: Tatar, Uzbek, Mongolian, Kyrgyz, Kazakh and Azeri
Default code page: CP1251
Table 41 Missing Characters
ғ Ғ
ҳ Ҳ
қ Қ
һ Һ
ө Ө
ə Ə
ү Ү
ң Ң
җ Җ
₮
ң Ң
ұ Ұ
қ Қ
498
CJK Decode Control
Table 41 Missing Characters (Continued)

ҹ Ҹ
ҝ Ҝ
Country keyboard type: Romanian (Standard)
Table 42 Missing Characters

ș Ș
ț Ț
Country keyboard type: Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT), Portuguese-Brazilian (ABNT2)
Missing character: ₢
Country keyboard type: Azeri-Latin
Missing characters: ə, Ə
Unicode/CJK Decode Setup with Windows Host

This section describes how to set up CJK decode with a Windows host.
Setting Up the Windows Registry Table for Unicode Universal Output

To support the Unicode universal output method, set up the Windows host registry table as follows:
1. Select Start > Run > regedt32 to start the registry editor.
2. Under HKEY_Current_User\Control Panel\Input Method, set EnableHexNumpad to 1 as follows:
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Control Panel\Input Method]
"EnableHexNumpad"="1"
If this key does not exist, add it as type REG_SZ (string value).
3. Reboot the computer to implement the registry change.
Adding CJK IME on Windows

To add the desired CJK input language:
1. Click Start > Control Panel.
499
CJK Decode Control
2. If the Control Panel opens in category view, select Switch to Classic View in the top left corner.
3. Select Regional and Language Options.
4. Click the Language tab.
5. Under Supplemental Language Support, select the Install Files for East Asian Languages check box if not
already selected, and click Apply. This may require a Windows installation CD to install the required files. This
step ensures that the East Asian Languages (CJK) are available.
6. Under Text Services and Input Language, click Details.
7. Under Installed Services, click Add.
8. In the Add Input Language dialog box, choose the CJK input language and keyboard layout or Input Method
Editor (IME) to add.
9. Click OK twice. The language indicator appears in the system tray (at bottom right corner of the desktop by
default). To switch between input languages (keyboard languages) select the language indicator in the system
tray.
10. Select the language indicator in the system tray to select the desired country keyboard type.
11. Verify that the characters displayed on each country's keyboard appear.
500
CJK Decode Control
Selecting the Simplified Chinese Input Method on the Host

To select the Simplified Chinese input method:
• Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows XP: Chinese (Simplified) - NeiMa, then click the input bar to
select Unicode or GBK NeiMa input.
Or
• Select Unicode/GBK input on Windows 7: Chinese (Simplified) - Microsoft Pinyin New Experience
Input Style, then select Tool Menu > Secondary Inputs > Unicode Input or GB Code Input.
501
CJK Decode Control
Selecting the Traditional Chinese Input Method on the Host

To select the Traditional Chinese input method:
• Select Unicode input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Unicode
• Select Big5 input on Windows XP: Chinese (Traditional) - Big5 Code
• Select Unicode/Big5 input on Windows 7: Chinese (Traditional) - New Quick. This option support both
Unicode and Big5 input.
502
Signature Capture
Introduction
CapCode, a signature capture code, is a special pattern that encloses a signature area on a document and allows
a scanner to capture a signature.
There are several accepted patterns that allow automatic identification of different signatures on the same form.
For example, on the federal tax return 1040 form there are three signature areas, one each for two joint filers, and
one for a professional preparer. By using different patterns, a program can correctly identify all three, so they can
be captured in any sequence and still be identified correctly.
Code Structure
Signature Capture Area
A CapCode is printed as two identical patterns on either side of a signature capture box, as shown in Figure 25.
Each pattern extends the full height of the signature capture box.
The box is optional, so you can omit it, replace it with a single baseline, or print a baseline with an "X" on top of it
towards the left, as is customarily done in the US to indicate a request for signature. However, if an "X" or other
markings are added in the signature box area, these are captured with the signature.
Figure 25 CapCode
] tÇx WÉ
x
503
Signature Capture
CapCode Pattern Structure

A CapCode pattern structure consists of a start pattern followed by a separator space, a signature capture box, a
second separator space, and then a stop pattern. Assuming that X is the dimension of the thinnest element, the
start and stop patterns each contains 9X total width in 4 bars and 3 spaces. A 7X quiet zone is required to the left
and to the right of the CapCode pattern.
Figure 26 CapCode Structure
Capture Box
Quiet Start Stop Quiet
Zone Separator Spaces Zone
The separator spaces on either side of the signature capture box can be between 1X and 3X wide.
Start / Stop Patterns

Table 43 lists the accepted start / stop patterns. The bar and space widths are expressed as multiples of X. You
must use the same pattern on either side of a signature capture box. The type value is reported with the captured
signature to indicate the purpose of the signature captured.
Table 43 Start / Stop Pattern Definitions

Bar/Space Patterns
Type
B S B S B S B
1 1 2 2 1 1 1 2
1 2 2 1 1 1 1 5
2 1 1 2 1 1 1 7
2 2 1 1 1 1 1 8
3 1 1 1 1 1 1 9
Table 44 lists selectable parameters used to generate the image of the captured signature.
Table 44 User Defined CapCode Parameters

Parameter Defined
Width Number of pixels
Height Number of pixels
Format JPEG, BMP, TIFF
JPEG quality 1 (most compression) to 100 (best quality)
504
Signature Capture
Table 44 User Defined CapCode Parameters

Parameter Defined
Bits Per Pixel 1 (2 levels)

(not applicable to JPEG format)
4 (16 levels)
8 (256 levels)
BMP format does not use compression, JPEG and TIFF formats do.
Dimensions
The size of the signature capture box is determined by the height and separation of the start and stop patterns. The
line width of the signature capture box is insignificant.
The thinnest element width, referred to here as X, is nominally 10 mils (1 mil = 0.0254 mm). Select this as an exact
multiple of the pixel pitch of the printer used. For example, when using a 203 DPI (dots-per-inch) printer and
printing 2 dots per module, the resulting X dimension is 9.85 mils.
Data Format
The decoder output is formatted according to Table 45. Zebra decoders allow different user options to output or
inhibit barcode type. Selecting "Symbol ID" as the barcode type for output identifies the CapCode with letter "i".
Table 45 Data Format

File Format Image Size
Type (1 byte) Image Data
(1 byte) (4 bytes, BIG Endian)
JPEG - 1 See Table 43, last column (Same bytes as in a data

BMP - 3 file.)
TIFF - 4
505
Signature Capture
Additional Capabilities
Regardless of how the signature is captured, the output signature image is de-skewed and right-side up.
A scanner that captures signatures automatically determines whether it is scanning a signature or a barcode. You
can disable the signature capturing capability in a decoder.
Signature Boxes
Figure 27 illustrates the five acceptable signature boxes.
Figure 27 Acceptable Signature Boxes
Type 2:
Type 5:
Type 7:
Type 8:
Type 9:
506
Non-Parameter Attributes
(Attribute Data Dictionary)
Introduction
This chapter defines non-parameter attributes.
Attributes
Model Number
Attribute #533
Model number of the scanner. This electronic output matches the printout on the physical device label, for example
DS9308-SR00004ZCWW.
Type S
Size (Bytes) 18
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Serial Number
Attribute #534
Unique serial number assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on the
physical device label, for example M1J26F45V.
Type S
Size (Bytes) 16
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
507
Date of Manufacture
Attribute #535
Date of device manufacture assigned in the manufacturing facility. This electronic output matches the printout on
the physical device label, for example 31OCT18 (which reads the 31st of October 2018).
Type S
Size (Bytes) 7
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Date of First Programming

Attribute #614
Date of first electronic programming represents the first time settings where electronically loaded to the scanner
either by 123Scan or via SMS, for example 18MAY17 (which reads the 18th of May 2017).
Type S
Size (Bytes) 7
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Configuration Filename
Attribute #616
The name assigned to the configuration settings loaded electronically to the device either by 123Scan or via SMS.
NOTE: Scanning the Set Defaults barcode automatically changes the configuration filename to factory
defaults.
To indicate the configuration settings loaded to the device were changed, the configuration filename changes to
Modified upon scanning any parameter barcode.
Type S
Size (Bytes) 17
User Mode Access RW
Values Variable
508
Beeper/LED
Attribute #6000
Activates the beeper and/or LED.
Type X
Size (Bytes) N/A
User Mode Access W
Values:
Beep / LED Action Value
1 high short beep 0
2 high short beeps 1
1 low short beep 5
2 low short beeps 6
3 low short beeps 7
4 low short beeps 8
5 low short beeps 9
1 high long beep 10
2 high long beeps 11
1 low long beep 15
2 low long beeps 16
3 low long beeps 17
4 low long beeps 18
5 low long beeps 19
Fast warble beep 20
Slow warble beep 21
High-low beep 22
Low-high beep 23
High-low-high beep 24
Low-high-low beep 25
High-high-low-low beep 26
Green LED off 42
Green LED on 43
Red LED on 47
Red LED off 48
509
Parameter Defaults
Attribute #6001
This attribute restores all parameters to their factory defaults.
Type X
Size (Bytes) N/A
User Mode Access W
Values 0 = Restore Defaults
1 = Restore Factory Defaults
2 = Write Custom Defaults
Parameter Buffer
Attribute #6002
Retrieves entire parameter buffer.
Type A
Size (Bytes) Variable
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Beep on Next Bootup

Attribute #6003
This attribute configures (enables or disables) beep on next boot up of scanner.
Type X
Size (Bytes) N/A
User Mode Access W
Values 0 = Disable beep on next bootup
1 = Enable beep on next bootup
Reboot
Attribute #6004
This attribute initiates a device reboot.
Type X
Size (Bytes) N/A
User Mode Access W
Values N/A
510
Host Trigger Session

Attribute #6005
This attribute triggers a decode session similar to manually depressing the scanner trigger button.
Type X
Size (Bytes) N/A
User Mode Access W
Values 1 = Start Host Trigger Session
0 = Stop Host Trigger Session
Firmware Version
Attribute #20004
The scanner's operating system version. For example, NBRFMAAC or PAAAABS00-007-R03D0.
Type S
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Device Class
Attribute #20007
Description of the device's hardware, for example, Imager or Cordless 2D Imager.
Type S
Size (Bytes) 18
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Scankit Version
Attribute #20008
Identifies the 1D decode algorithms resident on the device, for example SKIT4.33T02.
Type S
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
511
Combined Firmware Version

Attribute #20009
Reports firmware version of the multiple CPU's on the single product with space delimiters, for example
NBRPUAAA NBRPUDAA.
Type S
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
RSM Version
Attribute #20011
Identifies the RSM version resident in the device, for example 2.0.
Type S
Size (Bytes) 3
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Top Level Release Name

Attribute #20012
Returns top level combined image firmware name, for example CAAABS00-008-R00.
Type S
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
Imagekit Version
Attribute #20013
Identifies the 2D decode package resident in the device, for example IMGKIT_4.04T02.
Type S
User Mode Access R
Values Variable
512
DL Parser Version
Attribute #25011
Type Type Array
Values Variable
DL Parser Activated
Attribute #25012
Type Flag
Size (bytes) 1
Values 0 = Not Activated (SR Model)

1 = Activated (DL Model)
ScanSpeed Analytics
IMPORTANT: Decodes times are only reported for barcodes decoded in hand-held mode.
Identifies problematic barcodes to speed up scanning processes.
Zebra ScanSpeed Analytics software allows you to visually identify barcodes that slow down processing and
impact efficiency. Over time, the software uses collected data to eliminate poor performing barcodes from
inventory. For more information go to www.zebra.com/scanspeedanalytics.
513
ScanSpeed Analytics
Introduction
IMPORTANT: Decodes times are only reported for barcodes decoded in hand-held mode.
This chapter describes the Zebra ScanSpeed Analytics software that allows the identification of barcodes that slow
down processes. Over time, the collected data can be used to eliminate poor performing barcodes from inventory.
When scanners capture and read data faster, processes run faster.
For more information go to www.zebra.com/scanspeedanalytics.
Histogram Decode Information

Within the scanner, each barcode symbology has a series of RSM attributes (Table 46) to access its statistic
information: Decode Count; Minimum Decode Time; Slowest Decode Time; Average Decode Time; Slowest
Decode Data; and, ScanSpeed Histogram.
ScanSpeed Histogram is an array of eight items of double WORD (4 bytes). Each bin holds the count of decoded
barcodes per range of decode time. For example, the range of Bin1 decode times is from 0 ms to 75 ms. All the Bin
time ranges are show below:
Bin1 <= 75ms
Bin2 <= 110ms
Bin3 <= 170ms
Bin4 <= 300ms
Bin5 <= 600ms
Bin6 <= 1000ms
Bin7 <= 1500ms
Bin8 > 1500ms
123Scan displays this histogram data in its Statistics tab shown in Figure 28 on page 515.
514
ScanSpeed Analytics
Figure 28 123Scan Statistics Tab - Histogram Data
Table 46 Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information

Decode Count Slowest
Hex Value Decode
Minimum Average Slowest
(Shown in Time ScanSpeed
Barcode Name Decimal Decode Decode Decode
Little (Max Histogram
Value Time Time Data
Endian Decode
Format) Time)
UPC 15421 0x3D, 15424 15425 15426 15707 15706

0x3C
EAN/JAN 15428 0x44, 15431 15432 15433 15709 15708

0x3C
2 of 5 15449 0x59, 15452 15453 15454 15715 15714

0x3C
Codabar 15456 0x60, 15459 15460 15461 15717 15716

0x3C
Code 11 15477 0x75, 15480 15481 15482 15723 15722

0x3C
Code 128 15442 0x52, 15445 15446 15447 15713 15712

0x3C
Code 39 15435 0x4B, 15438 15439 15440 15711 15710

0x3C
515
ScanSpeed Analytics
Table 46 Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information (Continued)

Hex Value Decode
Endian Decode
Format) Time)
Code 93 15463 0x67, 15466 15467 15468 15719 15718

0x3C
Composite 15519 0x9F, 15522 15523 15524 15735 15734

0x3C
GS1 DataBar 15512 0x98, 15515 15516 15517 15733 15732

0x3C
MSI 15470 0x6E, 15473 15474 15475 15721 15720

0x3C
Data Matrix 15491 0x83, 15494 15495 15496 15727 15726

0x3C
PDF 15484 0x7C, 15487 15488 15489 15725 15724

0x3C
Postal Codes 15505 0x91, 15508 15509 15510 15731 15730

0x3C
QR 15498 0x8A, 15501 15502 15503 15729 15728

0x3C
Aztec 15533 0xAD, 15536 15537 15538 15739 15738

0x3C
OCR 15526 0xA6, 15529 15530 15531 15737 15736

0x3C
Maxicode 15659 0x2B, 15662 15663 15664 15755 15754

0x3D
GS1-Data Matrix 15673 0x39, 15676 15677 15678 15747 15746

0x3D
GS1-QR Code 15680 0x40, 15683 15684 15685 15749 15748

0x3D
Coupon 15666 0x32, 15669 15670 15671 15757 15756

0x3D
Other 1D 15540 0xB4, 15543 15544 15545 15741 15740

0x3C
Other 2D 15547 0xBB, 15550 15551 15552 15743 15742

0x3C
Other 15554 0xC2, 15557 15558 15559 15745 15744

0x3C
516
ScanSpeed Analytics
Table 46 Attributes Numbers of Barcode Symbology Statistic Information (Continued)

Hex Value Decode
Endian Decode
Format) Time)
Unused Statistic 19999 0x1F, 19999 19999 19999 19999 19999

ID 0x4E
Example
The UPC data below is taken from the first row of Table 46 above.
UPC DECODE COUNT

Attribute #: 15421
Type: DWORD (4 bytes)
Description: Returns the UPC barcode decode count, including all variants (UPC-A, UPC-E, UPC-E1, etc.).
UPC MINIMUM DECODE TIME

Attribute #: 15424
Description: Returns the Minimum Decode Time in milliseconds of all UPC barcode decodes.
UPC SLOWEST DECODE TIME

Attribute #: 15425
Description: Returns the Slowest Decode Time in milliseconds of all UPC barcode decodes.
UPC AVERAGE DECODE TIME

Attribute #: 15426
Description: Returns the Average Decode Time in milliseconds of all UPC barcode decodes.
UPC SLOWEST DECODE DATA

Attribute #: 15707
Type: Array of BYTE (25 bytes)
Description: Returns the UPC barcode data with the Slowest Decode Time.
UPC SCANSPEED HISTOGRAM

Attribute #: 15706
Type: Array of DWORD (32 bytes)
Description: Returns the UPC barcode ScanSpeed Histogram.
517
ScanSpeed Analytics
Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode

The user can configure the scanner to store the image(s) of the slowest decoded barcode.
Table 47 RSM Attributes to Store/Retrieve Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode

Attribute # Type Property Default Value Description
1755 Array of RW Default format = Attribute 1755 is named List of Stored

WORD {0x1F, 0x4E} Images.
0x1F, 0x4E This attribute defines which image, by

symbology, of the slowest decoded
No image retained barcode will be stored in the scanner.
Barcode name = One symbology image can be stored in
Unused Statistic ID the scanner.
Decimal value = 19999 Note:
see last row in Table 46
on page 515) {0x1F, 0x4E} = a 1 WORD value which is
in little-endian format.
0x3D, 0x3C
Image retained for UPC
Decimal value = 15421
Sample image retained
for UPC only = {0x3D,
0x3C}
1756 WORD RW 0 Attribute 1756 is named Threshold To

Store Slowest Decode Barcode Image.
This attribute defines the threshold above
which the scanner stores the image of the
slowest decoded barcode.
Specify a Histogram Bin value (0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6 or 7).
The purpose of setting up this threshold
is to reduce the barcode image storage
frequency.
0 - No threshold check (default value)
1 - Specifies the decode time threshold
as Histogram Bin 1 value of 75 ms
Similarly, the other Histogram Bins
specify the corresponding threshold time
as follows:
Bin 1 <= 75ms
Bin 2 <= 110ms
Bin 3 <= 170ms
Bin 4 <= 300ms
Bin 5 <= 600ms
Bin 6 <= 1000ms
Bin 7 <= 1500ms
518
ScanSpeed Analytics
Table 47 RSM Attributes to Store/Retrieve Image of Slowest Decoded Barcode (Continued)

Attribute # Type Property Default Value Description
6036 WORD WO N/A Attribute 6036 is named Retrieve Slowest

Decoded Barcode Image.
The image must be retrieved using the
SNAPI communication protocol.
This attribute allows you to retrieve from
the scanner a single image, by
symbology, of the slowest decoded data.
For example, to retrieve the slowest
decoded barcode image for a UPC
symbology, enter its hex value, 0x3D,
0x3C (decimal value 15421), using a SET
command.
See Table 46 on page 515 for symbology
hex and decimal values.
519
Sample Barcodes
IMPORTANT: To read a sample barcode the parameter must be enabled. To enable a parameter scan the
appropriate Enable barcode in Symbologies.
UPC/EAN
UPC-A, 100%
0 12345 67890 5
UPC-A with 2-digit Add-on
34
0 12345 67890
520
Sample Barcodes
UPC-A with 5-digit Add-on
98765
0 12345 67890
UPC-E
0 425261 4
UPC-E with 2-digit Add-on
98
0 425261
521
Sample Barcodes
UPC-E with 5-digit Add-on
87654
0 425261
EAN-8
EAN-13, 100%
3 456789 012340
522
Sample Barcodes
EAN-13 with 2-digit Add-on
12
3 456789 012340
EAN-13 with 5-digit Add-on
54321
3 456789 012340
Code 128
1234567890
523
Sample Barcodes
GS1-128
(01)94019097685457(13)170119(30)17
Code 39
123ABC
Code 93
524
Sample Barcodes
Code 11 with 2 Check Digits
2468101275
Interleaved 2 of 5
12345678901231
MSI with 2 Check Digits
123455834
525
Sample Barcodes
Chinese 2 of 5
45454545454
Matrix 2 of 5
223344
Korean 3 of 5
1400230
526
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional (formerly GS1 DataBar-14)
7612341562341
GS1 DataBar Truncated
(01)00614141999996
GS1 DataBar Stacked
527
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional
GS1 DataBar Limited
GS1 DataBar Expanded
528
Sample Barcodes
GS1 DataBar Expanded Stacked
2D Symbologies
PDF417
Data Matrix
529
Sample Barcodes
GS1 Data Matrix
Maxicode
QR Code
GS1 QR
530
Sample Barcodes
MicroQR
Aztec
0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456
7890123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123
456789
Grid Matrix
NOTE Grid Matrix must be enabled to read the following barcode (see Grid Matrix on page 220).
531
Sample Barcodes
Han Xin
Postal Codes
US Postnet
UK Postal
Japan Postal
5008861
532
Sample Barcodes
Australian Post
39549554
OCR
OCR-A
OCR-B
MICR E13B
533
Sample Barcodes
US Currency
534
Index
Numerics aiming
momentary trigger mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 pattern, hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 pattern, hands-free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
123scan LED indicators (on scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 pattern, snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
2D bar codes snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 aiming pattern
aztec inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 ASCII character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 attributes, non-parameter
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
data matrix mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 configuration filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 date of first programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
grid matrix mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 host trigger session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 parameter defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
han xin inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
linked QR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 scankit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 scanspeed analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 aztec bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
A
AAMVA field parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 B
accessories bar codes
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1D quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 alphanumeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 analog gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
partner portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
stands and holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
invalid rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
transmit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 CJK
ADF programming indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 non-CJK UTF bar code output . . . . . . . . . . . 498
advanced data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 367 output method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
535
Index
unicode output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 disable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 driver’s license parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 AAMVA field parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 driver’s license date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
codabar security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 driver’s license gender format . . . . . . . . . . . .384
code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 no separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 parsing field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 send control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 send keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
check ISBT table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
code 128 fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 enable all code types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 enter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . 155 fixed exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 FN1 substitution values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 gain and exposure priority for snapshot mode . .106
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
code 128 emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 grid matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 grid matrix mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 convert to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . .200
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . .196
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
trioptic code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 IBM
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 bar code configuration directive . . . . . . . . . .300
composite beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 port address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 IDC
GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
continuous bar code read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 border type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
country code page defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 captured image brighten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
country code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 captured image sharpen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
country keyboard types (country codes) . . . . . . . 466 delay time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
crop to address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 find box outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 maximum rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
decode session timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 maximum text length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
digimarc digital watermarks/dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 minimum text length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
digital gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
536
Index
symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
X coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Y coordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
zoom limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 103 numeric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
illumination brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 numeric bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 OCR
image capture check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 check digit multiplier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
image cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 check digit validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
image file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 inverse OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
image rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 maximum characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 MICR E13B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 minimum character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 OCR-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173, 174 OCR-A variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 172 OCR-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 OCR-B variant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
inverse 1D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
JPEG size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
keyboard wedge US currency serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
alternate numeric keypad emulation . . . . . . . 306 operational modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 PDF prioritization timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 pid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 pid value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
intra-keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
send make and break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Korean 3 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . .227
linked QR mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
macro PDF UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
abort entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
flush buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . .231
check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 prefix/suffix values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 product information
transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 manufacturing info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
maxicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
microPDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
mobile phone/display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
motion tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
537
Index
redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 unique bar code reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

RS-232 unsolicited heartbeat interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 UPC/EAN supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . .140
beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 UPC/EAN/JAN
check receive errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
hardware handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
host types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
intercharacter delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
nixdorf beep LED options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288, 289 transmit UPC-A check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 transmit UPC-E check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 transmit UPC-E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
scan data options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 UPC reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
securPharm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
securPharm output formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
signature capture bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
signature capture height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 user programmable supplementals . . . . . . . .140
signature capture JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 USB
signature capture width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 bar code configuration directive . . . . . . . . . .249
silence operational mode changes . . . . . . . . . . . 108 beep directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
snapshot aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 caps lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
snapshot mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 convert case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
SSI convert unknown to code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
baud rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
boot up event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 device type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237, 238
check parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 fast HID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
data packet format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 function key mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
decode event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 IBM specification version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
host character timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 keyboard FN1 substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
host RTS line state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
host serial response timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 keypad emulation with leading zero . . . . . . .245
interpacket delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 keystroke delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
multipacket option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 polling interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
parameter event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 quick keypad emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 simulated caps lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 SNAPI handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
software handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 static CDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 unknown characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
symbologies barcodes
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
tab key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 beep duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
timeout between decodes, different symbols . . . . 80 beep tones
timeout between decodes, same symbol . . . . . . . 79 standard tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
transmit code ID character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 direct decode indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
transmit no read message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 hand-held decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
triggered timeout, same symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 hand-held trigger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
538
Index
hands-free decode aiming pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 input method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501

low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 cleaning the devices
momentary trigger mode timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 approved for standard devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
parameter scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 how to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
picklist mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
set defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 codabar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
speaker volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 CLSI editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
suppress power up beeps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
time delay to low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 NOTIS editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
UPC/EAN/JAN security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
EAN/JAN extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 start and stop characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
USB code 11 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
CDC beep on bel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
user preferences lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
default table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
beep transmit check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 code 128 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
beep tone adjustment check ISBT table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
standard beep tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 fnc4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
beeper GS1-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
beep after good decode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 ISBT 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
suppress on power up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ISBT concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
beeper indicators ISBT concatenation redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
123scan host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
ADF programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
image capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 code 128 emulation bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
parameter programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 code 39 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
RS-232 host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 code 32 prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 code 39 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
USB host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 convert code 39 to code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
full ASCII conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
C reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
cables sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520, 524
inserting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 33 trioptic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 code 93 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
character sets sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
ALT key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 code identifiers
ASCII . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 AIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
extended key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 modifier characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
F key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
GUI key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 transmitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
numeric key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 communication protocol
PF key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 cable interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
Chinese 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 composite bar codes
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526 beep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
CJK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 composite CC-A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 composite CC-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
country keyboard missing characters . . . . . . . . . 498 composite inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
decode setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 composite TLC-39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
539
Index
GS1-128 emulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 keyboard characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391

UPC composite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 no separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
configurations parser version ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 rule example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
stands and holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
E
connecting EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
IBM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 eclevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 error indications
keyboard wedge interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 exposure options
conventions analog gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
notational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 autoexposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
country code pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 digital gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 fixed exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
country codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 gain and exposure priority for snapshot mode . .106
cropping images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 103
D F
data matrix bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 features, scanner
data matrix inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
GS1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 firmware
mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 flash update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531, 532, 533
decode ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 G
all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 gain
DL parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 grid matrix bar codes
image capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 gs1 data matrix bar codes
OCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 GS1 databar bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 convert GS1 databar to UPC/EAN/JAN . . . . . . .198
SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 GS1 databar expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 GS1 databar limited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
user preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 GS1 databar limited margin check . . . . . . . . . . .200
digimarc digital watermarks/dw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 GS1 databar omnidirectional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
discrete 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
driver’s license parsing GS1 QR bar codes
AAMVA field parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
ADF example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
control characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 H
data fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 han xin bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
date format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 inverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
field parsing bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 host specific indicators
gender format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 123scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
540
Index
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
host types security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
IBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
keyboard wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
SSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
J
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
I
IBM
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
K
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 keyboard types (country codes)
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Albanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Arabic (101) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
bar code acceptance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Arabic (102) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Arabic (102) Azerty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
capture region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Azeri (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Azeri (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Belarusian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
demonstrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Bosnian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
image post processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Bosnian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Bulgarian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
quick start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Bulgarian Cyrillic (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
quick start form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Canadian French (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
sample setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Canadian French Win7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Canadian Multilingual Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83, 103 Chinese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Chinese (Simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
image capture Chinese (Traditional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Croatian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
operational modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Czech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
image capture beeper and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . 42 Czech (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
image options Czech (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Danish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
cropping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Dutch (Netherlands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Estonian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
image brightness (target white) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Faeroese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
image enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Finnish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
image rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 French (Canada) 2000/XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
image size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 French (Canada) 95/98 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
JPEG image options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 French (France) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 French International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
JPEG size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Galician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
signature capture file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Greek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
information, service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Greek (220) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
interface Greek (319) Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Greek 220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
interleaved 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Greek 319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
check digit verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Greek Latin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
convert to EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Greek Polytonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
febraban . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Hebrew Israel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171, 172 Hungarian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
541
Index
Hungarian_101KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 keyboard wedge

Irish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Islandic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Italian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Italian (142) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 keyboard map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Japanese (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Korean 3 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Japanese (SHIFT-JIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Kazakh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Korean (ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Korean (Hangul) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
L
Kyrgyz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 LED indicators
Latin American . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 123scan host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Latvian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 ADF programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Latvian (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 image capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Lithuanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Lithuanian (IBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Macedonian (FYROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 parameter programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Maltese_47KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 RS-232 host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Mongolian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Norwegian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Polish (214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 USB host specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Polish (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Portuguese (Brazil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 M
Portuguese (Brazilian ABNT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 macro PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Portuguese (Portugal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 abort entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Romanian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 flush buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Romanian (Legacy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 macro PDF beeper and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Romanian (Programmer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Romanian (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 approved cleaners for standard devices . . . . . . . .49
Russian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 how to clean the devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Russian (Typewriter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 known harmful ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Serbian (Cyrillic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 matrix 2 of 5 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
Serbian (Latin) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Slovak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Slovak (QWERTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Slovenian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Spanish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 maxicode bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Spanish (Variation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Swedish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 microPDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Swiss French . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 microQR code bar codes
Swiss German . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Tatar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 mounting
Thai (Kedmanee) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Turkish F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 MSI bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Turkish Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 check digit algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
UK English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 check digits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Ukranian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
US Dvorak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
US Dvorak Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
US Dvorak Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 transmit check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
US English . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 multicode data formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
US International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Uzbek . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Vietnamese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
542
Index
N Q
non-parameter attributes QR code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
beep on next bootup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
configuration filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 microQR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
date of first programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531, 532, 533
date of manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
host trigger session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
R
model number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
parameter defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 related software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 RS-232
scankit version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
scanspeed analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
host parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
RSM
O
commands and responses over SSI . . . . . . . . . .258
OCR
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
S
sample bar codes
aztec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
P
Chinese 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
parameter programming indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
partner portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
PDF417 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520, 524
PDF prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531, 532, 533
pinouts grid matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
scanner signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 gs1 data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
postal code bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 GS1 databar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Australia post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 GS1 QR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Australia post format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 han xin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
Japan postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
mailmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Korean 3 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Netherlands KIX code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 matrix 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532 microQR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
transmit UK postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 MSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
transmit US postal check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 PDF417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531, 532, 533
UPU FICS postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 UK postal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
US planet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 UPC/EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 US postnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
USPS 4CB/One Code/Intelligent Mail . . . . . . . . . 231 scanning
power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
power supply scanning beeper and LED indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 scanspeed analytics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
preferred symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 security
product id (pid) value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 1D quiet zone level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
product id type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 intercharacter gap size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
product information redundancy level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
manufacturing info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 security level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
report software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 setting defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
543
Index
setup unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

connecting a keyboard wedge host . . . . . . . . . . 302 UPC/EAN bar codes
connecting a USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 supplemental redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
connecting an IBM most . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 UPC/EAN/JAN bar codes
connecting an RS-232 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 bookland EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 bookland ISBN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
inserting interface cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 convert UPC-E to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 convert UPC-E1 to UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
signal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 coupon report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
signature capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 decode supplementals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
bits per pixel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 EAN-13/JAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 EAN-8/JAN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 ISSN EAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
file format selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 supplemental AIM ID format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 transmit UPC-A check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
JPEG quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 transmit UPC-E check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
signature boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 transmit UPC-E1 check digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
start and stop patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 UCC coupon extended code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 UPC reduced quiet zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
SMS LED indicators (on scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 UPC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
software tools UPC-A preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
123Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 UPC-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 UPC-E preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 UPC-E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
preferred symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 UPC-E1 preamble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
speaker user programmable supplementals . . . . . . . . . . .140
speaker volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 UPC/EAN/JAN barcodes
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 EAN/JAN zero extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
SSI USB
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 255 default parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
event reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
handshaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 255
low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
RSM commands and responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
RTS CTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
symbologies
bar codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
T
technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
trigger mode, hand-held . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
U
unicode
output control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
544
www.zebra.com

Manual Book Scanner Zebra Ds9308-Prg-En

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Book Scanner Zebra Ds9308-Prg-En

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Book Scanner Zebra Ds9308-Prg-En

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DS9308

WARRANTY: For complete warranty information, go to www.zebra.com/warranty.

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT: For complete EULA information, go to www.zebra.com/eula.

For Australia Only

Change Date Description

-01 Rev A 09/2019 Initial release.

List of Figures ...................................................................................................................................... 20

About This Guide

Locking Table Mount ................................................................................................................. 36

123Scan and Software Tools

Maintenance, Troubleshooting, and Technical Specifications

User Preferences & Miscellaneous Options

Default Parameters ................................................................................................................... 62

Setting Parameters ......................................................................................................................... 99

Bookland EAN ......................................................................................................................... 134

I 2 of 5 Security Level .............................................................................................................. 175

GS1 Data Matrix ...................................................................................................................... 212

USB Fast HID .......................................................................................................................... 241

SSI Host Parameters .................................................................................................................... 262

IBM Host Parameters .................................................................................................................... 298

Keyboard Wedge Interface

OCR Template ........................................................................................................................ 326

Intelligent Document Capture (Hand-held Mode Only)

IDC Height ............................................................................................................................... 353

Digimarc (DS9308-SRD and DS9308-DLD)

Data Formatting: ADF, MDF, Preferred Symbol

Driver’s License Set Up (DS9308-DL)

Date Format ............................................................................................................................ 385

ASCII Character Sets

Communication Protocol Functionality

Country Code Pages

CJK Decode Control

Non-CJK UTF Barcode Output ............................................................................................... 498

Non-Parameter Attributes (Attribute Data Dictionary)

MICR E13B ............................................................................................................................. 533

Table 43. Start / Stop Pattern Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504

Table 1 DS9308 Scanner Only Configurations

Table 2 Scanner Accessories

BRKT-LM0093C-04 DS9308 Locking-mount bracket, Black. Can be used to lock the

BRKT-MM0093C-0W DS9308 Multi-mount bracket, White. Can be used as wall mount

BRKT-LM0093C-0W DS9308 Locking-mount bracket, White. Can be used to lock the

Power Supplies PWR-WUA5V4W0US Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, US/CA/MX/JP/TW

PWR-WUA5V4W0EU Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, EU/UK

PWR-WUA5V4W0CN Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, CN

PWR-WUA5V4W0AU Power Supply, 5VDC, 100 - 240VAC, HK/AU

• Bold text is used to highlight the following:

Related Documents and Software

When contacting support, please have the following information available:

• Serial number of the unit

Provide Documentation Feedback

Figure 1 DS9308 Scanner

The DS9308 scanner supports:

Setting Up the Scanner

Figure 3 Inserting the Cable

Removing the Interface Cable

Connecting Power (if required)

Configuring the Scanner

Mounting the Scanner

Installing Multi-Mount With Adhesive Pad

Figure 5 Mounting with Adhesive Pad